Pakistan Studies Book

STUDIES
CO PULSORY
For
-- ---�---
-
--------�....----
BS-4 Year
1/{l{fi P11ki.>tta11 St11Jies or (BS-4 ••ear�)
2. I 6 General Elect ion ( 1945-46) 47
�. l 7 Cabinet Mission Plan ( I <J46) 49
2.18 Interim Government ( 1946) 52
2.19 3rd June Plan ( 1947) 56

2.20 The India independence act of ( 194 7) 58
2.21 The Early Problems of Pakistan 59
Exercise No.2 63-68
Chapter-3 People and Land
3. l Indus valley civilization 69
3.2 The Muslims Advent in Sub-Continent 73
3.J Muslim rule in the sub-continent 76
3.4 Rise of the British Rule and after Affects 77
3.5 The war of independence (185 7) 79
3.6 Decline of Muslim rule in the sub-continent 81
37 Geo strategic importance of Pakistan 83
3.8 Physical features of Pakistan 86
Exercise No. 3 92-93
(FINAL TERMS)
Chapter-4 Political and Constitutional Development of Pakistan
4.1 Failure of Parliamentary Democracy in Pakistan. 94
4. 2 Quaid-e-Azam as the first Governor General of Pakistan 99
(August 1947 to September 1948), Liaquat Ali Khan as the First
Prime Minister of Pakistan (August 1947 to October 1951)
4.3 Khawaja Nazimuddin as the Governor General of I 00

Pakistan (September 1948 to October 195 I )
VI
Hudi Pakistan Studies for (BS-4 years)
4.4 Malik Ghulam Muhammad As the Governor General of I 04

Pakistan (October 1991 to August 1955) Khawaja Nazm-
ud-Din as the Prime Minister of Pakislan (October 1951
to April 1953)
4.5 Sikandar Mriza as the Governor General of Pakistan 111
(October 1955 to March 1956)
4.6 Sikandar Mirza as the First of Presic:Jent of Pakistan 115
(March 1956 to October 1958)
4.7 Muhammad Ayoub Khan as the President of Pakistan 11 7

. (October 1956 to March 1969)
4.8 General Yahya Khan as the President of Pakistan (March 127

1969 to December 1971)
4.9 Zulfiqar Ali Bhutto as the President of Pakistan 138

(December 1971 to August 1973)
4.10 The Constitution of 1973 138
4.1 1 General Zia-ul-Haq's Reign ( I 977-1988) 149
4.12 Benazir Bhutto as Prime Minister of Pakislan 155

(1988-1990) -.6
,.
4.13 General Pervaiz Musharaf as the Chief Executive of I 61
Pakistan (October 1999 to June 200 I)
4. 14 Amendments in the Constitution of Pakistan l 973 166

Chapter-5 Economic and Social Issues in Pakistan

5.1 Industrialization Development and Problems 179
5.2 Agriculture Development and Problems 189
5.3 Population Growth 197
5.4 Unemployment 202
5.5 Poverty 207

\
Vll
Hadi Pakistan Studies for (BS-4 years)
Chapter-6 Relations with Neighbors and Supper power country

6.1 Pakistan - China Relations 218
6.2 Pakistan -India Relations 219
63 Pakistan -Iran Relations 221
6.4 Pakistan -Afghanistan Relations 223
6.5 Pakistan -Turkey Relations 224
6.6 Pakistan -Saudi Arabia Relations 226
6.7 Pakistan -.Bangladesh Relations 227
6.8 Pakistan -Indonesia Relations 228
Exercise N o.6 230-232
APPENDIX 233-251
1. Society and its structure 233
2. Features of Pakistani society and culture 236
3. Natural Resources of Pakistan 240
4. Illiteracy
243
5. Foreign policy of Islamic Republic of Pakistan 246
6. Pakistan as an Islamic welfare state 250
Old Papers '
2S3-256
...
----------------------l!!a!!!!!l!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!\'111
-
CHAPTER-I
HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVE
1. 1 Ideological rationale with special reference to:
Definition of Ideology
The social. political and religious programme of a moveme�t that be�omes
a collective objective of a nation 1 s called Ideology. It means the aim according to
which human beings plan about their future. It i5 the body of ideas on which a
particular political. economic. social. or religious system is based. According to
George Brass ·.·any plan or programme of common life based upon thinking and
philosophy is called ideology.''
Ideology of Pakistan
Pakistan is an ideological state and its ideology is based on Islam that'
guides the Muslims in all fields of life. Ideology of Pakistan basically means that
Pakistan should be a state where the Muslims should have an opportunity to live
according to the faith and creed on the Islamic principles. They should have all the
resources at their disposal to enhance the Islamic culture and civilization. It is clear
that Ideology of rakistan is the practical shape of teaching of Islam and it would
not be womg to say that Islam is the centre of ideology of Pakistan.
Ideolo gy of Pakistan and different scholars
Ideology of Pakistan is defined by the different scholars as:
Allama Alloud-Din-Siddiqui defined ideolo gy of Pakistan as:
''Ideology of Pakistan is the name of implementation of Islamic principles
on persons, on groups and on government, and Islam should be stronger than the
strongest forces, here.''
Syed Ali Abbas former professor of history defi11ed ideology of Pakistan as:
'"Ideology of Pakistan and ideology of Islam have same meaning. Actually
ideology of Pakistan is the practical shape of the teaching of Islam''.
Dr. Asian, Syed Defined the Ideology of Pakisf(lll as;

--Ideology of Pakistan is the name of moulding of indi\ idual and collecti\.e
lives according to Islam and also of saving them from conflicting ideologies." ·
,..
I
Origion of Two Nations Theory and Ideology of Paki�tan

In the perspective of the sub-continent. two-nation theory means tha� t\\o
major nations. the Muslims and the Hindus, were settled there. It was forn1e� 1n the
sub-continent when Hindu Raja Samri of Kadanga Noor accepte d Islam. It 1s clear
from the words of the Quaid-e-Azam, "'Pakistan had come into being when the first
H.indu became a Muslim." Ideology of Pakistan is based on the two nation theory.
It was also the basis of the struggle for the creation of Pakistan which maintained
that the Hindus and the Muslims were two Separate-nations. They, inspite of living
together for centuries, could not forget their individual cultures. civilizations,
literatures, religions and ways of life. So, they cannot be n1erged in any other nation
because their philosophy of life i!:> based on the principles of their separate
religions.
The Muslims of India found it difficult to live according to the principles of
Islam in the united India. The Muslin1s apprehended that the Hindus would
dominate them being in majority after the British quite India. So, after great
consideration. they decided to establish a Muslim state consisting of those areas
where they were in majority. This was the way out of shedding the slaver) and
achieving a piece of land to develop an Islamic system of government. The idea
became popular among the Muslims and became their objective. In this way the
Quid-e-Azam changed the destiny of the sub-continent. He faced the Hindus and
the British and acquired a separate hoineland for the MusJims. Al-Beruni writs in
his famous book ·'Kitabul Hind" ·The Hindus society 1naintained this peculiar
character over the centuries. The two societies. Hind·. and Muslims, J ike two
streains have sometimes touched b ut never merged, each following its separate
course'·.
1.2 SIR SYED AHMAD KHAN AND IDEOLOGY OF PAKISTAN
Biography
Sir Syed Ahmed Khan was born in Delhi on 17th October I 817. He started his
career as a Naib Munshi in Agra, and promoted to Naib An1in (Sharishtadar or reader)
in Delhi 1838. He qualified three year later as a sub-judge and sen,ed in the judicial
department at various places. The independence war of 1857 was one of the turning
points of Sir Syed Ahmed's life. So he devoted himself to the welfare of the Indians
irrespective of their race and religion. But the communal attitude of the Hindus towards
the Muslims compelled him to change his view about them. Sir Syed Ahmed Khan
was a great lover of Islam. He felt very sorry for the pitiful condition of the Muslim
nation. His earnest desire was that the Muslims should regain their lost glor and live
in the sub-continent with great dignity. y
2
Hadi Pakifitan Studies for (BS-4 years)
Pioneer of Two Nation Theory

Sir Syed Ahmed was the pioneer of 1 wo ation Theory in the sub-
continent. He used the word HTwo Nation theory" due to Hindi Urdu Controversy
in Banaras in 186 7. So he declared the Muslims, a eparate Nation. He convinced
the government that there were at least two nations settled in the sub-continant. one
of them was Muslims and the other was Hindus. According to him the Muslims
were a separate nation in every respect because their civilization, culture. language.
customs literature. religion and way of life are different from those of the Hindus.
This theory infused a political spirit and pushed them to the freedom movement. So
India was partitioned because of Two-Nation Theory.
Concept of Muslims as a Nation
Sir Syed Ahmed Khan was the first person who used the word "Nation'' for
the Muslims of the sub-continent. In the sub-continant the concept of Muslims as a
Nation developed before the creation of Pakistan. Pakistan was the product of this
concept of Nation hood.
Father of Pakistan Movement
Sir Syed Ahmed Khan never, struggled for a separate homeland for the
Muslims and never used the word '"Pakistan" in any shape, because the word
·'Pakistan" was created after his death and Pakistan becan1e an independent state
after his death. But his services for the Muslims of the sub-continent are considered
as first brick laid in the foundation of Pakistan. So he can be regarded as the father
of Pakistan Movement. Maulvi Abdul Haque appreciated the role played by Sir
Syed and said that the first stone of the foundation of Pakistan was laid dovm by
this old man.
Political Services
The political career of Sir Syed Ahmed Khan began after 1857. He wrote
tarikh-i-Sarkashi Binjnore in 1858 and the same year he wrote another book
entitled Asbab-i-Baghawat Hind. He advised the Muslims not to join All India
Congress because it was a communal party of the Hindus and the Muslims were not
in position, to involve into the anti-government activities. But he himself took
important political steps in this regard. He proved the Muslims a separate nation.
On the basis of Two Nation Theory, he demanded for special seats for the Muslims
in the local councils. He started a movement against the open competitive
examinations for superior services. In 1883 he alsQ favoured "Separate electorate'·
for the Muslims. In l 864� he founded the British Indian Association. In 1888, he set
up the "Patriotic Association" to meet the propaganda of the Congress. Many
3
1/udi Paki\la11 Stu<iie.\jor (BS-4 years) -
nber 189� he founded
1 lindus and the Musli 1ns joined that Asc::,oc1ation. In Dcc�i
ociatio ns advol:..ttcd the
.. Muhammadan Defense Association··. All these l\ss
Muslim· s emotions.
Educational Serv ices
.sJ!in.s become
ir Syed Ahn1ed Khan was very anxious to help the Mu
ation and non
educated. especially in n,odern sciences. He argued that n1odcrn educ
political activities 1night be the key towards Muslim advancement. So he launc ht!d
the Aligarh Move111ent which produced educated leadership. 24'" May l 875 JS an
in1portant date in our struggle for a separate Homeland. lt was the day wh�n the
first brick of the foundation of Pakistan was laid by ir Syed Ahmed Khan. in the
shape of M.A.0 High School in Aligarh.
Conclusion
No doubt Sir Syed Ahn1ed Khan was a great patron of the Muslims His
educational. literary, religious and social services created political awakening
among the Muslims. They were enabled to participate fully in the country's
politics. Sar Syed Ahmed Khan's fear of Hindus domination sowed the seed of the
··Two Nation Theory". On this basis the All-India Muslin1 League demanded a
separate state for the Muslims of India. Its main purpose was to protect the
political, religious and social rights of the Muslims. Sir Syed was the great man
because he contributed greatly to the Muslims struggle for their identity. He died
on 27th March 1898 and was buried in Aligarh. He was the man who for nearly
11alf a century led the Muslims and took them out fron1 the abyss of disintegration.
1.3 ALLAMA MUHAMMAD IQBAL AND IDEOLOGY OF PAKJSTAN
Allama Iqbal was one of the Muslim Jead�rs who for the first time gave the
concept of a separate state for the Muslims keeping in view the two nation theof}.
But he never used the �ord of Pakistan in his speeches. His demand for separate
homeland for the �ush�s of the sub-continent is considered as the demand for
p stan and all his sayings and addresses are
� considered as the ideology of
Pakis tan .
. 1. Ideology of Islam
In 1930, Allama Iqbal explained the Ideology .
·
e ad vo cated
of Is I am and reJecte d the 1·dea
of on e na tio n. H that �e M us lims had a separate nationhood He said
. I · . .
"Th · e le ss on w h 1c h l earnt rom
fi histor y is that Islam a 1v,ays help
· ed the Muls 1m s a 1
the time o f d"ffi 1 1cu Ity but Mus11ms did not save Is 1aill. E v
�n. to day, Ideology f
0
Islam can save you r being from destruction by uni.ting .
your d1v1ded powers."
4
f/11di Pukisra11 Studies for (BS-4 years)
2. Reality of Islamic Ideology

In 193 7, Allama Iqbal clearly said: ·'To me capitalism, communism and
other isms of this world have no importance. Islam is the only reality which is the
source of salvation. To have a contract with any other ism is just like to be out of
Islam.,.
3. Islam is a lively power
Allama Iqbal said in his Allahabad address: ··Islam is a lively power which
frees human mind from thought of country and race. If we understand this thing,
� e can be the leaders of prominent Indian civilization:·
4. Islam is a complete code of life
Allama Iqbal declared in his presidential address: "Islam encompasses not
only the life of an individual but also the political state tor the Muslims as it is
complete code of life. The idea of Islam transcends one beyond the limits of race.
colour or country. He said that Islam guides the people with respect to every aspect
of life and I am fully convinced that the Muslin1s of India will ultimately have to
establish a separate state as they cannot live with Hindus•in the United India."'
S. Muslims are one Nation
Allama Iqbal explained in his presidential address in 1930, "Islam is not the
name of some beliefs and customs but it is a complete code of life. In Europe,
religion is every one's personal matter which divides the human oneness into two
opposite parts i.e. body and soul. In contrast that in Islam, God, Universe, soul.
matter, state and religious places are bound to each other or in other words Muslims
, are one nation''.
6. Concept of Two Nation Theory
Allama Iqbal said in his address of Allahabad on 29 th December 1930 that
the Hindus and the Muslims are two separate nations. They have no common
values. The Muslims have kept their separate status .in India for the last one
thousand years. There is a prominent difference between the ideologies of two
nations. Hindus want to have political and economic freedom while Muslims are
fighting for their religious freedom. So the only solution of the differences and
problems of both the nations is the creation of new Islamic State by joining of the
north -western Muslims majority areas, Punjab, N.W.F.P. Sindh and Balochistan."
't'
5
Hudi Pakbitan Studies for (BS-4 year.\)
7. Concept of a Separate Mu,lim Stat�

In l 930. 1\llan1a lqbal gnH! the concept of an indepcndc.::nl stale for the
... ,1uslin1s. I le said that the Hindus and the Muslims ,,f the sub-continent could not
live together 1n one state. Hance. sooner or later. tht: Muslirns would succeed in
\\ inning their separate state. He turned down the idea that only one nation exists in
the sub-continent.
8. Demand of a Separate Muslim State
As a pern1anent solution to the Hindu Mu,;;litn problc1ns. Allama fqbal said.
··1 \\Ould likt! to �ec the Punjab, NWFP. S1ndh and Balochistan amalgamated into a
single state. �elf governn1cnt Vvithin or �ithout the British Empire. Consolidated
formation of north-west Indian Muslims state appears to me the final dt:stiny of
�1uslin1s. at least of north-west India."
9. Prime duty of all Civilized Nations
Allan1a Iqbal clearly .said that India is a continent of human groups
belonging to different races, speaking different languages and professing different
religions. It "vas the prime duty of all civilized nations to show utmost regard and
reverence for the religions, principles, cultural and social values of other nations.··
10. Unity of the Muslim Nation
Allama Iqbal considered that all the Muslims living in any part of the \.\ orld
from one Nation. Therefore, he gave the message to the Muslims living from the
shore of Nile to the land of Kashghar to be for the protection of Haram. He further
gave the message to the Nation of unity, equality fraternity and discrimination on
the base of colour, caste and creed in Islam. The message of unity of the Muslim
world can be seen in his poetry.
t.4 QUAID-E-AZAM AND IDEOLOGY OF PAKISTAN
Quaid-e-Azam Muhammad Ali Jinnah was a great leader of the Muslims of
t
the sub-continent. He s arted his political career in 1906 by joining the Indian
National Congress. He was elected to the Legislative Council in 1909. He also
joined the All India �u 5li� League in 1 ?13. Now he was 1nember of both the
political parties. Having dis��eement wit� Gandhi on the issue of self-rule.
c omplete freedom from the 1:lntish and on using extra-constitutional means, Jinnah
resigned from the Congress
111 1 ?20 ..He � anted to implement Islamic
Ideology in
b the I de � logy o f _P ak i stan 1 s lsla
Pakistan ecause 1nic Ideology. So. he delivered his
t occasi ons wh i ch clearly refle
ideas 00 differen ct the Ideology of Pakistan. His
fol low s.
some quotations are as
6
Hudi Pakistall Studies for (BS-4 years)
1. Foundation of Muslim Nation in India

Quaid-e-Azan1 said that Pakistan came into being when the first Hindu
became a Musli1n. He used the term "·Nation'" for the Muslims of India in February
1935 in Legislative Assembly. He said that the Muslims are a nation by every
defirution of the nation. They can adopt any means to pro1note and protect their
spiritual. moraL econon1ic, social, political and cultural interests.
2. Pakistan existed for centuries
In his address in Ahmadabad on 29th December 1940 Quid-e-Azam said that
Pakistan existed for centuries and north-west remained a homeland of Muslims.
l ndependent states of Muslims should be established in these areas. so that they
, might live according to the teachings of Islam.
3. Base of democracy
On the February 1942, he declared, we should base O!Jr democracy on the
principles and concepts of Islam. He also said, ·'Islam teaches equality, justice and
fairness to every one.'' He further said: ..In reality we had learnt democracy 1300
) ears ago. So when you talk about democracy, I doubt that you have not studied
Islam."
4. Relation of Pakistan and Islam
Quaid-e-Azam considered the Islamic systen1 fully applicable. He wanted to
establish the system of the country on the basis of Quran. In the annual meeting of
Muslim league at Karachi in 1943, He said while clarifying the relation of Pakistan
and Islam, ·'What is that relation which has made Muslim a single body? What is
that rock on which the structure of millat is restored? What is that base v\ hich has
secured the safety of the boat of this millat? That relation, rock and base is the Holy
Quran''
5. Islam is a complete code of life
While addressing the students in March 1944, Quaid-e-Azam said: "Islam is
our guide and is a complete code of life." In his speech at Karachi in January 1948
he said: "Islam guides us in both the spheres, politics and economics. Basic
principles of Islam· are founded on human dignity. liberty and justice. Those who
are propagating that there would be no constitution based on Islamic Shariat.
should know that Shariat Law are still practicable today as they had been thirteen
hundred years ago."
7
1/adi Pakistan Studie.�for (BS-4 years)
6. Ideology of Pakistan
While explaining the Ideology of Pakistan in 1946 at Islamia College
Peshawar. Quaid-e-Azam said. ··we do not demand Pakistan simply to have a piece
of land but \\e want a laboratory \\here we could make experiment on Islamic
principles:· While addressing at Aligarh he clarified the ideology of Pakistan in
these words: ·'What was the motive of demand for Pakistan and what was the
rt!ason of separate state for the Muslims? Why was the need felt to divide India? Its
reason is neither the narrow mindedness of the Hindus nor tactics of the British. It
is the fundamental demand of Islam?"
7. Minorities will be fully safeguarded
In a press conference in New Dehli on 14th July, I 947 the Quaid-e-Azam
said. "'Minorities which ever community they may belong, will be fully
:5afeguarded-their religion or faith or belief will be secure. There will be no
interferenc\! of any kind with their freedom of \vOrship. They will have full
protection with regard to their religion, their faith. their life and culture. They will
be in all respects the citizens of Pakistan without any distinction of the caste and
creed.''
8. Ahn to the creation of Pakistan
The Quaid-e-Azam said while addressing to the Pakistani Officers in
October, 194 7. "Our objective was to create such a state where we could live as
free people. when! our culture and civilization could flourish and where Islamic
concept of �ocial justice can be implemented."
9. .National Identity of the Muslims
In the light of the history of the sub-continent Quaid-e-Azam arg!Jed that
The Musl_ims are a nation by every definition of the word nation. They have every
right to establish their separate homeland. They can adopt any means to promote
and protect their economic, social. political and cultural interests.
t O. Elimination of differences
On 21st March 1948 Quaid-e-Azam addressed the people in Dhaka and said.
•·1 want not to see you to talk as a Sindhi, Balochi. Punjabi and Bengali. What is the
fun of sa yin g that we are Punjabi. Sindhi or Pathan? We are only Muslims."
1 t. Criticism of the Western Economic system
On J st July. 1948 Quaid ALam inaugurated the. tate Bank of Pakistan On this
d: ·•If we adopt western economic system \.\-e shall face hurdles in
occasion, he sai
8
Hadi Pakista11 Studies for (BS-4 years)
bringing prosperity for the masses. We shall have to carve our own destiny in a
different and unique manner. We shall have to present such an ideal economic
system before the world as is established on the true Islamic Principles of human
equality and social justice."
12. Muslim Unity
Quaid-e-Azam believed in the force of Islam as he said that Islam is a
dynamic force that can unite the Muslims. On 15 th June, 1948 Quaid Azam said to
the people of Pakistan "So long as we are united we will emerge victorious and
slrong. lf we are not united we shall become weak and disgraced. We are all
Pakistanis. None of us is Punjabi. Sindhi, Balochi and Pathan or Bengali, every one
of us should think feel and act as a Pakistani and we would feel proud of being
Pakistani alone.
Importance of Ideology of Pakistan

The Muslims of the sub-continent had become a minority due to the Western
democracy. But Ideology of Pakistan saved the Muslims of the sub-continent and
became the cause of independence. The Muslims of India got freedom and social
betterment. Owing to Ideology of Pakistan, the people of Pakistan are able to
establish the Islamic society in Pakistan. It created the courage, honesty, tolerance,
bravery equality, fraternity and character building among the people in Pakistan.
1.5 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF IDEOLOGY OF PAKISTAN

Pakistan is an ideological state. Ideology of Pakistan means ideology of
Islam. No doubt, the Islamic ideology is the foundation of the ideology of Pakistan.
The Muslims of the sub-continent put up the demand for Pakistan because they
wanted to lead their lives in accordance with their beliefs. They also wanted to
worship almighty Allah without any obstruction. Basic points of ideology of
Pakistan are as under:
l. Belief and Prayers
The Muslim believe in Tauheed (Oneness of God) prophethood. angels.
revealed books and day of judgment. Oneness of God means that Allah is the
creator and Master of the entire universe. Faith in prophethood means to believe
that Allah sent messengers· for the guidance of mankind. To believe in the onenc'-S
of Allah and the finality of the prophethood of Hazrat Muhammad (S.A.W) is the
first Pillar of Islam.
9
,,_. r-l+me- 5lllr aa for f &S-4 [tUS)
c e for the Mus�ims five times

rtie S<ConJ pillar is Samaz whose performan
w �e p�chce of_ religion.
a day is compulso�. Performance of Namaz is a sho _ Df ned n the socie .
· The same system of submission t o Allah sl)ould be ":1at ntru _� � The
trains �e Mµsltms to
third pillar of Islam is fasting. Like other prayers, it al�o
an offenng of a pan of
"'orship Allah. Zakat is the founh Pillar of Islam. Zakat is
allo w accµmulation
one·s we alth. It strengthens the economic system and does not
of wealth in the hands of onlv a few people. It is circulated a nd goes to the poor
people of the society. Hajj is the fifth Pillar of Jslam, which is made compulsory for
a man of means. In Islam Jihad is very important. H means to sacrifice one·s life or
wealth for the sake of truth. All the submiss ions train a Muslim to adopt the path of
Allah. and to live for him. They are helpful in developing the character and pave
the way for th e establishment of an exemplary Islamic �late. ..
2. · Supremacy of Law
The supremacy of law is the distinguished feature of the whole lsl�oic
system. It is based on the concept that Allah is the absolute source or" law. The
fo�dation of law is the Holy Quran and Sunnah. Everyone including the rulers are
equal in the eyes of law. Democracy must be COO;Sidered as the spirit of the whole
system o� Islam. Moreover. the rulers are bound to act upon the decision made after
consultation to ensure democracy. Every dec.ision should be made in the light of the
Q.uran and S unnah.
3. Fraternity and Equ�lity .
Islam is a religion of peace and securi·ty·, and promotes equa1·i and
. . ty ·
fratern i ty among the Muslims. In Islamic soc1· ety a J ot o f 1mpo · nance has be en given
• . � .
to the pnnc1ples of frat. ernity. and equality · The best examp Ie of these · pnnc · 1p· I es
was 'Set by the Islamic. society form ed in Madina ' · The
. Ho I y prophet• Hazrat ·
a d (SA W) a dvise d .
a:
Muh amm the Muslims to be kind tO the orphans, wtdow s and the
poor · H e provided a cod e of 11·c.,e ao
c. r the people to .fi II
togethe r ha.ppily. He gave a system of charit
ow so that they couId ive r
d at �d banned usury because
. Islam is not in favour of e�ploiting people. Y an
Fraternity emphasizes that brother) � re1_atio • ns· should be develope 1 among
the Muslims. Islam does not allow d1 ' n. o� on the basis of clasc, creed �d
colour of the skin. Islam has laid 1�e _ �o•�h un��on of such a socie�' in �..v�ch
everyone rich or poor is equal. No O e n r t others. All
brothers. One's grief is the grief of al� �� :�� the �1udims are
.These exceJlent virtues strengthen the 1 5 1amac . ne 5 Joy 1s the joy · of a!I tt: \ I ,1uslims.
state.
10 ,.____________ - -
4. Social Justice and Equality

Islam teaches peace, equality and fratemtt) Equity is the soul of society
based on justice. No society can progress without practicing justice. lslan1ic societ)
is formed on the basis of justice. It ensures that the people's rights are not snatched
and they are not maltreated by others. Justice must be exercised in evel) field of
life. It is the responsibility of the system of courts to make the practice of justice in
the society possible. For this purpose, the courts should be independent.
The Holy Prophet (SAW) said that deviation of a nation from justice leads
to doom and destruction. He set many examples of justice, which served as the
beacon of light for the society. Once a woman belonging to an influential family
Banu M�zoom committed theft. The H-oly Prophet (SI\ W) ordered to cut her
hands. When the plea for leniency was made, he said that 1f his daughter Fatima
had committed this crime, he would have awarded the same punishment. It is
mandatory for the government to provide justice of all sorts to every person.
Because a society progresses a lot if it believes in the supremacy of law.
5. Islamic concept of sovereignty
Islamic concept of sovereignty means that power and authority exercised by
the ruling class is from Allah. Man is not the absolute power. He can frame laws
within the limits laid down by Allah. The law, which is contrary to Quran and
Sunnah, is not valid in the.Islamic society.
EXERCISE-1
OBJECTIVE TYPE QUESTIONS
' Q.1: Encircle the correct options.
1 . Sir Syed Ahmed Khan was born on
(A)1817 (B)1818 (C)18 I 9 ' (D)1820
2. Sir Syed Ahmed Khan was died on
(A) 1896 (B)1897 (C) 1898 (D)1899
3. Who said in 1930 "'Islam is still the living force in the world".
(A) Allama Iqbal (B) Quaid-e-Azam
(C) Sir Syed Ahmed Khan (D) Maulana Muhammad Ali Jouhar
4. Sir Syed Ahmed Khsn was the great lover of
(A) Islam (B) Mus!i1ns (C) United India (D) Hindus
11
5. Who promoted the two nation theory in the sub-continent?

(A) Allama Iqbal (B) Quaid-e-Azam
(C) Sir Syed Ahmed Khan (D) Sir Augha Khan
6. The first person who used the word '"Nation .. for the Muslims of the sub
continent was
I
(A) Sir Syed Ahmed Khan (B) Quaid-e-Azam (C) Allama Iqbal (D) Gandhi
7. Who can be regarded as the father of Pakistan movement?
(A) Sir Syed Ahmed Khan (B) Allama Iqbal
(C) Sir Augha Khan (D) Quaid-e-Azam
8. Who gave the concept of a separate homeland for the Muslims of the sub
continent?
(A) Allama Iqbal (B) Sir Syed Ahmed Khan
(C) Quaid-e-Azam (D) Maulana Shoukat Ali
9. Who said that it was nessory for the Muslims of sub-continent to have their
own state. if they were to live as a separate culture force?
(A) Quaid-e-Azam (B) Allama Iqbal
(C) Sir Syed Ahmed Khan (D) Sir Augha Khan
10. Ideology of Pakistan is based on:
(A) Collective System (B) Programme (C) Progressivism (D) Islamic Ideology
�
. 11. The word "Pakistan" was coined by:
(A) Allama Iqbal (B) Sir Agha Khan
(C) Chaudhary Rehmat Ali (D) SirSyed Ahmed Khan .
12. Quaid-Azam used the word "nation" for the Mislims if India in:
(A) 1933 (B) 1934 (C) 1935 (D) 1936
13. Quaid-e-Az am starte d his political career in:
(A) 1906 (B) 1905 (C) 1904 "
14. Sir Syed A hmed Khan favered "sep (D) I 886
arate electorate" for the Muslin1s in:
(A) 188_3 " _
(B_) 1884 (C) 1885
. W ai
ho s d Our gmd 1s Islam and this is the conl (D) I 886
l5 plete co de o f our 1 1.c.
. 1e.
( A) Qua1d -e-Azam (B) Allama Iqbal
(C) Sir Syed Ahmed �an (D) Sir Agha Khan
t2
HadJ Palston $,udles for (BS-4 ye11rs) ·
,.
Q.2: Tick the True; and False ..
l. Ideology of Pakistan is based on the Two Nation theory. True/False
2. The Muslim of India found it difficult to live _according to the principles of Islam
in the United India. True./False
·-
3._The Muslim.of India demanded a separate homeland to saf�g�d the�r national
and religious identity. True/ False
4. Quaid-e-Azam promoted the two.nation theory on the sub-continent.
True/False
5. Sir Syed Ahmed K.h� was the great lover of slam. True/ False
6. Ailama lqbal was the first person who used the word nation" for the Muslims of
44
the Sub-Continent. ·
True/ False
7. Sir Syed Ahmed Kh� can be regarded by his services as the father of Pakistan
.movement.· True/ False
8. Sir Syed A�ed � laid the first bri_ck in the foundation of Pakistan in the
. shape of M.A.O. High·SchOQl Aligarh in 1975. True (False
9. Allama Iqbal gave the concept- of a separa�e homeland for the Muslims of the
sub-continent. · · · True/False
10. Allama Iqbal said in 1930/�Jslam is still the living force in the world.
· True/ False
1 1. Quaid-�-Azam advised the Muslims of sub-continent not to join All India
Congress. True/False ·
12. Cangress was the commqnal party of HindU&. True/False
· 13_ Quaid-e-Azam was elected to the legislative council in 1909. True/ False
14. Sir Syed Ahmed Khan was bu_ried in Aligarh.' True /False
16. Quaid-e-Azam said "Our guide is Islam and this is the complete code of our
life'': · True/False
. .
13
Iladi Pakistan Studies for (BS-� years)
Q.3: Fill in the Blanks.

I. ------- said .. Islam 1s still the living force in the world,..
2. Ideology means such a proc�durc und�r which ------------- live their physical
lnes.
J. l he base of ideology of Pakistan is on the--------- ----
4. ldeolog� of Pakistan and Ideology of Islam have ------------ meaning.
-; ldcolog) of Pakistan is the prnctical shape of teaching of----------
6 ------------ promoted the two nation theory in the Sub- Continent.
7. ------------ \\as the first person who used the word ··nation" for the Muslims of
sub-continent.
8 . -------------- said that it was necessary for the Muslims of sub-continent to have
their own state, if they were to live as a separate culture force.
9. Allama Iqbal gave the idea of a separate ------------- to the Muslims of sub-
continent in his address at Allahabad 1930.
10. Hindi Urdu Controversy started in ---------------
1 l. --------- ad\ iscd the Muslims of sub-continent not to join Congress.
12. All India Congress was the communal party- of-----------
13. ------ ----------- set up the "Patriotic Association" in 1888.
14. Sir Syed Ahmed Khan fo_unded Muhammadan defense association in --------�--
15. Sir Syed Ahmed Khan was buried in ----------
ANSWER KEY
Q No. 1: Encircle the correct options.

1 _ (a) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (a) 5. (c) 6. (a) 7. (a) 8. {a) 9. (b) I 0. (d) 11. (c) I 2. (c)
13. (a) 14. (a) 15. (a)
Q No. 2: Tick Mark the correct choice.
1. (T) 2. (T) 3. (T) 4. (F) 5. (T) 6. (F ) 7. (T) 8. (T) 9. (T) I 0. (T) 11. (F) 12
(T) 13. (T) 14. (T) 15. (T) 16. (T)
14
Q No. 3: Fill in the Blanks.

(1). Allama Iqbal (2). People and Nation (3). Two nation theory (4). Same (5).
Islam (6). Sir Syed Ahmed Khan (7). Sir Syed Ahmed Khan (8). Allan1a Iqbal (9).
Homeland (10). 18 I 7 ( 11). Sir Syed Ahmed Khan (12). Hindus ( 13 ). Sir Syed
Ahmed Khan ( 14 ). 1893 (l 5). Aligarh.
SHORT QUESTION
1. Define Ideology.
Define ideo!ogy of Pakistan.
3. Wnte dov\ n one quotation of Quajd-e-Azam relating to ideology of Pakistan.
4. What did Quaid-e-Az am said while addressing to Pakistani Officers in October
1947?
5. What did Qauid-e-Azam say at annual meeting of Muslim League in 1943?
6. What did Quaid-e-Azam say in Islamia College Peshawar in 1940?
7. What did Allan1a Iqbal say in his presidential address of Muslim League in
1930?
8. What did Allan1a Iqbal say about the ideology of Islam?
9. Who pron1oted the Two Nation Theory in Subcontinent?
10. Define the Two Nation Theory.
11. Who put the first brike of Pakistan? Discuss.
LONG QUESTIONS
I. Explain ideology of Pakistan in the light of the sayings of the Quaid-e-Azam?
2. Explain ideology of Pakistan in the light of the sayings of Allama Iqbal.
3. Describe that Sir Syed Ahmad Khan was the founder of Ideology of Pakistan.
15
j
lladi PaAislan Sllldies for (BS-4 years)
CHAPTER-2
FACTORS LEADING TO MUSLIM SEPARATISM
2.1 Factors and Objectives of Creation of Pa�stan .
With the help of Allah almighty, Islamic repubhc of Pakistan came mto
being on 14 lh August J 94 7. The detail of the factors and objectives of creation of
Pakistan arc as under·
I. Peaceful atm�-�phere
A large number of inhabitants of sub-continent used to be the victims of
communal roits every year. The Muslims were massacred by the Hindu militabts
time and gain, in an organized way. As Hindus were in majority, it looked evident
· that the Hindus could monopolise the politics after the departure of Britishers. The
lives of Muslims could never be safe in the united India. The Hindu organizations
had again and again assisted that Hindu Raj would be imposed on India after the
independences. The future apprehension of the atrocious rule of Hindus more sever
than that of the congress rule compelled the Muslims· to have a separate state.
·
2. Social Environment .
The Muslims were scared of the Hindu Samaj in which the cast system and
other discriminations could make the Muslims second rate citizens. Where they
could enjoy neither political nor social liberties. Therefore, they preferred to have a
separate homeland in which they .could live according to the teaching. of Islan1.
3. Protection of Urdu Language
The Hindu did their best to replace_ Urdu by Hindi but they did not succeed
during British period. If South Asia had got .freedom without partition, the Hindu
· niajority could very easily declare Hindi, the official and national language. The
Hindu government could wipe out all signs of Muslim culture; therefore, the
Muslims had no choice except to put a demand for Pakistan.
4. Tortures of Congress Ministries
. The congress ran the government in a number of provinces from 1937 to
- t 939. During congress Ministtjes the Muslims were maltreated and deprived of
their rights. Hindu did every �ng to crush the Muslims in all spheres. The
Hindus f�rced the Muslims to strive for a separate homeland
humiliating attitude _of
;
for themselves They had �xpe�•enced the rule. of majority government of Hindus,
y d 10 this way the Muslims bec�c the permanent salves of
who were in majorit an
Hindus.
. 16
5. T·wo Nation Theory

The Muslims claimed separate nationhood for themselves, and_ they �ere
determined to maintain a separate entity for all times to come. The Muslims believe
in separate religion. practice different. traditions, have their own history and their
cultural heritage. Their claim was absolutely true. It was their right to keep their
separate entity alive and to enjoy all human rights. This was not possible in
undivided India.
6. Protection of Muslim Culture
The Muslin1s were always a separate nation because of their distinctive
cultural values. But the Hindus ahvays desired to crush the Muslims as a nation and
ultin1ately to 1nerge them into Hindu society. Several attempts ,vere made by the
Hindus to eras€ the Muslim culture. The main objectives of the creation of Pakistan
was the protection of Mu_5lin1 culture and to save it from Hindu domination.
7. Implementation of Islamic System

Islrun is a complete code of life. The Muslims wantt!d to implen1ent the
systetn practically. This cuuld not be att3ine<l in ··United India··. Therefore. they
passed a resolution and den1ande<l an Islamic state in the North East and North
West of South Asia. They \Vanled to establish an Islamic stale, Pakistan. a model
for the entire Musli1n world.
2.2 ALIGARll MOVEMENT
Background
After the war of independence 1857, the Musli1ns of India were the target of
the revengeful activities of the British Govern1nent. The British put t� �le
responsibility of the war on the shoulders of the Muslims. The British a1id the
Hindus jointly victimized the Muslin1s politically. socially and economically. In
those days, this status of the Muslims as a nation "''as changed and they bcca1ne
minority in the same couutry. In such conditions, Sir Syed ;\hmed Khan steppl'\I
forward to help the Muslims.
Sta11ing of the Aligarh 1'/f oYcmcnt
After the Muslim rule, the British Governn1cnt in1ple1nente .I �l ne,,
educational policy ,vith drastic changes. The policy restricted ArJbic, Pr�sian and
rdigious education in school and made English as the only n1cdimn of in�:ru.:ti,,.
as well as the official language. Sir Syed Ahn1ed Khan launched th� /\li!..,:.
Movement. Ali Garh Move1nent focused lhe educational backward11e•:--, of... tut:
tv1r.sli i ns of sub-cm1tincnt. l le t!Stablished schools and colleg� for the ;\ h,�lnn!, tu
1
Hadi Pakistan Studiesfor (BS-4 years)
1 5 1·n English along with Persian

aid them with contemporary knowledge an d sk·11
and Arabic.
Objectives of the Aligarh Movement,
s
1. To build confidence between the British Government and the Muslim
2. To motivate the Muslims to learn English Education
3. To Persuade the Muslims to abstain from politics of agitation
4. To produce an intellectual class from amongst the Muslim Community
Educational Services of Aligarh Movement,
Sir Syed Ahmed Khan advised the Muslims to get the most modern Western
education of science, literature, and social sciences. He declared English Education
as a ladder of success for the Muslims, so that they might come up to the level of
Hindus soci�lly and economically. He established educational institution for this
purpose.
Persian School in Moradabad (1859)
Sir Syed Ahmed Khan established the educational institute in Muradabad in
1859. This was a Persian school.
Victoria School in Ghazipur (1862)
He established the educational institute in Ghc1zipur in 1862. He introduced
the study of the English language, and modem science along with Persian in this
school.
The M.A.O. High School Aligar�1 and College (1875-1877)
In 1875, Sir Syed Ahmed Khan setup the Muhammadan AnoJo Oriental
(MAO) School in Aligarh on the pattern of English public school. Afte� two years.
it was upgraded to college in 1877 and was affiliated with the Calcata University.
The Muslim youth started graduatil}g from here and getting high ranking jobs in
government service.
Muslim University Ali Garb (1920)
-
j� M.A.O.C ollege Aligarh became Muslim University Aligarh in 1920. The
� �1 •services of versatile English teachers like Arnold, Morrison and Archibold were
. hired for this university. This university was being the representative body of the
18
r
upwardly mobile middle class. lndian Muslims created a significant impact on

Muslim politics in India.
Scientific Society (1863)
In 1863. Sir Syed Ahmed Khan established a scientific society in Ghazip ur.
The purp�se of its establishment was to acquire the book in other language, and to
transla�e 1n Urdu. The office of the society was shifted to Aligarh in 1876. In a
short time, a great treasure of Western literature and scien·ce was transferred in
Urdu.
Ali Garb Institute Gazettee (1866)
Sir Syed Ahmed Khan started publishing a journal entitled "Aligarh
Institute Gazettee" in 1866. It was published in both English and Urdu languages.
The main purpose of this journal was to arouse the sentiments of good-will
amongst the British for the Muslims.
Muhammadan Educational Conference (1886)
Sir Syed Ahmed Khan established Muhammadan Educational Conference
in 18-86. The conference helped in making the arrangement of finance to meet the
educational needs of the Muslim Nation. The main aim of this organization was to
inspire the Muslims to work in the field of education. The conference held its
meetings at various places for the educational uplift of the Muslims of India. Sub
committees were also established at other places in India. This organization served
the Muslim community in all the fields i.e. social, political. and religious.
Muhammadan Educational Conference Proved a great forum for the Muslims.
Later on, it became the centre of all Muslim's Political activities. .
Conclusion
Sir Syed Ahmed Khan uplift�d th� education
_ of �he Muslims. Aligarh
movement played a significan� role 1n. bn?1n? about an intellectual revolution
among the Indian Muslims. M�y other tnstltutlons were �lso found following the
Aligarh movement in various �1t1e� of the country. The �hgarh mo�ement was t�e
pioneer in bringing a revolut10� 1n the fi�ld of education. Thus,. 1t succeeded 1 n
achieving its major objectives, 1.e. educatio�al progress and social reforms. Hjs
efforts earned Sir Syed Ahmed Khan the ttt�e. of "Prophet of Education''. The
Aligarh Movement produced political _ leadership who protected the political rights
and interests of the Muslims of India.
'
19
llut/1' Pa1'i.\lU/l Studie\ for (BS-4 J't!Of,\)
2.3 ALL I l)IA MUSLIM LEAG E (I Y06)

On 30 1 " of Dec�mher I 906. All India rv1usli111 League wa� forn1all� founded
in Dhaka \\ here an annual sesswn of 1uhammadan Educntionnl ·onfcn:nce ,,a
hdd In the final session. awab 5,c.1Jeem l lllah Klrnn requestt::d the participants to
hold a special n1cet1ng to <l1scu'>s exclus1vel) the political issue.!. �o. atier the final
session of luhammadan I?ducatton'"1l Confen.:ncc. a special meeting \l,as held
under the prcsidc.!ntshinp ofNa\\ab Wiqar-ul-Mulk In the mt.:cting, all the delegates
agreed to fon11 a pennanent political party to look alter the political interests of the
Muslims. av.ah alimullah proposed Muslim Ll!aguc and I fakccm Ajmal Khan
and Maulana Zafar Ali Khan seconded. All the participants supported the proposaJ.
In December 1907, at Karachi its constitution was approved and in March 1908 at
Aligarh, Sir Agha Khan was formally elected as the president and Waqar ul Mulk
\\as elected as the secretary of the All India Muslim League. The main office of All
India Muslim League was established in Aligarh.
In 1908, Syed Ameer Ali organized a branch of Muslim League at London and
responded effectively to the misunderstandings and conspiracies of the Hindus
against the Muslims. Syed Ameer Ali was also appointed president of this Branch.
The provincial Branches of AJl India Muslim League were also launched in all the
provinces.
Causes of the Establishment of All Inctia Muslim League
The causes of the establishment of all India Muslim League are as under:
1. Establishment of Indian National Congress
All India National Congress was founded in I 885 at Bombay by Allan
Octavio Hume (A.O.Hume). Although Indian National Congress, representing all
natives, and was taking an active part in the political affairs of the country. yet it
was not a national party. Because it worked for the interests of Hindus only. So the
Muslim leaders seriously felt the need of a separate Muslim organization.
2. Hindu Extremists Sectarian Parties
The Hindu extremist organizations like sanghtan, Shudhi, Arya Samaj and
Hindu Mahasaba endangered the lives of Muslims. The slogan of the Hindu
sectarian Parties was: "India is only for Hindus, all others are foreigners. There are
only two choices for them that they should either accept Hinduism or leave India."
20
1/udi Pakista11 Studies for (BS-,1 years)
The Muslims were frightened to all their activities and they decided to fom1 a
political party for the Muslims of India.
3. Partition of Bengal (1905-1911)
The government divided the province of Bengal into two parts on
administrative grounds in 1905. The Muslims were in majority in the new
established province of East Bengal which was created by that divi54on. The
partition of Bengal created new situation in politics. The partition proved a blessing
for the Muslims. The betterment of the Muslims was not tolerable for the Hindus.
Therefore. Hindus strongly opposed the partition and asked for its annuln1ent. The
British Government cancelled the partition of Bengal on 1911. That event became
the cause of the establishment of a political party of the Muslims.
4. Urdu-Hindi Conflict (1867)
The Urdu-Hindi controversy began in the year 1867 in Banaras. The Hindus
demanded Hindi as the official language replacing Urdu. The Muslims were
extremely disappointed to see the Hindus' attitude. So, it was the main reason for
the formation of Muslim League.
5. Problem of Slaughtering Cow
··Arya Samaj" which was a Hindu sectarian organization formed a ··Gao
Raksha Sabah'' for the protection of cows in 1881. The goal of Gao Raksha Sabah''
was to stop the Muslims from sacrificing Cows. Under these circumstances unity of
the Muslims was unavoidable to stop the intrusion of Hindus in religious affairs
and it was necessary to form a representative party of the Muslims.
6. To Save Muslims Identity
The Muslims believed that Hindus and Muslims were two separate-nations.
The divergences between the two communities were not confined in religious
belief, but were also involved other factors, for instance, mode of life, traditions.
civilization and culture that could be called an ingredient of a nation. Therefore, in
order to save their identity, it became essential for the Muslims to establish their
separate organization.
7. Political Reforms
The Liberal Party won the elections in England and announced the
i1nplementation of certain political reforms. The chances of the reformation of
,.
21
Hadi Pakistafl Studies r
fo (BS-4 years)
political institution provided an opportunity for the Muslims to form a political

party to protect their representation.
8. Separate Electorate
The Muslims should be given the authority to elect their representatives in
the election of the councils. Hindu and Muslim constituencies should be separated.
Muslim voters could vote for Muslim representatives and Hindu voters for Hindu
representatives. But the congress opposed the demand of separate electorate for the
Muslims. So it was necessary to form a representative party of the Muslims.
9. Success Simla Delegation ·1906
On 1 st October 1906. a deputation of about thirty-five selected Muslim
leaders, led by Sir Agha Khan, met the viceroy of India Lord Minto in Simla. The
delegation presented their demands to the Viceroy. The viceroy gave a hopeful
answer to the delegation which created a feeling of confidence, unity and political
awareness in the Muslims. The member of delegation seriously felt the need of a
tvtuslim political party.
The Demands of Simla Delegation
1. Representation more than their population would be given to the Muslims of
India
2. Sepa rate electorate would be approved for the Muslims of India
3. Reservations of Muslim seats in government jobs
4. Special share for the Muslims in Municipal or district boards, universities,
senates and syndicates
ntation in Viceroy Executive Cou ncil
S. Muslim's represe
the establisliment of the Muslim University at Aligarh
6. Cooperation for
dia Muslim Leagues
Objectives of All In
of the Muslim League were as follows:
The main objectives
te, the feelings of loyalt_y among _the Muslims of India to the British
1 . To pronmo and to remove any misconception that
Go v er ment may arise as to the intention
nt with regard to of
any its measures
of the Gove rnn1e
T o p rot e ct an d adv ance the politic�! rights and interests of the Muslims of
2. . spectfully present their needs and aspirations to the Government
I nd1a, and to re
22
Hlldi Pakistan Studies for (BS-4 years)
3. Cooperation with other communicates, without prejudice to the other afore

mentioned objects of the League.
Change in the Goal of the Muslim League 1913
In I 913, two further developments caused a great deal of frustration among
the Muslims against the British Government, and thus, paved the way for a closer
collaboration with the Congress. 1. The government refused to raise the status of
the Aligarh College to a University. 2. A portion of a Mosque in Kanpur was
demolished by the municipality. Thus the Muslim Leaders thought to amend the
constitution of Muslim League at its Lucknow session held on 23rd March 1913. It
adopted its ne\.v objective as' the attainment, under the aegis of British Crown, of a
system of self-government suitable to India. This change was welcomed all over
the Country. Now the Muslim League was moving ·away from its traditional path.
The 'Liberal·' forces were also becoming influential in Muslim Politics.
2.4 THE LUCKNOW PACT 1916

The formation of the All India Muslim League provided a sense of Pride to
the Muslims and they started . gathering under its flag. The Quaid-e-Azam
Muhammad Ali Jinnah Joined the All India Muslim League in I 913. In those days,
he was the member of both political parties Muslim League and Congress.
After joining the All India Muslim League he started clearing the path for
Hindu Muslim Unity. In December 1915, the annual meeting of congress and
Muslim League were held together at Bombay. Both had fully realized the need of
a closer cooperation. So, for this purpose, both the parties set up form committee
for making a scheme for constitutional changes in consultation with other political
parties. The meeting of this committee \Vas held in November 1916 at Calcatta.
After a long discussion a scheme was prepared. Both the organizations held a joint
1neeting at Lucknow in December 1916. In this meeting the scheme was approved
- and an agreement was signed between the two parties. This agreement was called
the "Lucknow pact".
The Provisions of Lucknow Pact
The important provisions of the Pact are as follows:
1. The congress accepted separate electorates for the Muslims
23
1-ladi Pakistan Studies for (BS-4 years)
2. The Hindus and the tv1uslims were to have weightage in the provinces
where they formed minorities
3. Muslin1s should be elected one-third of the elected members to the central
legislature through separate election
. 4. Any private resolution, affecting a particular community, should require
three fourth ¾ majority of the members of that community for its
advancement in any council
5. The Executive and the judiciary should remain separate from each other and
should not interfere with the affairs of the others
6. Half the members of the central and the provincial governments should be
elected by the member of their respective legislative councils
7. Four fifth of the total members of the provincial legislative councils should
be elected and the rest should be nominated
8. Commissioned rank of the army should be given to the Indian
Conclusion
The Lucknow Pact is considered a landmark in the political history of the sub
continent. Both the communities were now in position to demand for self
government thro':-1gh the co�stitu�ional means fro1n t�e British Government. But,
unfortunately, this cooperation did not last long. This cooperation continued till
Khilafat Moven1ent.
2_5 KHILAFATMOVEMENT
Background World War started, Turkey joined the alliance of
In l 914, when the First
the Britis�. The Muslims o1- India wanted to help Britain but not
Ge rmany against
ttoman K.h1lafat. Because T.ur�ey was the centre of islamic world
at thte c o st of O Turkey was owned as a aliph of the
of C whole Islamic world. The
and he .Caliph key were extended to the whole of North
Tur Africa, the M"1ddle E ast
b ou nd ane 5 of of E aste rn Europe H
...
a e u
. IJJ z- -M qqadas was also in Turkish
reas
and in large a
domain.
ittee 1919
Khilafat Comm
irst World War, the �l_li�s proposed to divide the Turkish
At the end of the F
p ire in to m a ny pieces. In case of the d1v1s1on of the Turkey' both of the
Em ......
24
Muqqadas cities Makkah and Madina, could go in the possession of Christian allied
forces. That plan was greatly opposed in the sub-continent. Keeping all the
apprehensions in view, the Indian Muslims formed a Khilafat Committee at
Bombay in July, 1919 and the Muslims of sub-continent started a movement under
the banner of "Khilafat Movement." Its head office was formed in Bombay. In
November 1919, the first Khilafat Confemce was arranged in Dehli. The prominent
congress leaders also participated in the conference. In this way, the major political
parties joined hands to assault the injustice with the community. These steps were
announced.
1. No participation in victory celebrations
2. Boycott of the Brutish goods
3. Non-coopration with the government . ,
Objectives of the Khilafat Movement
The objectives of the Khilafat movement are as under:
I . Turkish K.hilafat should remain intact
2. The Holy places of the Muslims should remain in the protection of the Turks
3. Tl-s.e Turkish boundaries should remain the same as they were before the war
Delegations of the Movement
Delega�ions were sent to Britain and other European countries to convey the
feelings of the Muslims to the Government. One delegation met to the viceroy of
India under the leadership of M.A. Ansari in January 1920, while another under the
leadership of Maulana Muhammad Ali Jauhar met the prime Minister of Britain for
the protection of the office of the Turkish Caliphate. Their demands were rejected.
Activities of Khailfat Movement
Financial and Medical aids to Turkey
A large amount of money, gold and silver was collected in the general
meetings to give financial aid to Turkey. Doctors, nurses were sent and medicines
were dispatched to Turkey for the treatment of .wounded Turkish soldiers.
Non Cooperative Movement 1920
-------------------�--��==-·
In May 1920, the khilafat committee decided to start non-cooperatio1' in
collaboration with the congress. In December 1920, the Nagpur session of tb1:
25
1/adi Paxistun Studie.\ ft>r (B.S-4 rear\)
ah opposed
congress also uppnn cu nnn coopration with the govcrnn1cnl. but �in�
and left the congress becaus� he was against the use or extra-con ututional
rncan1.:
of protests. Detail i� given as follows.
l. Surrender the titles awarded h) the go\ ermncnt
2 The educational institutions and cou11s of British government were boycotted
3. The Lawyers quit their profession
4. Resignations we1e given in the civil administration. police and military jobs
5. Refusal to pay taxes
fhe Protest n1eetings were held and strikes were observed in all big and small cities
in the sub-continent. The large processions were arranged. The Muslim volunteers
presented themselves to the police for arrests. All leaders \.Vere sent to Jail but the
momentum of movement could not be diminished.
Role of Journalism
The role of Muslim journalism was tremendous, Zarnindar of Zafar Ali
Khan, Al-Hilal of Azad and Comrade and Hamdard of Molana Muhammad Ali
Joauhar played vital Roles in the movement. They inculcated a sense of sacrifice
mnong the Muslims.
Role of Gandhi
The famous Hindu leaders like Pandit Mohanci::t:. ·,i, Pandit 1 Ioti Lal
Nehru and many others participated in the first meeting of Khilafat committee.
Gandi came forward with his full support for the Khilafat movement. He \\ anted to
use it as a weapon for establishing his �eadership and uniting Hindus and Muslims
against the British. By supporting the Khilafat moven1ent, he secured cooperation
of the emotional Muslims for his own purposes. He advised Muslims to surrender
the titles awarded by the government, resign from the government jobs and come
on the streets against the government. Present themselves for arrests, refrain from
paying the taxes. Gandhi becrune popular leader in congress and all over the areas
of sub-continent during this period.
Ilijrat Movement 1920
In July 1920, Mulaana Azad and several other scholars, declared India
· Dar-uJ-Harab'' and �ed .. the Muslims to migrate to '"Dar-ul-Salam" that \Vas
Afghanistan. There was an impression that king of Afghanistan would welcome
26
them.So, millions of Muslim families migrated to Afghanistan -after selling their

properties to the Hindus. Initially Afghans welcomed them. Later they closed the
borders and refused entry to them. On their return, poverty, helplessness, shortage
of food and humiliation troubled them.
Mutiny of Mopala 1921
Mopalas settled on the coast of Malabar near Kalicut.They started mutiny
on the caliphate problem. The involvement of Mopalas in Khilafat Movement led
to arrests of Mopalas leaders. The Mopalas strongly protested against these actions
of the British Government. The government opened the fire on them and 400
Mopalas were martyred. This event flared up the Mopalas. So. they declared open
mutiny.
They destroyed government assets, pulled out railway lines and also killed
the officers. They snatched hand cuffs from police. broke pnsons and set the
prisoners free. The government imposed marshalla and thousands of Mopalas \\'ere
killed. The Hindus became the tools 1n the hands of British government. They
started spying against of the Mopalas and infom1ed the British about their rallies
and meetings. In those circumstances, the Hindu-Muslin1 unity was not sustained
and Mopalas also started to kill the Hindus and to loot their assets.
Incident of Chora Chori (1922)
The Muslim leaders were in jail and Gandhi was the head of Khilafat
movernent. Gandhi began his civil disobedience movement in the beginning of
1922 from a small town of Chora Chori. The people of Chora Chori demonstrated
in a form -0f procession on 5 th February 1922. The police tried to disperse the
procession but a clash too} place between the police and the demonstrating
procession.The hostile mob set fire to the police station. As a result twenty two (22)
policemen were burnt alive. This violent incident shocked Gandhi and he
immediately called off the non-cooperation movement with out consulting other
leaders. Gandhi v1as arrested after the Chora Chori incident. The concept of I-Iindu
Muslim unity and all the desired goals were shattered.
Ending of the institution of caliphate
When Turkey was about to lose the battle, the Turkish Grand · ational
Assembly abolished the Ottoman Sultanate and deposed Sultan wahid-ud-Din 111
November 1922. Afterthen Abdul Majid became the new caliph. But on 1 1arch rJ
1924, Mustafa Kamal presented a bill to par\ian1ent. secularizing the state and
27
1/udl Pakl:.ta11 St11die!, for (BS-4 years)
abolishing the caliphate. This ceaused a widespread resentment among the Indian
Muslims. They begged the Turks to maintain the khilafat. but failed. S.0 the khilafat
was abolished and the movement finally collapsed.
Achievements of the Khilafat Movement
Some achie\ cmcnts arc as follow:
l . Mak.kah and Madina remained under Muslim control and the allied armies
did not step in that sacred area
2. Turkey as a country remained intact, though some of its regions· got
separated in the shape of new Muslim countries
3. Turks themselves abolished the institutions of Khilafat
4. The feeling of confidence and political awareness was created among the
Muslims of lndia due to Khilafat Movement
5. The Muslims of lndia started their own struggle to get their constitutional
and political rights. So they got prominent success in the shape of Pakistan.
2.6 THE SIMON COMMISSION 1927
Background
According to the Montagu Chemsford reforms 1919, after ten years, new
refonnations were to be implemented. On that perspective, the British government
started working on it before time. The government decided to send a constitutional
commission to India, to evaluate the political situation and propose a constitution
for India. On 8 th November 1927, the government announced, a commission of six
m embers headed by Sir John Simon. That commission is known as Simon
Commission.
All the members of that committee were Britishers. There was no Indian
member in the commission. So, it was boycotted both by the Congress and the
Muslim League. While, Sir Muhammad Shafi cooperated with it. Because at that
time of Simon Commission, Muslim League bad already been divided into two
parts i.e. Jinnah League and Shafi League due to Dehli Muslim Suggestions. The
Commission published its report in 1930 which contained several constitutional
proposals, which are as fallows.
Suggestions of Simon Commission
1. Federal system of government should be implemented in the Sub-Continent.
2. In the provinces, the dual system would be finished and autonomy would be
given.
28
Had/ Pakistatt Studies for (BS-4 years)
3. Sind would be separated from Bombay

4• In N. W. F. P, same constitutional refonnation should be implemented.
5. The system of separate electorate would be continued.
6. In the Muslim Minority provinces, Muslims would be given more
representation than their population.
7. No reserved seats would be their in Punjab and Bengal.
8. The demand of 1/3 Muslim representations in the central council should be
rejected b) giving him representation according to their population
9. In the province ministries would be given proportional representation.
10. The status of central administration should be continued and it should not be
changed.
2. 7 THE NEHRU REPORT (1928)

When political parties had launched a prntest against the Simon commission
and its report, Lord Birkenhead, the Secretary of state for India, challenged the
Indian leaders to draw up a constitution which would be acceptable to all the
political parties and sections in India and present it to us. We will implement it.
To answer the chaJlenge of Lord Birkenhead, the Congress caJled all parties
conference in 1928. This conference appointed a committee consisting of seven
members. The committee also included two members, Sir Imam Ali and Shoaib
Qureshi as the representatives of the Muslim community. Sir Imam Ali did not
participate in the meetings of the committee and only Shoib Qureshi represented
the Muslims. This committee was headed by Pandit Moti Lal Nehru. Jawahar Lal
Nehru was the secretary of that committee. The report prepared by this committee
is generally known as "Nehru Report".
Suggestions of Nehru Report
Dc-..ail of this report are given below:
1. India should be given the dominion status on•a unity basis with parliamentary
fonn of government.
2. Separate electorates were abolished.
3. Residuary powers should be vested in the centre.
4. The principle of reserved-seat for the Muslims in Bengal and the Punjab was
,·
rejected.
s. The Muslims should not be given l/3 representation in the central Assembly.
29
--
fludi Pakistu11 Sllldie!ifor (BS-4 year\)
6. In Hindu majority provinces. the Muslims should be given representation

according to their populatin.
7. Hindi would be the official language of India.
8. It agreed the demand of Mush ms for the separation of Sindh from Bombay
9. Constitutional reforms should be implemented in N W.F.P Balochistan was not
mentioned in this suggestion. The justification was given that ll was not
mentioned b, mistake.
Conclusion
The Report completely ignored the Muslim demands. It \\·as totally against
the Muslims �o. Muslim leaders refused to accept 1t. Quaid Ai.am tried to get
amendments in the report in all parties· conference in Culcutta but did not succeed
Jinnah described it as 'the parting of ways'. So. he presented the famous fourteen
points to counter the Nehru report.
2.8 FOURTEEN POINTS OF JINNAH 1929
In March 1929 Sir Muhammad Shafi and \1uhammad Ali Jinnah met at
Delhi and agreed to unite the two groups of the Muslim League Quaid-e-Azarn
prepared a draft of the minimum demand of the Muslims and called a meeting of
the Muslim League in 1929 in Delhi. He issued a statement to the League Council
that Nehru Report \\.as not acceptable to the Muslims. Then he presented his
fonnula of fourteen points· which pro\ided a programme of political action for the
Muslims. This was the united demand of all the Muslims. The fourteen pomts of
Quaid-e- Azam are as follows.
L The fonn of the future constitution should be federal with the powers vested to
the provinces.
2. All provinces should have equal right of self-determination.
3. The electro) system should be established with proper safeguard for minority
representation within ever) province.
4. In the Central Legislature, Muslim representation shall not be less than l/3(one
third).
S. Representation of communal groups shall continue to be means of separate
electorate as at present, provided it shall be open to an, commumt), at an) time
to abandon its separate electorate in favor of a joint dectoratc.
30
1/atli Pak.i.\ltm Studie\ for (BS-4 year\)
6. An) territorial distribution that migl: a1 an)' time he inc\ ituhlc shall nu1 in an)
affect. the l\1uslim maJorit) the Punjab, Bengal and N. W.F.P.
7. Full religions i c 'ibert) ot hdicf. worship and observance. propaganda.
association anti education shall be guarantectl 10 all the communities
8. A sectarian hill should h,nc appro\cd through 3/4 majorit, of the members ol
that particular sect. No Im\. will be passed if tlm.:e-fourth eh:ctctl memb,:rs of a
communit, tl1.:clared that 1t is against their interest.
9. Sindh should he separated from the Bomba).
I 0. Constitutional Rdorms should be introduced in the North West rrontier
Province (1'!WFP) and Balochistan on the same footing as in the other
provinces.
I I. Provinces should be made in the constitution giving Muslims a sufficient share
along with the other Indians, in all the services of the state and in local self
governing botlies having due regard to the requirements of efficicnc).
12. Safguards for protectin1:, the culture. language. education and welfare
institutions of Muslims must be included in the constitution.
11. No cabinet. either central or provincial should be formed without there being a
proportion of at least one-third Musltm mmistcrs.
14. The central assembly should not amend the constitution without the sanction of
the federating units.
( onclusion
rhcse points reflected the aspirations of every Muslim living in India. In these
points. the Quaid-e-Azam not only protected 1he political rights of the Muslims. but
also provided the structure of the constitutional rcfom1s in India. lf Hindu leaders
had admitted the fourteen points of Quaid-e-Azam. then perhaps the histol) of the
Sub-Continent would ha\'e been difkrent Some congn..ss leaders appeared to be
""illing to accept these points but fanatic l) pe Hindu leaders rejected these
recommendations.
2.9 ALLAHABAD ADDRESS (1930)
The annual session of All India Muslim League 'was held at Allahabad on
th
29 December 1930 when most of the Muslim leaders were busy in London at
Round Table Conference. This was presided over b, Allama Muhammad Iqbal. It
was at this session that Allama Muhammad Iqbal presented his historic presidential
31
Had/ Pakista11 Studiesfor (BS-4 year!t)
address in whic.h he proposed and promoted the destiny of Indian Muslims. He had
deeply studied Islam as a religion and system of life and believed that Hindus and
Muslims were two separate and distinct Nations who could never become one
ation. He expressed his views while delivering his presidential address.
1. Political Situation of sub-continent
In his address, Allama Iqbal discussed the political situation of the sub-continent at
length and clearly expressed his view on Two Nation theory. He said that the only
solution to resolve the communal problem of India was that the Muslims should be
ensured full freedom to spend their lives according to their tradition culture and its
feasible form was to create Muslim India within the Sub-continent. It is the only
form, he asserted under which the Muslim can wage full struggle for the
Independence of India. He explained in length with the force of logic that the
Hindu and Muslims are two separate Nations which do not share any common
value and have preserved their distinction.
2. Concept of Tllo Nation Theory
Allama Iqbal said in his address of Allaabad on 29th December 1930 that Hindus
and Muslims are two separate nations. They have no common value. Muslims have
kept their separate status in India for the last one thousand years. There is a
prominent difference between the independence ideologies of two nations. Hindus
want to have political and economic freedom while Muslims are fighting for their
religious freedom. So. the only solution of the differences and problems of both the
nations is the creation of new Islamic State by joining of the north -western Muslim
majority areas. Punjab, N W.F P. Sind and Balochistan."
3. Muslims of India as a Nation
Allama Iqbal defined the Muslims of India as a nation and suggested that there
could be no possibility of peace in the country unless and until they were
recognized as a nation. He claimed that the only way for the Muslims and Hindus
to prosper in accordance with their respective cultural values was under a federal
system where the Muslim majority units were given the same privileges that were
to be given to the Hindu majority units.
4. Islam as binding force
Allama Iqbal explained in his address that Islam offers an ethical order.
socio-political structure, legal framework, code of life, culture and civilization. It is
a living, dynamic force that had a profound impact on the lives of Indian Muslim!;.
32
lladi Pakistan Studies for (BS-4 yearl)
With the force of Islam the scattered and disorganized people have been turned into
an organized force.
5. Ialam is a complete code of life
Alla.ma Iqbal declared in his presidential address that Islam is still the living
force in the world. It encompasses not only the life of an indi\itdual but also the
political state for the Muslim as it is complete code of life. The idea of Islam
transcends one be)'ond the limits of race. colour or country. He said that Islam
guides the people with respect to every aspect of life and I am fully convinced that
the Muslims of India will ultimately have to establish a separate state as they
cannot live with Hindus in the United India.
6. Criticism on European democracy
The principle of European democracy can not be applied to India, without
recognizing the fact of communal groups. He said: The units of Indian society were
not territorial as in European countries. India is a continent of human groups
belonging to different languages and professing different religions. He also stressed
that the model of British democrac> cannot be of any use in a land of many nation.
l herefore, the Muslim demand for the creation of a Muslim India with in India is
perfectly justified.
7. Demand for a Separate State
As a permanent solution to the Hindu Muslim problems, Allama Iqbal
proposed that I would like to see the Punjab. North-West Frontier Province
(N.W.P.F), Baluchistan and Sindh should be converted into one province and
declared that the North-West province part of the country was destined to unite,
Self -Government within the British Empire without the British Empire: this he
suggested was the only way to do away with the communal riots and bring peace in
the sub-continent. The formation of a consoltdatcd North-West Indian Muslim
state, appears to me to be the final destiny of the Muslims at least of North-West
India.
8. Rejection of United Nationality
He declared, "India is a continent of human beings belonging to different languages
and professing different religions. A constitution based on the conception of
homogeneous India is to prepare her for civil war. Therefore, the demand of
consolidated Musi im state is in the best interest of the Muslims of India and Islam...
33
lladi Pakistan Stud/� for (BS-4 ytars)
Salient Features
1. Allama Iqbal proved that lslam is still the livmg force in the world.
2. Muslims are a Nation according to any definition of the tenn "Nation"
3. Allama Iqbal clarified that Islam is a complete code of life.
4. Allama Iqbal argued that the Muslims of India needed a separate state on
behalf of a separate Nation.
S. A\lama Iqbal advised the Muslims to be united for the demand of a separate
Nation.
6. There is no doubt that the Allahabad address was based on Pakistan
movement.
Importance of Allahabad address (1930)
It was the first occasion when a demand for a separate homeland was made from
the Muslim League Platfonn. Allama Iqbal also made important correspondence
with Quaid-e-Azam in 1937 and requested him to accept the leadership of Muslim
League and to set up a1 independent and Free State comprising of areas \\.hich are
now the part of Pakistan.
Allama Iqbal's address is a forceful and iogi<'al presentation of the Muslim cause m
India. Territorial adjustments will enable the \1ud 1 n·. .; 1'1 develop themselves m
accordance with their ideals and serve the cau,r of Ummah redistribution of
territory developed later on concept. of Muslim homeland. It is his Allahabad
Address that Allama Iqbal is kno�n as the dreamer of Pakistan. His address proved
to be a milestone in the history c!' tlie sub-continent and the creation of Pakistan
2.10 ROUND TABLE CONFERENCE
Background
The object of the Simon Commission was to revie\\ the �orkmg constitution of
1919 and to make recommendations for 'a new constitution for the sub-continent.
But all the political parties of the sub-continent bycotted this commission.
However, the commission compiled its report. ln this report it was also
recommended that the problem of the constitution for the sub-continent should be
discussed in a Round Table Conference. So, the vicerv: f India announced the
plan of Round Table Conference in order to resolve the constitutional deadlock.
,_ j
••••
I 34
�
Hadi Pakistan Studiesfor (BS-# years)
The First Round Table Conference

The first round table conference was held on November 12, 1930. In the
first round table conference, a number of prominent Muslim leaders i.e. Quaid
Azam, Sir Mhhammad Shafi, Maulana Muhammad Ali Jauhar and Zafarullah Khan
participated. Sir Agha Khan led the Muslim delegation. The members of Congress
were absent because most of them were in jail and the rest busy in civil
disobedience campaign. The British Prime Minister explained the government
policy toward resolving the Indian constitutional problem, In the conference, the
Muslim leaders emphasized federalism, self-government, safe grounds for
minorities, separate etectorate, preferential representation in central legislature,
secure majorities in Punjab and Bengal Thus, the basic principle of the future
constitution of India was laid down quite·smoothly and it was a great success of the
conference.
Second Round Tabel Conference
The second round tc:1ble conference started in September 1931. Maulana
Muhammad Ali Jauhar had rued ofter the first conference. This time A.llama Iqbal
was also invited Lo attend the conference. Quaid-e-Azam, Allama Iqbal and others
participated in the second conference. Mr Gandhi represented the Indian NationaJ
Congress. However, his participation in the conference did not contribute alot. The
conference failed to make any progress either, because Gandhi refused to
accommodate the Muslim demand and interests. He even opposed the already
settled issue of separate electorates
. for the Muslims. At last, the British government
declared its own scheme on 16th August 1932, known as the 'Communal Award'.
The Communal Award 1932
On I 6 th August 1932 the Prime Minister Ramsay MacDonald announced
the Communal Award. Important points of this Award are as follows.
1. Separate electorate for all minorities of India.
.
2. Principal of weightage was maintained to minorities.
3. No Muslim majorities in Punjab and Bengal as was followed in Lucknow pact.
4. One-third representation of Muslims in central legislature.
5. On-fourth representation for Muslims in services.
6. Sindh to be made a province.
35
· �ludi Pakistan Studies for (8S-4 years)
Reaction of the Muslim League

The award reduced the Muslim majorities in Punjab and Bangal to
minorities. So the Muslim League rejected this Award. Because the Muslim
population in Bangal was 55% but they were allocated onl} 47% seats. sim1lary in
the Punjab were 56% but they were given only 49% seats in the legislature.
Pona Pact (1932)
The Congress expressed strong reaction against the right of separate
electorate to the Indian minorities, especially to low caste. And Gandi in protest
undertook a fast unto death. So, Dr.Umbedker the leader of low caste Hindus could
not face this pressure and agreed to leave the right of separate electorate. A pact
\.\'as signed between Congress and Leader of low caste at Pona in September 1932.
This pact is called 'Pona Pact'.
Third Round Table Conference
This conference was held in November, 1932. The congress was once again
absent from the conference. Quaid-e-Azam did not participate despite living in
London. The main issues had been discussed in the first two conferences and no\\
the rest of them were to be discussed. The reports of the various committees came
under consideration and the conference ended on the eve of Christmas. In the ligh t
of the deliberations of this conference, the British government issued a White Paper
on the constitutional proposals. And the above mentioned proposals were passed by
both the houses of the assembly and assented by the king on August, I 935. It is
known as the Government India Act 1935.
2.11 CONGRESS MINISTRIES (1937.t939)
Background
Under the government of lndia Act 1935, the first general elections of
provincial legislative assemblies were held in February, March 1937. There were
1771 seats of the provincial assemblies which were to be filled by the elections.
Both the Muslim League and the Congress decided to contest the elections. The
congress, as compared to the Muslim League, had achieved un-expected success
and was able to form government in seven out of eleven provinces. After one year.
one more province was brought under the Congress control.
MANIFESTOES OF DIFFERENT P�TIES

Both the political parties Mushm League and Congress issued their
lows.
manifestoes, which are as fol
36
I/ad/ Pakistan Studie<; for (BS-4 year.\)
Manifestocs of the Muslim League.

The Muslim League laid down two main pnnc,ples on which
its elected
representatives wou ld work:
1. The present provincial Constitution and proposed central constitution should be
replaced by a system of self government.
2. The representatives of Muslim League would sincerely work ·10 get the
.
maximum benefits out of the present constitution till the formation of new
Constitution.
Manifestoes of the Congress
The Congress too, came forward with somewhat similar slogans of public welfare.
freedom and for the release of the political prisoners.
Result of the Elections
The final results of the elections were declared in Febrllar} 1937. The
Congress, as compared to the Muslim League, had achieved un-expected success
and was able to form government in eight out of eleven provinces. The Muslim
League managed to get few seats in the Muslims minorit, provinces but failed in
the Muslim majority areas.
Formation of Congress Ministries
The Congress adopted rigid attitude after winning elections in majority. When the
Governors of the Muslim minority provinces invited the leaders of the congress
parliamentary groups in their respective provinces to form ministries. In reply to
these invitations, the Congress leaders put a condition on the government to give
assurance, the governor would not use their special powers of interference granted
by the constitution for the protection of the Minorities rights. The Viceroy Lord
Linlithgow declared that the Governor would use their special powers in matters of
utmost urgency and that the Ministers would be allowed to work freely. After this
assurance, Congress took office in July 1937. The Congress formed its government
in eight out of eleven provinces i.e Madras, Bom�y, U.P, Bihar, Orissa, C.P,
N.W.F.P. and Assam. In Punjab the Unionist party of Sir Sikander Hayat formed
ministry. In Sindh, Sindh United Party formed Muslim minislr). A Coalition was
formed in Bengel with Molvi Fazal-uJ-Haq of Kirshak Praja party as the leader of
the coalition. Muslim League could not form Ministry in any province.
Congress Atrocities on the Muslims
Congress had formed its ministries in eight provinces. The Congress had
adopted an un-constitutional method to rule the provinces. The ministers of the
congress were not accountable to the parliament. They received all instructions
37
Hadi Puki!>la11 Stu,liesfor (BS-4 years)
from the Congress high Command and were answerable to it for al_l matters._ So,
with the instructions of Congress ministries, the Hindus came �ut to _rmp?se �mdu
Nationalism on the Muslims. The Congress began its rule by 1mposmg its will on
the Muslim minorities in the provinces under its rule. Details of anti-Muslim
activities of the congress government are given below:-
1. Three Colour Flag
Congress Ministries immediately ordered for the hoisting of the three
coloured Congress flag on the government buildings alongside the Union Jack. The
Congress wanted to prove that there were only two powers, the British and the
congress. Muslims showed their resentment against the three colour flag because it
became the cause of Hindu Muslim Riots.
2. Bande-E-Matram Anthem
It was a National Anthem of the Hindus. Bande-E-Matram was a song in
which degrading verses were used against the Muslims and their religion i.e. Islam.
The song was written by a Bengali novelist Bankim Chandra Chatterjee in 1892. It
was a famous novel and its name was Anand Math. In this novel, Anand Math
urged all the non-Muslims to wage war against the Muslims in order to expel them
from India which meant for the Hindus only. Congress Ministries declared it as the
National Anthem. It was compulsory to sing it in the legic;lat;ve assemblies and
educational institutions and at aJl official occasions.
3. Hindi as a �ational Language
Urdu language was the con,mon language of the Hindus and the Muslims. It
was promoted during Muslim rule in the India and was introduced as an official
language in 1825. Congress Ministr�es opposed the Urdu language as an official
language because it was considered as the language of the Muslims. During the
Congress Ministries, Hindi was enforced as the official language in all the
provinces which were under the�Congress rule. It was introduced in schools and
colleges
4. Waddia Maodir Scheme
It was an educational policy which was introduced in the congress
provinces for the students belonging to all sects and religions. It was totally agai �t
the Muslim culture and civiliz.aticm. The young pupils were compelled to fold their
hands in front of Gandhi's picture and sing his praise while bowing down in the
way of Hindu worship. This action was very painful for the Muslims.
38
lllldi Pakistan Studies for (BS-4 years)
S. Wardha Educational Scheme

The v.ardha scheme was Gandhi's philosoph} . fhis scheme aimed to
develop a high respect among the youth about the IIindu heroes and religious
leaders. This scheme sought to isolate the young generation of the Muslims from
their religion, culture and civilization. The main objective of this scheme was to
destrO } the Muslim culture and wanted to promote the Hindu culture.
6. Slaughter of the Cow
Slaughter or the cow was prohibited. Use c•f beef was prohibited in areas
where it had the sanction of tradition and custom. If a Muslim slaughtered a cow
for sacrifice, he was killed. his house was burnt, and his wife and children were
assaulted. Fines and punishments were imposed on Muslims for slaughtering the
cow and eating beef. The organized attempts were made to provoke the Muslim
masses who were given no protection against any kind of high handedness
7. Disturbance in Religious Matter
Where Muslims were in minorities during Congress Ministries Azan was
forbidden and organized attacks were made on the Muslim worshippers who were
busy in their prayers in Mosques. Noisy processions were organized to pass near
the Mosques at prayer time.
8. Hindu Muslim Riots
The Hindu Muslim Riots were usual during the Congress rule throughout
the country. The Hindus were free to make the Muslims victimize of their high
bandedness in whatever area they liked. The houses of Muslims were set on fire
under this government. Hindus were innocent and no inquiry was launched against
any Hindu, thus the Hindu Muslim riots had spread through out the country.
Muslim lodged the complaints against these incident but no action was taken by the
government.
Resignation of Congress Ministries 1939
The Second World War b,oke out in I 939. The Congress demanded a
promise for independence before helping the British in his critical hour of need. Its
leaders threatened to go out of the. provincial ministries if the British authorities <lid
not surrender. British government refused to accept this demand. Hence the
Congress resigned in November, 1939.
Day of Deliverance
With the resignation of the congress ministries, the Muslims of India were
relieved of the mo�t dreadful domination of the Congress and Hindu majority. It
39
I/ad/ Pakista11 Studlel for (BS--4 yeaN)
. .
was painful for the Muslims o� l�dt� who h
e the real Hindu mentality. After
calle d upon the Mus lims of
the resignation of Congress Mtm5mes, Quru�1
! ��
d rverance Public meetings were
India to celebrate De cember��• 1939 as a day-0.f
held and prayers of than.ks-g1vmg were offiered tn
e � onsc 10 this appeal by Quaid
resp
e-Azam.
. . •
po 1. e s Of the congress and
tci
Role of Muslim League
The Musli m Leagu prot st d again st anu-m usltm .
its gnevance
openly condemned its various steps. The Muslim League exp ressed
e e e
e -Azam
concerning the communal riots in the U.P, Bihar, C.P �d Bom_bay. Quatd -
the Congr ess
criticized the Congress rule and declared it as Hindu RaJ. H e said that
rule was an authoritative set up which uprooted all norms of democracy.
2.12 LAHORE RESOLUTION 1940
Background
The Muslims of the Sub-Continent were worri ed about the ir national future
ever since they lost the war of independence 1857. The Hindus were in majorit) in
India and they were constantly trying to merge Islam into it like other issues.
µispite of the presence of the British Rule, the blood of the Muslims was shed
merciless!)' in sectarian riots. The Muslims could not lead a dignified and graceful
life in the Hindu society that believes in caste system, clolour and cread and the
Hindus could never agree to give the Muslims equal social status. The rights of the
Muslims will be unsafe in an undivided India. In these circumstances, the Muslims
of Indfa wanted to establish a state in the name of Islam where they could lead their
individual as well as collective lives freely in accordance with the principles laid b)
Islam. In diffe rent periods, different visionaries gave th e signs about the partition of
the sub-contin ent.
Suggestions about the Partition of the Sub-Continent
The detail of the suggestions of differ ent le aders are given as follows :
1. Muhammad Abdul Qadir Bilgrarni suggested for the di\ision of Ind ia.
2. Sardar Gui Muhammad Khan proposed for the partition of India, by giving the
idea that the area between Agra and Peshwar would belong to the Muslims.
3. In 1934. Lala Lajpat Rai also advocated for the division of India between
Muslims and Hind us.
4. In 1980, Moulana Abdul Halim Sharar suggested that India should be divided
into two Hindu and Muslim states.
40
( Khn11') Bm1hc" flr ,\bdul JJbbar Kh/111') and Pr,,1 Ahdul s..t1u, 1-:hair) !Jre»<d
.
on G,l\oln� �lf•rult: lo ('\·er} ••""l mmhtrul1\c un11111 th1.· �ub-l'rmtinc01.
" Dr Sir Muhammo.tl lql'<II. •• the Mw,hm kawuc ..,,,ion ,r Alloh.NJ, ,Lru:d that
he ""uld l1le tn ,cc '-WfP Puni•t>. SinJh and Baludu""'1 a., ooc >lalc
7 In 1933. Ch.,udh') Rehmar ·\Ii «•1ncd the ""Id ·Palu•11n" "luch i.:ecam, 1
slogan and >Jmhol for the \lu,lims ofrhc .,uJ>..:nntill<'nl
� Tlic 1.ka or lhc prtnmon of the ,u1H:on11ncnt I hct \\ccn the Hind"' Md rhc
\1u.,hm,,1 m mu states """ •rrrecia1cd !>\ the Bnll ,h uucll«tuals ltl.c Blunt
.md Jhnn llngln
'I Joseph Swhnc or Ru..io ulso :muc,prucd ui., d,,;,..,n oflntlio
ID Jamal-ul-<lm ·\fi,:hum propo,,cJ 1<> mnkc rhc nonhcrn pun of ,he 5Ul><onuncnr
as nn mdcpcnJcn1 !>.1uslim •13�. I le pen:q,tcd ,,f •n mJcpcnJrnt Muillm
republic compmmg of the present Pflkiswn. Afgh,mis1nn. ,,nd Ccnm,I A>lll.
11 In 1938. Sindh Mushm league p-1 • rewlu1ion ,n •�•·our of Pakis1'1n
12 The clJ:mnnd of the :1.1uslitm li>r a 5eJ10mto country i$ not unhmorical Ireland
,\0l lieed!\m from l'nglond, Spam wld Ponu�I bcalmc sepanart sutes,
C1.cchoslo,ukio got u separate wdcnhlicuion 1.s • result of !he punition Ihe
prublem 1n Indio Is n01 or a n inlcH-Omrnunal duar""lcr bu1 rnaruti:sli) u1 an
intcmaltonaJ wx nnd JI mu!;.t be tmah::d as such
I , Qua1J-<:-Azu111 \,luhummrul Ali Jin11!1h "1iJ. -1nJ10 ,s • sul>-conuncnL II i\ no1 a
c�untry ur homeland c,f u notii>n \!any No1101U ato h•int here ond thcrr lnt..-re>1,
11r� separ.1h! from one anotbtr u
r,..,,idtntilal Addreslo orQuald-e-A,a.m Muh1mm1d Ali Jinnah
On .!2'"' \larch 1940. m o huge i:,alhcrini; of the Muslims from all o,cr
India. Qu;iid...-•A�m dc.li\crd his hi,1onc11I rresidcnu:u address I k highhghtcd 1hr
-..:p.iralc anJ d1stlnc1 oauon.&I cllllrnc1er or thc \iushm• <1f lnd,a. He ..aid 111'11 the
llind11> und lh< Mu,lims t>cloll!! 10 IWO d11Tcrcr11 philo,ophi<'. sociul eu<10ms and
hll!llllutt. Thev n<ithcr imcnn� nor intcrdinc t0gc1hcr and mdccd, lht) bclona lu
""' dillc:rent • aivtl.uation� ...h,ch are based truttuly on conll1ctlng uka• and
con«puons. 11,oir eonccp1s on lif< ore dlITercnl Th•� b:ivc dilTcrtnt •ptcs.
ilillcrenl horocs and Lliflcleot epl� Very often the hero of one is the fnc of 1hc
01hcr and, llk<\\ise, tl1clr vie1orios and dcftots o,crlap. 1'o yo�• togc1hcr I\\O such
nations under u single ,1atc, one 1<> • numerical minority and 1hc olh<'r ;i.s ll
maioril)', must lead 10 growin11 discontent .Muslamnn. arc tt ?3 tion 11<cordlr1c t�
an) definition uf nn1ion. 11nd !hey must ha,c !Mir hom<land. their tcrntul') mJ 1hci1
Sl31t.
41
Hadt Pakista11 Studiesfor (BS-4 years)
He also discussed the political situation of the sub-continent at large and

suggested remedies to the political problems. Quaid-e-Azam said that the Muslims
of the sub-continent would never accept any S) stem which would establish the
Hindu domination over the Muslims.
Contents of the Resolution
On 23 rd March, 1940. All India Muslim League held its historical Annual
Session in Minto Park (now Iqbal Park) Lahort:. In this session, Mr. A.K. Fazal-e
Haq, (Chief Minister, Bengal) moved a Resolution of the demand for independent
State for the Muslims of India. It was seconded by Chaudhry Khaliq-uz-Zaman.
The contents of the resolution are under:
"No constitutional plan would be workable in this country or acceptable to
the Muslims unless it is designed on the following basic principles name!} that the
geographically contiguous units are demarcated into regions which should be so
constituted with such territorial readjustments as may be necessaI), that the areas in
which the Muslims are numerically in a maJorit). as in the orth-Westem and
Eastern Zone of India, should ht: grouped to constitutt! ••independent states" in
which the constituent units shat! be autonomous and sovereign.··
The resolution was unanimously passed by the participants of the Muslim
League session from all over the country. The Muslims acclaimed the resolution
enthusiastically. With the passing of the Pakistan Resoluuon, the Muslim League
Policy was clear and unmistakable. India must be di"ided and there was no
alternative. The Muslims wanted this and would not be satisfied by anything.
Replacement of the word "States"
In Pakistan resolution word "States" was written that was to be corrected on 9th of
April 1946. The Muslim members of all central and provincial Assemblies held a
meeting where the word "states" was replaced b} the word "State'·.
Reaction to the Resolution
Immediately after the passing of the Resolution. the Hindu journalists and
leaders expressed their resentment. The Hindu press published leading news that
the Muslim League had a dangerous design to disintegrate the country by the
creation of Pakistan. The Hindu Newspapers "The Hindustan Times" "the Modem
revi��" and ..the Amrita Bazar Patrika" wrote editorials against the plan of
part1t1on.
42
Had/ Pakistan Studies for (BS-4 year,{)
The Hindu leaders began to express their views against the resolution.
Gandhi and Nehru criticized it and turned it down in harsh words. Gandhi called it
the ''vivisection of mother land, cutting up a baby into two halves and the cutting of
another cow". The Muslim League called it the Lahore Resolution, but the Hindu
press ridiculously began to write it as ·'Pakistan Resolution.'' The Muslim leaders
adopted this new term and today it is called "Pakistan Resolution. The British press
did not pay much attention.
The Hindus were of the view that the proposal for the partition will be
rejected. But the Muslims of the sub-continent had decided their future. As a result
of great struggle. they succeeded in getting Pakistan after seven years only.
2.13 CRIPPS MISSION 1942
Background
Second World War started in 1939. In this war, Japan was fighting against
Britain and its allies. In the beginning of the war, the position of British Army was
very poor. On every sector, the Great Britain and its allied forces were being
defeated by opponent forces. While on the other side, Japan's Army was near to
win the position and it seemed that Japan's Army would defeat the British Army in
the coming few days. In those circumstances, the congress leaders were closely
reviewing the situation and were confident that Japanese would hand over the
power to the Indians after Britain's defeat. On that occasion, Gandhi threatened to
start civil disobedience campaign. Under this critical situation, the British
Government thought it essential to find a solution acceptable to both the Muslim
league and the congress.
Cripps Mission
In 1942, Mr. Churchil, the British Prime Minister, sent a mission headed by
Sir Stafford Cripps to find a constitutional solution. The mission reached New
Delhi on 23 March 1942 to hold discussions with Indian leaders. He held meetings
with the Indian Leaders, and discussed a whole range of issues of immediate
concern. But the Indian leaders did not cooperate with the mission. The Cripps
Mission, submitted its own proposals to the government for constitutional refo rm s
on 30th of March I 942. These proposals are known as Cripps proposals.
Proposals
Detail of the recommended Cripps Mission proposals are given as follow:
43
Had/ Pakista11 Studiesfor (BS-4 years)
l. The sub-continent will be given the status of a dominion after the war.
2. All government departments will be handed over to the Indian. including
Defence. Foreign Affairs and Communications miniatries.
3. A central constituent assembly will be formed to formulate a constitution. It
will be elected by the members of the provincial assemblies and will
nominate persons from the states as soon as the war was over.
4. After the constitution is made, it will be sent to all the provinces for
confirmation. The provinces which would not approve the constitution
would have the authority to establish their independent status.
5. Special steps will be taken to safeguard the rights of minorities
Reaction of the Political Parties
The Cripps also stated that their suggestions had to be accepted or rejected
completely as no amendments would be considered. These recommendations
would be implemented only if the congress and Muslim League accepted them
unanimously.
Reaction of the Muslims
All India Muslim League expressed thanks to Crips. Because the British
Government promised to the Muslim majority provinces for a free and independent
status and proposed steps for the protection of the rights of minorities. But when
the Muslim league, discussed the proposals in the meeting then, it decided not to
approve the Cripps proposals as they did not concede Pakistan in clear terms.
Reaction of Indian National Congress
The Congress absolutely rejected the Cripp's Proposals. They dema'lded for
the transfer of power and immediate withdrawal of the British rule from India. The
Hindu leaders criticized them as a post-dated cheque on a failing Bank.
The congress criticized the right of veto, given to the provinces and opposed
the idea of Pakistan. Hindu leaders expressed their displeasure for providing
protection to the minorities. The Cripps proposals failed Sir Stafford Cripps took
the responsibility on his own and blamed no one.
2.14 QUIT INDIA MOVEMENT
After the failure of Cripps Mission, Sir Stafford Cripps returned to England
in 1942. While the second world war ( 1939-1945) seemed to be going in favour of
Japan. So, Congress leaders were confident that Japenese would hand over the
44
power to the Indians after Britain ·s defeat. The Congress leaders wanted to take
advantage in this worse situation. A meeting of Congress committee was held on
8th August 1942 and passed ··Quit India Resolution" at Bombay. It was meant that
the British should hand over the Government of the Sub-continent to the Congress
leaders and leave the country. The Congress did not consult the Muslim leaders
before putting forward this demand. The Muslim League condemned this plan.
Some Hindu leaders like Sir Tej Bahadur Sapro and Gopal Acharya also
condemned'" Quit India'" plan. Quaid-e-Azam made it clear that the "Quit India··
campaign meant nothing but to establish Hindu rule all over India. In reply to "Quit
India" slogan by the Congress. the Muslim League demanded divide and Quit.
Activities of the Congress Workers
During the ·Quit India Movement' the Congress workers uprooted the
railway lines. cut off the electric and telephone wires and set fire to the government
otlices. These activities were carried on in Hindu majority provinces. During that
campaign, the law and order remained suspended in various parts of India. In the
meantime, the war situation under-went a radical change in favor of Britain. The
Japanese could not advance an inch ahead but retreat rapidly. Ultimately. the 'Quit
India" campaign launched by congress met a complete failure and could not
produce any fruitful results.
2.15 SIMLA CONFERENCE 1945
Background
During World War Second, the Indian National Congress put more pressure
on the 'government through launching Quit India Movement against the British
government. The British government took strict action against Quit India
Movement and arrested many prominent leaders of the Congress. ln May 1944,
Gandhi was released from jail due to health problem.
Gandhi-Jinnah Talk
Gandhi knew that without cooperation of Muslim League, no headway
could be made towards the goal of independence. So, after release from Jail, he
tll
wrote to Quaid-e-Azam on 1 7 July I 944, in which he expressed his desire to meet
him and to discuss the political situation with him. In June 1944, all India Muslim
League Council at Lahore authorized Mr. Jinnah to meet with him. They met in
Bombay on 9th September, 1944. Gandhi wanted to give some concession to the
Muslims in order to start a joint struggle. Quaid-e-Azam very well understood his
45
lludl Pul.l\fu11 .,,tu<I/�� fer (BS-'I r�an)
mind and insisted thul the "Tv,o Natton rht.:ol)" should be accepted before
demanding independence from the British. But C,andh1 stressed the imponnncc ol
the unit) of lndiu and did not ]grcc with any soluuon that led to the partition of
India. So. Qua1d-e-Azam refused to accept Gandhi's proposal and negotiation
ended in smoke.
\\ avell' Plan
I ord \\ :ncll re13ched India in I 944 as th•: new viccro). Ile chalked out a
plan to settle the political issues with the political parties. He mtroduct:d a frame
\\Ork order. under which the elections of federal and prO\,mcial lt:gislathc
,lS')emblies could be conducted for the formation of future go,·crnment. �lain point.,
of the plan are as follows.
I. The future constitution will be framed with the consent of oil major polt1ical
parties
2. An executive council will be mode and representatives of all maJor pohucal
parties \.viii be included in the council. The council will consist of si, Hindus.
five Muslims and one British
3. The Viceroy will preside over the meetings of the Executive Count;il
4. The Commander-in-Chief will be rm ex-officio mcmher of the fo,ccull\ � Coundl
5. All the members of the council will be nominated by the \'ic�roy
6. Provincial Executive Council will also he organized. Governor of the prO\ me�
will be the chief of the Council, in ct1ch province
7. Ne, change in the relations of lhe Crown with the Indian states
I loldingtlf Simla Conference
The Simla Conference held on 25th June 1945. 1 he folio\, ing poht1c1ans
belonging lo various politicaJ parties were invited.
1. Pundit Nehru. Beldev Singh. and Moulanu Abu Kalam Azad helong to
Congress.
ii. Qu�1id-e-Azam, Linqnt Ali Khan and Abdu1-Rab-Nishtcr h�long tn M•.:sJ:;11
League.
111. Chief Ministers of all Pro, inces
,, Unionist and other parties representatives
..,t.W.±f :;:!"""'
46
The meeting started to discuss the first point on agenda. The point related to
tht:: nomination or five Muslim ministers of tht:: Viceroys Council. The viceroy
explored the possibilities of tht:: fom,ation of a reconstituted Executive Council. He
put up these proposals before them. It was agreed that in the Executive Council
there should be five members each of Hindus and the Muslims. But the
fundamental disagreement regarding the nomination of Muslim representatives
remained nndecided. Quaid-e-Azam took the stand that the Congress could include
only Hindu members in its quota in the Executive Council. Quaid-t::-Azam
demanded that all tht: five Muslim members should be nominated by the Muslim
League. The Congress demanded that out of five Muslim members one should be a
Nationalist Muslim. one a Unionist and the three from Muslim League. The vicero)'
wanted to assign four seats for the Muslim but the Quaid-e-Azam could not agree
to this division at that critical stage in the struggle for Pakistan. The Simla
Conference was broken-down on this issue.
Failure of the Conference
Simla Conference failed to achieve any result because Mr. Jinnah would not agree
to the Viceroy's proposal. Viceroy Lord Wavell announced the failure of the Simla
Conference on 14th July 1945. The VicerayJ�iticized the inflexible attitude of the
Quaid-e-Azam and further said that Jinnah's uncompromising attitude had wrecked
the conference. The Indian National Congress held the Quaid-e-Azam responsible
for the fai I ure.
2.16 GENERAL ELECTIONS (1945-46)
Background
In those days, the failure of Simla Conference and its responsibility was the
important issue. On the other side, America emerged as a Supper Power after the
Second World War. America looked forward to exert pressure on Britain to hand
over the power to the people of its colonies. In those circumstances, the General
• Elections were imperative in the sense that the government intended to know the
real political force of every political party. The future of the Sub-Continent was to
be decided in the light of the people's mandate in the elections. The elections could
clarify the situation, which political party was holding the just stand:
Announcement of the Elections
It was decided to hold General Election for the Central and Provincial
legislatures. All political parties welcomed the decision and decided to participate
in the elections. The central election was held in December 1945 and the provincial
47
/Judi Puki\tu11 Stutlie\ for (RS-4 ye1m)
ekct1on was held in Junuar) 1946. In Lhat ek<..tions. Lhe t\.\o Major Political parties
stood against cad1 other Iht: congress comprom1sc<l v,ith Majlis-c-Ah1ar. Jamiat
ul-l'lma-c-Hmd and l,momst Pam All the politi<...il panics welcomcJ the
dcc1s1on.Both \1uslim League and C.ongress 1s-;ucd their �1 mifcstos. \\hich an: as
lnllov,s.
Manifesto of Congress
Congress gu\e the ro,1owmg po111ts as tts mamfcsto:
Freedom orlndia.
United India
Representation of the Hindus and all the minorities of India.
4 Manifesto of Muslim League
All India Muslim League gave the following points as ih manifesto·
I. Liberation of India
2. Partition of India.
3. Representation of all India Muslims.
Elections Campaign
All political parties were given the opportunit) to propagate their point of
, iew before the masses. Both of the two Major Paities struted their campaign \\ith
full force. The Congress claimed that it was the sole representative part} of all
India which was a natural unit and could not be di,ided.
On the other hand. it \\-US a challenge for the Muslim league to prove the
truth of its claim that Muslim League was the soh: representative organiLation of
the Muslims of India. So, the Muslim League emphasiled upon two things. Firstl).
that the Muslims of India were a separate Nation from Hindus and secondh that the
only solution of tht: Hindu Muslim problem in India '.\as the partition of India and
the establishment of a separate and independent Muslim state. Quaid-e- Azam. in
spite of his failing health, made stormy tours to make the Muslims aware of the
need of the hour. Muslim League began to gain popularity rapidly. Many a Muslim
leaders disaffiliated themselves from their political groups and joined Muslim
League. The Muslim students also came forward. The groups comprising Muslim
League Workers spread in each comer of the countr). Quaid-e-Azam turned the
elections as referendum on one issue was" Pakistan or no Pakistan". He made it
48
Had/ Pakistan Stud/et; for (BS-I years)
clear that the defeat of Muslim League would mean burial of the idea of the
creation of Pakistan. If the Muslims supported All India Muslim League, no power
on the earth would be able to stop the creation of Pakistan.
Result of Elections
The election was held on the basis of Separate Electorate. In the election of
the central assembly, the Muslim League won all the thirty (30) seats and in the
Provincial assemblies the Muslim League won 434 seats out of 495 Muslim seats.
It was great victory of the Muslim League.
The result of that election clearly demonstrated the strength of the Muslim
league. Now Muslim League was the sole representative party of the Muslims of
the India. The claim of the Quaid-e-Azam proved true and the demand for Pakistan
was supported by the absolute majority of the Muslims. Now, no one could stop
Pakistan from coming into being.
2.17 CABINET MISSION PLAN 1946
Background
All attempt of the British government at bringing about peace between the
Congress and Muslim League failed. After the general election of 1945-46, British
government felt the urgency to find out a solution for the Political deadlock which
was in result of non-cooperation between the Congress and the Muslim League.
Thus, British government decided to send a special mission of Cabinet Ministries.
On J 5thMarch 1946, in a debate in the House of Commons, Mr. Attlee, the British
Prime Minister, declared, "we are mindful of the right of the minorities and
minorities should be able to live free from fear, on the other hand we cannot allo\\
a minority to place their veto on the Majority." '•Such a statement could only please
the Congress that insisted on United India. But it was against the aspirations of the
Muslims of Jndia who had elected Muslim League members as their representatives
on the basis of Pakistan. Quaid-e-Azam answered to this statement, "I want to
reiterate that the Muslim of India is not a minority but a Nation and sdf
determination as the birth-right."
Arrival of the Cabinet Mission
A mission consisting of three members of the British cabinet arrived in
India on 24 th March 1946. They were Lord Pathic Lawrence, Sir Stafford Cripps
and A.V Alexander.
49
Had/ Pakistan Studies for (BS-4 years)
The purpose of the visit was to help in solving the proble�s of the future
constitution of India and matters relating to the Independence of India.
Activities of the Mission
The mission met the leaders of all the significant political parties. They also
tried to know the point of view of the Governor and Chief Minister of different
Provinces. The Muslim League was emphasizing that partition and creation of
Pakistan was the only solution of a11 political problems. The congress vehemently
opposed it and rejected the demand for Pakistan.
There was a total deadlock because the fundamental issue was the creation
of a sovereign state for the Muslims In 16th May 1946, Cabinet Mission announced
its own plan which suggested a three tier constitutional plan.
Cabinet Mission Proposals
Cabinet Mission presented the proposals before the political parties. The
salient foatures of the plan are as follows.
1. A Union of India
The Sub-C'ontin'ent v,i)I he given the status of a union The union will be
consisted of provinces and prince!) states The s\ stem will be federal. This union
would deal with the subjects of foreign affair-;. dt fence. rnmmunications, revenue
and finance. All other departments will be handed o, ,··::,the provinces
2. Groups of Pro,inccs
The Provinces c:;hould be Jiv1ded into three groups.
Group-A
This group consists of six Hindu maJ mt} Provinces Bombay, Madras, LI.P, C P.
Bihar and Orissa.
Group-B
This group consists of the Provinces of Sindh, Punjab. Baluchistan and N.W.F.P.
Group-C
rhis group consists of the Provinces of Bengal and Assam.
3. Constituent A,scmbl}
1 he-re would be a Constituent Assembly elected by the elccted mt!mbcrs of
th� �, incinl As�.cmblie�. The Constituent J\sscmbl1 ,., ill ro, m�lah' a �·omtitu�
50
llutll PaAistan Stutl/e� for (BS-4 yeun)
for the �hole �uh-continent After the completion of federal constitution these
representati\ es would be divided into their respccth,e groups Each group would
dra\.l,, up the Constitution of its own Province.
4. Separation from the group
After the completion of the constitution of all provinces, if a province likes, it will
be authorized to quit the group to which it is being attached. Such a pro\ mce would
be free to jom an) other group of its own choice.
5. Executive Council
The Yicero) 's Fxecutive Council would be reconstituted. The New
E,ecuti,e Council would include the representatives of the m�jor political parties.
6. Separation from Indian Union
In this plan, a provision was kept that one or two groups of Pro\ inces will
be authorized to quit the Indian Union after ten years. It means that the l\.l,,O groups
B and C were of Muslim majority Provinces and they would be able to maintain
their sovereignty.
7. Interim Government
The interim government will immediately be installed and 1t will run the
system of the government till the formation of the constitution. The representati\'es
of major political parties will be included in the interim government. o Britisher
will be the minister. The cabinet will be powerful in administrative matters.
8. Veto Power
The option was given to every political pal'ly to reject the Cabinet Mission
Plan but, in that case, party v.-ould not be able to join the interim government. The
right to join the interim government was given only to the parties which supported
the plan.
Reaction of the political parties
The Hindu leaders welcomed this plan. They were satisfied and congratulated
one another. Nehru gave a statement. "The Cabinet Mission Plan buried
Pakistan of Mr. Jinnah" and the congress accepted the Plan.
2. The Muslims of the India were totally disappointed \.\ith the Cabinet Mission
Plan. They felt that the idea of Pakistan was totaJly ignored and demand for
Pakistan was rejected. The Quaid-e-Azam said, "I am sorry to see that the
demand for Pakistan has been ignored by the mission plan. We still believe and
51
/lad/ Pakistan Srudlt!s jor (BS-4 yeun)
say with full confidence that lhc solution of political problems lies in the
creation of two independent sovereign states.''
3. The council of Muslim League gave full mandate to the Quaid-_c •Az �n:1 to
1 �tth the I dea
declare the policy. So, he declared that he would accept the Pan
that the demand for the creation of Pakistan would be made possible after ten
years, which consisted of Assam, Bengal, Punjab, Sindh and N.W.F.P.
4. Toe leaders of the congress were confused and declared the acceptance of half
of the plan by agreeing to form the interim government and fo rm the Federal
constitution and rejected the group system.
S. Quaid-e-Azam forced the British government to implement the whole plan but
the government was reluctant in abiding by its promise. Quaid-e-Azam was
unerl> disappointed. He rejected the cabinet mission plan. He declared to take
direct action for the protection of the rights of the Muslims and to achte\-e
Pakistan. All India Muslim League fixed August 16, 1946 for direct Action
Da}. At last, the Viceroy remained in touch with the Quaid-e-Azarn and tried to
persuade him to join the interim government.
2.18 INTERIM GOVERNMENT 1946
Background
On 22 July 1946, Lord Wavell, Viceroy of India, wrote a letter to ehru and
Jinnah and invited them to join an "Interim Coalition Government." He suggested
that there would be fourteen members in the cabinet, six from Congress, five from
the Muslim League and the other three would be the representatives of the minority
parties. The important portfolios would be divided equally to the Congress and the
Musli� League. �e made it clear that_ neither Congress nor Muslim League would
be entitled to obJe�t the names submitted by the other party, provided they were
acceptable to the Viceroy. But Nehru and Jinnah rejected the proposal. This created•
a complete deadlock.
Invitation to the Congress to form the Government
. In order to break the deadlock, the Secretary of

State for India asked the
Viceroy to contact Nehru and to offer him
to fo nn the Government while he
completely ignored the Muslim League. On
his suggestion, Viceroy L�rd Wavell
\Hole a letter to Nehru on 6th August and invit
ed him to fo rm the Government. The
52
fladJ Paki5tan Studies for (BS-4 years)
Congress held its Working Committee session on 8th August and authorized Nehru
to negotiate the terms and Conditions for joining the Interim Government. On 17th
August 1946, Nehru asked the Viceroy to allow him to form a full strength
Ministry by filling the 5 Muslim seats with non League Muslims. But this idea was.
however, not acceptable to the Viceroy and asked him to leave the Muslim seats
vacant.
Formation of Interim Government 1946(Congress government)
At last, the differences were resolved and the Executive Council was
constituted on 2nd September 1946. The Congress joined the Interim Government
""hich constituted as follows.
Portfolios were allocated to the Congress
Portfolios were allocated to the Congress and the Congress nominatc!d their
members which are as follows.
Sr. No. Office Name Party
1 Viceroy and Governor Viscount Wavell British Empire
General of India President
of Executive Council
2 Commander-in-Chief Sir Calude British
Empire Auchinleck
3. Vice president of the Jawaharlal Nehrucongress
Executive Council
External Affair and
Common Wealth Relation
4 Home Information and Sardar Vallabhbhai Congress
Boradcasting Patel
5 Food and Agriculture Rejendra Prashad Congress
6 Works, Mines and Power Musarat Chandra Congress
Bose
7 Industries and supplies Raja Gopal Achari Congress
8 Labour
- Jagijivan Ram Congress
53
Hadi Pakistan St11diesfor (BS-4 year'i)
Department of the Minorities

) Defence Sardar Baldev Congress
Singh (Sikh)
2 Commerce C.H. Bhabah (Parsee) Congress
3 Finance Johan Matthai Congress
(Indian Christian
Three Muslims who belonged to Congress
l Railways and Asaf Ali Congress
Communication post and
air
2 Arts, Education and Health Sir Shafaat Ahmad Congress
Khan -
3 Law Syed Ali Zaheer Congress
Two Muslim's seats were left open to be filled with suitable persons.
Reaction of the Muslim League Muslim League rejected the idea of installing one
party Government. Jinnah declared Viceroy's decision against his earlier assurance
and commitments with the Muslim League. '{he Muslim League observed "2nd
September" as black day. On the day when new government took office, the
Muslims throughout India flew black flags on their houses and shops. Three seats
out of five of the Muslim League quota were filled with the Nationalist Muslim
Leaders. This led to a wild reaction and the country came to be afflicted with
hindu- Muslim riots, on an unprecedented scale almost touching the civil war.
Formation of-the Interim Government 1946 (Coalition of League & Congress)
In this situation the British government realized that the Interim Government
cannot deliver unless and until the Muslim League sends its repre
sentatives in the
Cabinet. So the Viceroy asked Jinnah to join the Interim
Government. After a long
discussion with the Muslim leaders, Quaid-e-A
zam agreed to join interim
government. On the other hand Muslim Leagu
e also realized that if the Congress
were frer to govern the country, the
� "" interest of the Muslims would not be
54
Hudi PaA/sran Studiesfor (BS-4 1•ears)
safeguarded and they would become the victim of I lindu oppression and tyranny
Jinnah realized that he could protect the interests of the Indian vlusllms more if his
party joins the Interim Government. Thi.! Muslim League had refused to join the
government on principle which still stood, but political necessity compelled it to
change its policy. On this reason the Muslim League intimated the Viceroy with its
dec1s1on and then Muslim League joined the Interim Government on 25 th October,
1946. In order to create space for the Muslim League Ministers, Musarat Chandra
Bose, Shafaat Ahmad Khan and Syed Ali Zahecr had to quit their ministries.
Muslim League nominated a scheduled cast Hindu, Jogendra Nath Manda!, as the
cabinet member. This act could challenge the Congress claim of being the sole
representative of the deprived class. Though the Viceroy wanted to give one of the
three important departments. i.e. External Affairs. Home or Defence to the Muslim
League, but Nehru straight away rejected the idea.
Portfolios which were allocated to the different parties:
It was on 25 th October. 1946 that the Executive Council was reconstituted. The
congress and Muslim League nominated their members which were as follows:
Department of the Congress
) Viceroy. Governor General, Viscount Wavell British Empire
President of Executive CoW1cil
2 Commander-in-Chief Sir Claude Auchinleck British Empire
3 Vice President of Executive Jawaharlal Nehru Congress
Council, External Affairs, &
Common Wealth Relations
1--
--
4 Home, Infonnation and Vallabhbha1 Patel Congress
Broadcasting
�
5 Food and Agriculture Rajendra Prasad Congress
6 Education And Arts C. RajgopaJacharia Congress
7 Transport and Railways Asif Ali Congress
Asif Ali
8 Labour Jagjivan Ram Congress
55
1/odl Pa/./Han Srutlln "' HS-, rean)
Department of the Muslim Lca�uc

-
Sr. No. Office 'umc Party
I Finance I ioqat A Ii Khan Muslim League
2 �·ommercc
-
I.I. Chundrigar M_uslim League
.
3 Communications Abdur Rab Nishtar Muslim League
4 Health Ghazanfar Ali Muslim League
5 Legislature J.N. Manda! Mus Jim League
Department of the Minorities
Sr. No. Office

' Name
1 Industries and Supplies . John Matthai
2 Works, Mines and Power C.H Bnabha
3 Defence . Baldev Singh
I
The Interim
•
government remained in place till the partition of th� Sub-
Continent on 14th August, 1947.
2.19 THIRD JUNE PLAN 1947
Background
Even after the formation of interim Government the pohtu:.al and
constitutional problems could not be solved. Because the cabinet nuss1on plan was
only partly implemented, on the other hand Muslim League did not take interest m
fonning the constitution. Thus the tension between the Congress and Muslim
league persisted. Keeping in view the circumstances. the Pnme Minister of Britain.
Lord Attlee made a statement on 20th February, l 947 that power would be
transferred to responsible Indians before June, 1948.
Appointment of Lord Mountbatten
The British Government appointed Lord Mountba
tten as the viceroy of
India. Lord Mountbatten came to India and repla
ced Lord Wavell on March 22.
1947. Lord Mountbatten took the charge
of viceroy with the mission to make 8
peaceful transfer of power from British
to India in June 1947. So, for this purpose.
he began negotiations with the politic
al leaders of India,
56
Had/ Pa/..i!,IUII Studies for (BS-4 J't!UI"\)
Preparation of 3 rd June plan 19-'7

On I 5 11 \pnl he also comencd the conlcrence of the provincial Governor!>
and put fon,ardcd his partition scheme, for consideration After ha,ing the views
of �ovcmors over the "iCheme the Viceroy sent it to London for final approval On
101 Ma). the Vicero) received the plan from London which ha� now got the
approval of t� British Cabinet. When Mountbatten showed the plan to 1'.chru, he
rejected the �an because the plan was not discussed with Indian political leaders
before sending it to London for final approval. The viceroy sent a message to
London requesting cabinet to abolish the former plan. The new plan was short!> to
be sent.
Y.P. Menon himself said. ··1 had only two or three hours in which to prepare
an alternative draft plan and I set to work on it at once''
According to lshtiaq Hussain Qureshi in his book, "The struggle for Pakistan"
"Thus it came to pass that the plan which was to bring the British Indian Empire to
an end and change the face of Asia and of the world was drawn up by a Congress
minded Hindu adviser of the Viceroy in collaboration with Nehru and (perhaps)
Krishna Menon. It was not considered necessary to take Jinnah into confidence. He
was completely ignored"
The plan was approved by Lord Ismay and George Bell. Lord Mountbatten
threatened that he would resign if it was not accepted by his Majesty's
Government. His threat worked and Attlee and his whole cabinet approved of it
without any amendment. On 3rd June t947, Lord Mountbatten announced the plan
in a joint conference of Congress and Muslim League.
Salient Features of 3rd June Piao
The Salient features of the plan are as follows:
1. The legislatures of the Punjab and Bengal shall decide whether the
provinces should be divided or not. A boundary commission was created to
dra°"' the line of demarcation between East Bengal and West Bengal.
2. A referendum shall be held in N. W.F.P. The people of this province had to
decide their future by a referendum. They could either join Pakistan or
India.
3. Baluchistan had not yet been given the status of a full fledged province. It
was decided that Shahi Jirga and Municipal committee, Quetta would
decide the future of Baluchistan by the majority votes of their members.
57
I
4. States shall be free and independent to JOtn Pakistan or India keeping

Geographical position and special circumstances in view.
S. Pakistan and India shall have their own Governor-Generals who will be the
Executive heads of their respective Countries.
6. The members of the Sindh Provincial Assembly got the right to j oin
Pakistan or India by a Majority vote.
7. Sylhet, the district of Assam, had to decide their, own futun:.. through a
referendum. They had to opt either for Pakistan or India.
8. Non Muslim Majority Provinces like C.P, U.P, Orissa, Bombay, Madras
and Bihar were to be included in India.
9. Military shall be divided amongst two countries after partition.
10. A boundary commission shall be set up after partition which will demarcate
the boundaries of the two countries.
The date for the transfer of power was fixed on 14 August, 1947, instead of
June, 1948.
2.20 THE INIDAN INDEPENDENCE ACT Of 1947
The Indian independence Act was approved on 18 July, 1947 by British
Parliament. This act was formulated in the light of 3 rd June plan of Lord
Mountbatten. In the light of that, Pakistan got the independent sovereign status on
14th August, 1947 and India on 15th August, 1947. The main important provisions
of this Act are as fallows:
1h
1. The British control over India affairs would come to an end on 15 August,
1947.
2. AU power was to be vested in the Constituent Assembly in each Dominion.
The Constituent Assemblies of India and Pakistan would be sovereign
bodies in their respective countries.
3. The Princely states were given the option to join India or Pakistan OR to
declare independence.
4. The Government Act of 1935 was lo remain in force until both countries
drafted their own constitutions.
•
58
5. �akistan and lndia would have right to remain in the British Commonwealth
1f they so desird.
6. The agreements between the Princely states and the British Government
would come to an end with the end of British control over India.
7. Each Dominion cabinet would have full power to nominate its Governor
General and Governors.
Lord Mount-batten announced the establishment of the Government of
Pakistan on 14th August, 1947. That was the culmination of a Jong struggle which
the Muslims of the Sub-continent had waged for a separate homeland in the name
of Islam. On 7 th August, Quaid Azam left Delhi for Karachi. He addressed the
Constituent Assembly of Pakistan on 11 August, 1947. On 15 August, 1947, he
took the oath as first Governor-General of Pakistan.
2.21 THEEARLYPROBLEMSOFPAKISTAN
Pakistan was created as an independent state on 14th August 1947. The
Hindus did not accept the creation of Pakistan from the core of their heart. So, they
created many problems and difficulties in the early age of Pakistan. The people of
Pakistan faced these problems bravely. Quaid-e-Azam also gave special attention to
solve these problems. The details of the early problems of Pakistan are as under:
Boundary Dispute
Boundary commissions were appointed for the division of Punjab and
y
Bangal. Sir Syril Readclif, a British law er was the head of the commission.
th
Redclif announced the Award of the Boundary commissions on 8 August, 1947.
His award was quite contrary to all the laws of justice. Three Tehsils of District
Gurdaspur which were Phathan Kot, Batala, Gurdaspur and Tehsil Zeera of District
Ferozpur were awarded to India. This division provided lndia_ a link to Kashmir.
The Head works which were constructed on the above mentioned land were also
handed over to India. This award provided [ndia with an instrument to deprive
n
Pakistan of the water of the rivers flowing through Pakista like Sutlej, Beas, Ravi
and Channab and the state of Kashmir also.
The Refugee Problem
[nfact the Hindus did not accept the division of sub-continent from the core
of their heart· whe n Viceroy Lord Mountabatten announced the partition of sub
continent in t� two parts, Pakistan and lndia , the Hindus and Sikhs came out of
59
Had/ Pakistan Studies/or (BS-4 years)
their homes and started killing and mutilating the Muslim men, women and
children. They also started burning their homes and looted their properties. In these
circumstances it was very difficult for the Muslims to live in the newly created
country, lndia.
The Muslims decided to leave their homes and migrate to Pakistan. Millions
of Muslim families left their homes and migrated to Pakistan. It was very difficult
to provide basic needs like food, clothing and shelter for the newly formed country.
But under the leadership of Quaid-e-Azam all the problems were solved in a short
time.
Quaid-e-Azam shifted his Headquarters from Karachi to Lahore to
supervise the activities of rehabilitation of the refugees.
1. Relief Fund for the refugees was set up and invited the philanthropists to
donate as much as they could.
2. Refugee camps were established, where people registered their names,
addresses and the missing members of their families.
3. The sick and mutilated were looked after and food and clothing were
provided. This problem was solved in a short time with the efforts of the
Government.
Administrative Problems
There were very difficult administrative problems which Pakistan had to
face after its creation. The competent people, who ran the administrative machinery
of the government, migrated to India. There were not sufficient buildings for the
offices and residences for the Government Servants. Most of the offices started
their official work under tents pitched in open spaces. There was lack of furniture,
stationery, typewriters and other items that were also not available in the offices.
Most important official records were destroyed by the kind officers before leaving
Pakistan for India. The Quaid-e-Azam inspired the Government officers to work
very hard. So they accepted the challenge and performed their duties with a
national sprit.
Water Dispute
Some Districts where head works of the canals, which irrigated the plains of
Pakistan were excluded from Pakistan territory by the Radcliff Award. ln April
1948 India stopped the supply of water to canals of Pakistan. The reason was that
most of the Pakistani Rivers came through the lands of India and as such Indi!,
60
demanded that Pakistan should pay the price of this water. lnfact this stand of India
was quite contrary to the international law of irrigation. At last with the assistan ce
of the World Bank, water was purchased from India to avoid the crops being
destroyed.
ln 1960, Indus-water-treaty was signed between Pakistan and India to solve
the water dispute. Three rivers Ravi, Sutlej, Bias were handed over to Jndia and
other three rivers Jhelum, Chenab and Sindh became part of Pakistan. With the help
of World Bank Pakistan built Mangla and Trabala dams and link canals.
Division of Assets
At the time of creation of Pakistan there was a cash balance of Rs. 4 billion
lying in the Reserve Bank of India- Pakistan was to receive 750 million rupees as
her share. The first installment of Rs. 200 Million was paid, the rest was with-held
on the advice of Sardar Patel, and was to be paid when Pakistan recognized
Kashmir as a part of India. However, Mr. G andhi went on a hunger strike, and on
his insistence, another Rs. 500 million were paid to Pakistan by India. The rest of
the 50 million has not been paid uptill now.
Division of Military Assets
The British C-in-C field Marshall Auchinleck was in favour of maintaining
the unity of the armed forces. He was also opposed to the division of army assets.
But the government of Pakistan pressurized for the division of Military assets. So,
it was decided that all military assets would be divided between Pakistan and India
at the ratio of 64% and 36%. There were only sixteen ordnance factories in sub
continent at the time of Partition. But not a single factory was situated in the area of
Pakistan. It was decided that India would make payment of 60 million rupees to
Pakistan. With this money, Wah ordn ance factory was established. India also
refused to give Pakistan other shares in military hardware. The armed forces
personnel were given the option to join either of the Pakistan or Indian Army. The
exchange of personnel to�k place with �ut any significant problem, however the
equipment they brought with them to Pakistan was damaged, obsolete and no spare
parts were given.
Disputes of States
There were 635 Princely states in the sub-continent at the time of partition.
About a quarter of India's �opulati�n �ived in _ its Prince�y states. Some of these
states had Muslim rulers with a maJonty of Hindus, wh1le others were ruled b)
61
llttdl Paklstatt Studies for (BS-4 years)
Hindu princes with a majority of Mus lims. According to the Independence Act_ of
1947. the states could freely opt to join India or Pakistan Almost fifteen states 1.c.
Baltistan. Hunza. and Naga of Gilgat Agency. Kalat, Karan, Lasbala. Makran of
Baluchistan Agency. Amb, Chitral, Dir, Phulra, Swat of N.W.F states AgenC}.
Khair Pur of Sind province, Bahawal Pur of Punjab s tate Agency and Azad
Kashmir which was the part of Jummu and Kashmir joined Pakistan. While the
rulers of Junagarh, Manavada r, Hydrabad Daccan states announced to join
Pakistan. but Indian Army entered these states and occupied the se three states
Junagarb and Manavadar States
The rulers of both the state were Msuslim s while majority of the population
of these state s was Hindu. So, the Nawab of Junagarh and Manavadar announced to
join Pakistan. The distance of the state of Junagarh from Karachi was 480
Kilometer. India did not accept the decision of Nawab of Junagerh and Manavadar
The Indian Army entered Junagarh state and occupi ed it. Indian Army al so repeated
the same action and invaded Manavadar as was done in Junagar.
State of Hydrabad Daccan
Nizam of Hyderabad Daccan was Mu slim but majority of the population of
this state was Hindu. Indian government press urized the Nizam of Hyderabad
Daccan to annex his state with India on the basis of geographical situation. Because
this state geographically was surrounded by Indian areas on all sides. The.. izam''
of Hyderabad refused to join India till the last moment. At last, Indian forces
entered the state on September 11, 1948 and fought the state army. The i zam also
fi.led a complaint befo_re the S:curi� Co�cil of U_nited Nations on 24th August,
1948, but the complamt of N1zam 1 s still a pending hearing with the Security
Council.
The State of Jummu and Kashmir
The state of Jummll and Kashmir was the biggest state ·m I
. . nd'ia and
occupied 84 ,471 sq. km ?f_ temto�. The population of the state accordin
g to 194 l
census was about 4 rrul hon which comprised 1naJ·or'tty f
o M us 1·1ms ·m every
provmce · of the vaJley. Dogra ruler Guiab Singh pure
h ased the state from the
Bn· t'� shs·Go e ent m· 1846 for 7.5 million rupees. At the
time of Partition.Mahraja
Han mg ; � ogra wa� ruler of the J ummu . . . .
Population of Jumm and K.ashm1r while maJonty of the
d Kas run· r w .
concluding a treatY :: pa istan _ t as �ush n_1 , who pressurized him into
k . But RaJa Han Singh secretly finalized the
62
I/ad/ Pal.istan Studit!ljor (BS-4 yean)
th
accession of Ka-.hmir �ith India on the 27 December. 1947. The go,ernment of
India was also satisfied with this secret agreement.
But Pakistani government, however. refusc<l to accept this agreement. The
�uslims of Kashmir revolted against their Dogra ruler fhc> ""ere supported b> the
tnbal Muslims of the NWFP. At this stage RaJa of Kashmir asked the Indian
government to send military forces to his rescue fhc government of India accepted
the request at once The Muslims of Kashmir got excited and they started a
movement for the liberatlon of Kasmir, which took the form of an armed rc-.olt due
to the atrocities of the Indian Sikh and Dogra arm}. The tribal Muslims also
assisted them and with the joint efforts of the Mujahedeens. a vast area of Kashmir
\\as liberated from the occupation of India. This area is at present called Azad
Kashmir. The Occupied Kashmir Case was also moved int::> Security Council of the
United ations by Indian government, where it remains unresolved.
EXERCISE-2
Obiective type questions
I . 1 ndependence war was fought in -------------------

(a) 1856 b) 1857 (c) 1858 (d) 1814
2. Scientific society was established by-----------------
(.'a1 Sir syedAhmed Khan > (b) Allama Iqbal
(c) Quaid- e-Azam - (d) Nawab Saleemullah Khan
3. Aligarh institute Gazetee was published on----------------
(a) 1856 (b) 1857 (c) 1859 @.!!6__61
4. Muradabad Maddarsa was established ion-:;:..::--------
(a) 1857 (b) 1858 €) 18591 (d) 1860
5. Ghazi Pur Maddarsa was established on- --=---- - -
(a) 1859 (b) 1860 (c) 1861 M � 1862
6. M.A.0.High School Aligarh was established on-----------
(a) 1872 (b) 1873 (e) 1874 , � 1875
7. M.A.0. College Aligarh was established on,....- -...........
(a) 1875 (b) 1876 /(c) 1877 (d) 1878
8. ----------- ----��ed all India Muslim�!Ig(le bran ch in Londe n.
�e�i{b) Quaid- e-Azam (c) SirAugha Khan (d) Waqar-ul-Mulk
63
Had/ Pal..istan Studies for (BS-4 years)
9. Bangal was divided into tow parts -------------

�)1905 (b)1906 (c) 1907 (d)90
10. ----------Urdu l lindi Controversy begin between Hindus and Muslims
��as (b) Dhaka (c) Delhi (d)Aligarh
11. Quaid-e- Azam left the membership of Congress on -----------
(a)1918 (b) 1919 ({Q1920 (d)1921
12. First World War was fought in-----------
({a) 19ty (b) 1915
13. Kni1afat Committee was formed on
(c)1916 (d)1918
(a) 1918 �12) (c) 1920 (d) 1921

14. Simon Commission came in India in ---------------
(a)1926 l&} 1927 (c)1928 (d)1929
15. Nehru report was presented on -------------
(a)1927 (b)1928) (c)l929 (d)1930
16. Forteen points of Quaicl-e-Azam was presented on-------------
(a)1927 (b)1928 €2_ 929 (d) 1930
17. Second Round Table was started in ------------
(a) 1930 Qb)1931) (c)l932 (d)1933
18. ------------advised to celebrate the "Day of Deliverance".
'(aj._Qa�-e-Azam (b)Allama Iqbal (c)Sir Augha Khan (d) Nehru
19. --------------was the head of the Crips Mission
(a) Lord Pathek Laurance (b)Lord Wava!
�rstaford Crips (d)Lord Mount Batton
� rvr · - · 1 . ·
28. Cnps1ss1011came m nd1a m -----------
(a) I 940 {Cb) �942 (c)1943 (d)1944
2 1. Cabinet mission was consisted on --------------members.
(a)Two �b) Three (c)Four (d)Five
22. Indus-water treaty wa�inged between Pakistan and ----------
€> Indi� (b) Iran (c) Afghanintan (d)China
23. �ere ------- princely state in Sub-Continent at the time of partition.
({a) 635 (b) 636 (c) 637 (d) 638
24. Independence Act was passed on ---···----
th th
(a)23rd March 1947 (b)14 August 1947 (C)l lth August l947((d) 18 July 1947)
64
Had/ Paklstt111 Studies for (BS-4 years)
,. 25. All India Muslim was formed in ----------

, 1905
(a) (b) 1906 (c) 1907 (d) I 908
26. All India Congress was formed in -------------
�5 (b) 1986 (c) 1987 (D) l 998
27. -------------- was in Majority in the state Hyderabad Daccan at the time of
creation of Pakistan
lA) Hindu (B) Sikh (C) Muslim (D) Christain
28. ------------ordinance fectories were working m the united Sub-Continent till
1947.
(A) 18 (B) 19 � 16 (0) 17
29. -----------was the Viceroy of India at the time of partition of Sub-Continent.
((A) Lord Mount Batten(8) Lord Minto (C) Lord Wavell (D) Lord Cunon.
Q.2: Tick the True and False. ✓
I. Pakistan was created on 1947. V- Try.e/False
2. Quaid-e-Azam was the founder of PakitanV- 1rue/ Fal�:,-
3. M.A.O.College Aligarh was established b} Quid-e-Azam.)(
..
True/ FalSe
4. M.A.O.High School was established in 1875.V True/ False
5. The Head office of the Aligarh movement was in LucknowX True /False
6. Syed Ameer Ali organized Muslim League in Londen. V- True/False
7. AU India Muslim League was formed in 1906. v--"' True/ False
8. Quaid-e-Azam was the member of the Mu�lim League and Congress in 1916 at
the same time.V-- True/ False
9. Urdu Hindi controversy begain in Aligarh. '( True/False
1O. Nehru report was presented in I928. V True/ False
11. Quaid-e-Azam presented his fourteen points in 1927 X True/False
12. Allama Jqbal participated in first round table in Londen.,x True/ False
13. Cabinet mission arrieved in India in 1946. l--- True/ False
14. Lord Mount Batten was the last Viceroy of India.V- True/ False
15. Maulana Muhammad Ali Jouhar led the Khilafat MovementVfrue/ False
16. Foure Membe rs of Muslim League were minister in the interim governme nt of
1946. 1' Trne I False
17. Indian independence Act was passed on l 8 July l 948V'°_/True/False
th
18. Allama Iqbal delivered his famous Allahabad Address in 1'930. True/ False
19. British ruler sold the State Jummu and Kishmir in Rs.75 Lacl<True/ False
65
1/adi Pakistan Studle<i for (BS-4 years)
20 The proportional share of Pakistan in the assets of United India was Rs. 700
Million. '<. True/ False
2 l. There \.\ere �i>..tecn ordinance factories in the United India till 194 7. /'
True I False
Q.3: Fill in the Blanks
1. Pakistan was created on ___________________
2. When was Sir Syed Ahmed Khan born______________
3. When Sir Syed Khan died on ____________ _____
4. Who presented two nation theory in sub- continent _________
5. When was scientific society established _____
6. Muslim university Alighar was established ____________
7 \Vho published Ali ghar institute Gazettce _____________
8. When was Alighar institute Gazettee Published ________ _ __
9. When was Muhammadan educationaJ Conference established _....
l0. When was All India Muslim League founded ____________
_____
11. Who was the first president of Alllndia Muslim League ________
l2r Where was the head quarter of all India Muslim League ________
13. Who organized Muslium Leauge in London ____________
14. When was Muslim Leauge London Branch organized._________
15. Bengal was divided into two parts in___
16. Who was the head of Simon commission ________ ____
17. When was Luck.now pact signed _______________
_
18. First World War was fought in _________________
19. Simon commission came in india on ________ _______
20. Who was the head of committee.who presented a reports in 1928 -----
21. When was Nehor report Presented ______________
22. When did Qauid - c- Azam present fourteen points ----------
--------------
23. First round table conference started in
--------------
____
24. When v.as Second World War started
25. Day of deliverance was celebrated on _______
------ -------
:__....:...._
26. Whrn was resolution of Pakistan passed
27. Who wa<; the head of Crips Mission -
-------
28. Crips Mission came in India on ------------
66
Had/ Pakistan Studies/or (BS-4 years)
29. When was cabinet Mission arrived in India -----------

30. The india independenceAct was approved on __________
31. Who was the last viceroy of sub-continent ___________
32. Who was the head of Boundary commission ___________
33. Idus- water - treaty was singed between Pakistan and india on _____
34. What was the totle number of princely states in the sub -continent during
British rule?
35. Who was the Viceroy of the lndia at the time of Partition of the Sub -
continent? _____________________
36. Which political party launched Quit India movement ________
�SWER KEY (Mid Term)

Q No.I: Encircle the correct options.
. b) 2.(a) 3.(d) 4.(c) 5.(d) 6.(d) 7.(c) 8.(a) 9.(a) 10.(a) 11.(c) 12.(a) 13.(b) 14.(b)
I(
15.(b) 16.(c) 17.(b) 18.(a) 19. (c) 20(b) 21.(b) 22.(a) 23.(a) 24.(d) 25.(b) 26. (a) 27.
(a) 28. (c) 29.(a).
Q No.2: Tick Mark the correct choice.

l.(T) 2. (T) 3. (F) 4.(T) 5.(F) 6.(T) 7. (T) 8. (T) 9. (F) 10. (T) 11.(F) 12.(F) 13.(T)
14.(T) -15.(T) 16(F)
.. 17.(T) 18.(T) 19.(T) 20. (F) 21. (T).
Q No.3: Fill in the blanks.

th
(1). 14th august I 947 (2). 17 October 1817. (3). 1898 (4).Sir Syed Ahmed Khan
(5). 1863(6). 1920 (7).SirSyedAhmedKhan(8). 1866(9). 1886(10). 1906(11).
SirAughaKhan(12)Aligarh(13). SyedAmeerAli(14). 1908(15). 1905(16). Sir
JohnSimon(17). I 9I 6(18). 1914(Ind9). 1927(20). Moti Lal Nehru(21). I 928(22).
1929 (23). 1930(24). 1939(25). 22 December 1939(26). 23 March l 940(27).
rd
th
Sir Stafford Cripps (28). 1942 (29). 1946 (30). 18 July 1947 (31). Lord Mount
Batten (32). Sir Syril Radcliffe (33). 1960(34). 635 (35). Lord Mount Batten (36)
Congress
67
1/adl Pak/<;tan Studle.�for (BS-4 yearj)
-
Short Questions
I. Write down the two objectives of the Aligarh movement'!

2. Define the Scientific society.
3. Write down the main purpose of Ali Garh Institute Gazette.
4. Write down any two causes of the establishment of All India Muslim League.
5. Elaborate the Urdu Hindi Conflict.
6. Write down the objectives of the Muslim League.
7. Write down any two provisions of Lucknow pact.
8. Write down any tow objectives of the Khilafat Movement.
9. Write down any two points of Nehru Reports.
I 0. Write down any two points of Fourteen points of Quaid-e-Azarn Muhammad
Ali Jinnah.
11. Write down any two proposals of Cripps Mission.
12. Write down any two Salient features of 3rd June Plan 194 7. ,.
13. Write down any two provisions of Indian independence Act of 1947.
J 4. Write the names of two educational institutions, established by Sir Syed Ahmed
Khan.
J5. How were the groups of provinces formed in the Cabinet Mission Plans?
J6. Discuss the administrative problems which the country faced after the partition?
LONG QUESTIONS
J. Discuss the educational services of Sir Syed Ahmed Khan.
2. Write a note on All India Muslim League.
3. When was the Khilafat Movement started? Explain in detail.
4. Write a short note on Nehru Reports.
5. Write a note on Resolution of Pakistan.
6. What were the early problems faced by the country after its creation of
Pakistan? Explain any four of them.
68
/Jodi PaJ./\1011 Stu die\ fer (BS-4 yeun)
CHAPTER-3
PEOPLE AND LAND
3.1 INDUS VALLEY CIVILIZATIONS
Introduction
The areas irrigated by the river Indus and its tributaries are called the Indus
Valle). The Indus Valley is one of the world's earliest urban civilizations along
\.\ith its contemporaries, Mesopotamia and Ancient Egypt. This valley was ci\ilized
e\en 5000 years ago and were destroyed around 2500 years ago. It is supposed that
the floods destroyed the civilization of ancient Indus valley. Inhabitants of this
valley developed new techniques in handicraft (copper, bronze, lead. and tin) This
civilization was discovered in 1920 at its two most important sites; Mohenjo-Daro
in Sind and Harappa in Punjab. Mohenjo-Daro is 27 Km away from Lark.ana while
Harappa is 24 Km away from Sahiwal. Both the cities were planned and well built.
The distance between the two cities is 650 Km.
Geographical area of Indus Valley Civilization
The Indus Valley Civilization encompassed most of Pakistan and parts of
northwestern India, Afghanistan and Iran extending from Baluchistan in the west to
Uttar Pradesh in the east, northeastern Afghanistan to the north and Maharashtra to
the south. Recently, Indus sites have been discovered in Pakistan's northwestern
FrontierProvince as well. Other Indus Valley Civilization colonies can be found in
Afghanistan while smaller isolated colonies can be found as far away as
Turkmenistan and Gujarat. Indus valley sites have been found most often on rivers
but also on the ancient seacoast, for example Balakot and on islands, for example
Dholavira.
Mohenjo-Daro
Mohenjo-Daro means the city of the dead. Its an archeological site in the
province of Sind of Pakistan, and was built around 2600 BC, it was one of the
largest settlements of the ancient Indus Valley Civilization and one of the world's
earliest major urban settlements, contemporaneous with the civilizations of ancient
Egypt. Mesopotamia, and Crete. Mohenjo-Daro was abandoned in the t 9th century
BCE and was not redisc overed until 1922. In 1922 a British archae ologist Sir John
Marshal supervised the excavation of the remains in Mohenjo-Daro. Mohenjo-Daro
was a planned and well built city. According to experts' view, it was full of lif· e
5.000 years ago.
69
1/uui 1>aAhr,in \t11u/i', (I,, (8,\ 4 r,·ur.J
llurappa
1 laruppJ i� ,1bo an .uchucolog1cal site m Punjab. northeast Pakistan. about
24 km ,,e�t ol ,.i}mhll It locutcd in 1920. The cxcavauon of the ruins in Harappa
"u� also supe"' 1sed b) British archaeologist Sir John Marshall in 1922. 1he current
, i\lage of Haroppa is 6 lm from the ancient site The ancient Cll) of Hanippa '-"'aS
hea\'il) dnm.iged under the British Government, when bricks from the ruins \\ere
used as trad, ballast in the making of the Lahore -Multan Railroad. In 2005. a
l.'.l,ntro..,crsial amusement park scheme at the site was abandoned when builders
uneanh� man) archaeological artifacts during the early stages of construction
\\Orl \ plea ,ram the prominent Pakistani archaeologist Ahmad Hassan Danni 10
the Mmistf) of Culture resulted in a restoration of the site.
Rulers of the Indus cities
Indus rulers appear to have governed their cities through the control of trade
and religion rather than the military might. There is no evidence of monuments
built to commemorate the rulers and there is no indication of warfare and \\eaponc;.
The rulers carried seals with animal symbols and writing and ornaments of rare
material. The political organization of the cities was probably not a hereduary
monarch}. umerous large buildings and public spaces in the lower to,m seem to
indicate the presence of several distinct elite groups. Local leaders \\Ould h:i, e been
rt:�ponsible for the maintenance of well-planned streets and housing. \\ells and
drainage facilities. They also created an urban society composed of different soc1aJ
levels. Artisans, agricultural laborers, administrative leaders. traders. ritual leaders
and political rulers lived together in walled cities divided mto well-defined
neighborhoods
The square stone seals with writing and animal depictions ,,ere important
S) mbols of power. These distinctive seals appeared ,, ith the rise of the cities and
then disappeared with their decline. Other objects. cg .• d1stincll\e pamted pottery.
elaborate ornaments, metal tools, cubical stone weights also disappeared \\-1th the
loss of the script.
Characteristics of IndusValley Civilization
1. Arts of construction
.. The ruins have exposed the art of architecture and the map of the cities. The
ies
;�� were equipped .with houses, roads, streets, drains. bath rooms, and Markets.
e streets were straight and 33 feet wide. The houses
and other buildings ,...ere
70
Had/ Pak/sta,r Studies for (BS-4 rears)
made of burnt brick.s and mud bricks. During construction of the houses the
hygienic principles were also applied. Special arrangements were made for the light
and ventilation. The bath rooms were a, ai table in the houses. Hummams in bigger
size were built m every localit). The drains were made of burnt bricks and were
covered. The drainage system within and outside the residences was excellent. A
good architectural taste is visible in the buildings. No doubt the ancient Indus
Valley Civilization was quite developed with respect to of architecture.
2. Pots
During unearthing the ruins of Harappa and Mohenjo-Daro, the pots like
cups, kettles. dishes which were mostly made of cla) were found. While other
articles of daily domestic use made of copper and bronze were found.
3. Ornaments
During unearthing the ruins the ornaments like garlands, bangles, rings and
ear rings were discovered. Other things which were made of ivor) and bones of
animals are also found in the ruins.
4. Animals
The pictures of animals and birds I ike fish. buffaloes, horse, lions, elephant
snakes and birds like pegions, parrots were found on the walls of the houses of
Mohenjo-Daro and Harappa. So it becomes clear that the people of ancient valley
knew the animals. The pictures of fish, lion, and pigeon show their liking for
hunting.
S. Weapons
During unearthing the ruins the weapons like sword, lances, axes, knives.
daggers and arrows were found in ancient lndusYalley during unearthing the ruins.
All the weapons were made of copper and bronze, and no weapon was made of
iron. The people of the Indus valley ':ere very ':"'ell �ersed in this art. Their
weapons were comparatively less effective and their an1tude towards battle field
proves their love for peace.
6. Food
Barley, wheat and dates were found during ·unearthing the ruins of
Mohenjo-Daro and Harappa. So it was assumed that fish, wheat, barley and date�
were included in their food and cooked food was used by them.
71
J/1 1dl Paki\ta1t St11di�s fo r ( BS-4 y�arl)
7. To)
pa
During 1hc unearthing both of the cities Mohenjo-Daro and Harap the
t0)S for the children were found. All the tO)S were mostly made of the clay. The
horse and chariot which was made of wood was also found in the ruins . The�e toys
.
show the affectionate attitude of the people of ancient valley for their children.
8. Culth-ation
The people k.new the fonmng of cotton I he pieces of cotton cloth were
found from there. A machine was also discovered which resembled a spinning
wheel.
9. Dress
The people of ancient lndusValley knew the art of \.\-eaving the cotton. So
cotton cloth has been discovered. The idols found there. were wearing cotton
dresses. The women used to wear lehnga and chador as their regular dress. The
fashion and taste ot the people is reflected in seY.ing anJ embroidery.
10. Trade and Commerce
The people of the Indus Civ1hat1on ach1e\ed great accuracy in measuring
length, mass. and time The, were among the fir-;1 to develop a system of uniform
weights and measures. A comparison of available obJects indicates large scale
variation across the Indus temtones
The experts say that the valle)' was not producmg copper, bronze. tin and
silver. Things made of these metals were very much available over there. All such
materials were imported from Central Asia. Afghanistan. Iran. and K.harasan. The}
imported jewellary from other parts of the world. They also travelled to other areas
for business and trade.
1 J. Belief
The people_ of the Anci nt Indus valley worshipped the
� idols made of metals
and stones. Many idols �ere d1s�overed from these two
cities, while many idols of
women were also found m the rums. They also wors .
. . . h, pped s un, moon and stars and
�hey used a particular buildmg for collective
prayers. They buried th eir
· dead bod'1es
in the graves.
12 Gandhara
The Kingdom of Gand
hara roughi I cate d
centered in the reg ion of P ·
e shawar. The area Ywhi� m northem Pakistan and
ch called "Gandhara" \\a::, situated
72
Hadi Pakistan Studie� for (BS-4 year:,)
in the north of Indus valley. The capital of Gandhara was Taxila. Taxila is only 40
Km away from Rawalpindi, on the road of Peshawar. Gandhara was an excellent
centre of culture and civilization. The cultural outlook of Gandhara was superb
about 2500 years ago. Gandhara was recognized for its fine arts. The most
distinguished art was the making of statues of stone. These statues of Mahatma
Gautam Budh arc excellent pieces of fine art, and the tourists get impressed when
they visit the area. Much is written on the mountams in ancient times.
The region of Gandhara v.as conquered by Chandragupta the founder of the
Maryann Empire. It was the first universal .state of Northern India, with its capital
at present-day Patna in Bihar. His grandson Asoka became a Buddhist. Taxila
became the leading centre of Buddhist learning. Successors to Alexander at times
controlled the north western of region present-day Pakistan.
The Gandhara civilization was destroyed by the invaders who came from
central Asia, Iran, Greece and Afghanistan. The invaders brought with them their
own arts. The mixture of foreign and local arts created a splendid blend of new
arts.The day to day life in Ghandhara changed under the influence of foreigners.
The art created under the foreign influence can be seen in the museums. Most of
such pieces of art have been placed m I axilaMuseum.
3.2 MUSLIM ADVENT

Introduction
Before Islam, ignorance ruled everywhere and thick dark clouds of ''shirk''
and innovations darkened the whole world. The Holy Prophet (P.B.U.H) opened a
new and bright chapter in the history and Islam emerged as a great power of the
world. And a day came when Islamic territory spread from Spain in the West to
China in the East. In those days the people of the sub-continent worshiped fire,
idols, snakes, monkeys, stars, trees, sun and moon. Islam first came to India with
Arab traders as early as 7 century A.D to coastal Malabar. Islam arrived in the 11th
th
century to costal Gujarat. Islam arrived in North India in the 12'h century with
turkia invasion. Over the centuries, there has been significant integration of Hindu
and Muslims. It has played a prominent role in India's economic rise and cultural
influence.
Trade relations behveen Arabian and the Indian
Trade relations hnvc existed be tween Arabian an d the Indian sub-co ntinent 'illlci.:
ancient times. I:ven in the pre-Islamic era, Ara b traders used to the visit \1al:.1bar
region which Jinked them with the purt of South l·ast Asia Newly lslamisc<l Arabs
73
Hadl Pakistan Sl1ldles for (BS-' years)
in the
were Islam's first contact with India. Historion Elliot and Dowson write
book, "'The history of India as told by its own history"; the first ship bearing
Muslim travellers was seen on the Indian coast as early as 630 A.O.
Islam through Arab Traders
Islam came into the Sub-continent through Arab traders. The Muslim Arab
traders had been coming to the Indian shores to sell their goods which brought
them in contact with the local people. Whenever the) came, they stayed for months
on the Indian soil for the purpose of trade. They impressed the local people by their
dealings in business and left an ever-lasting impact of their simplicity and piety.
Along side their business dealings they preached the pnnciples of Islam and the
teachings of the Holy Prophet (P.B.U.H).Then a large number of the Native Indians
accepted Islam through their preaching. Hindu Raja Samn of a small state known
as Kirrung Noor accepted Islam, impressed by the preaching of Shaikh haraf bin
Malik. After them RaJa Zamooran of Kalikat also accepted Islam. Later on their
people followed them
Moppilas were the first community to convert to Islam
The commercial contacts of the Muslim traders with the coastal communities of the
sub-continent were growing day by day. The exchange of commod i ties also
provided the opportunity of exchange of views Many people on the westl!rn coast
of the sub-contin\!nt were inspired by the ne,, �.:i ·h and had embraced Islam In
Malabar the Mopp1las may have been t1'1e fir'>t 1.ommumty to convert to Islam as
they were more closely connected \.\ith the Arab:, than others
Mubammad Bin Qasim and Islam in Sub-Continent
The pirates of Deebal looted one of the Arab-ship which was carrying the
precious gifts from the ruler of Cylon to the Caliph and the Govemor of Iraq
(Ba�ra). The Ummayyad Gove�ent c�uld not tolerate the insult and asked Raja
�ah1r of Smdh to take strong action �g�mst these Pirates But Raja Oahi r of ind h
did not show any concern over the mc1dent. He replied that he did not have any
con�rol over the Pirates. The Ummayyad Government sent the Musl
im army to
punish the Pirates of Deebal under the leadership of Muhamm
•
' invas • . ad B m Qas1m m 7 I"..
AD• . Th1s ion rush ed m the conq uest of Sind
. h and Mul tan.As a re:,ult of this
achaev�ment many Muslim scholars made
'. Smdh their pcnnanent home Their
m r� I mtegnty, honesty and polished beha
it-----�-------
f viour attracted many people to the nc"'
re agion und many of Hindu families
. were converted to Islam. The spread t)f l slt1nl
74
in the Indus Valley across the Kirtar range made Sindh, Babul Islam (Gateway to
lslam).
Preaching of Islam through Muslim Saints
The Muslim saints played an important role in the spread of Islam in India.
They travelled throughout the country, making it their goal to educate people about
Islam. They rejected the vices in the Indian society. They presented the pure
practical picture of the teaching of Islam and got huge conversions. The efforts of
Muslim saints like Hazrat Khawaja Muin-ud-Din Chishti, Qutbuddin Bakhtiar
Kaki, Nizarn-ud-din Auliya, Shah Jalal Amir Khusro, Sarkar Pak Sheikh Alla-ul
Haq Pandwi. Ashraf Jahangir Semnani, Sarkar Waris Pak, and Atta Hussain Fani
Chishti cannot be ignored as regard the spread of Islam in the Sub-Continent.
Shaikh Badar-ud-Din Zikria Lal Shahbaz Kalandar, Syed Yousaf-ud-Din and
Shaikh Ali Bin Usman Hajvari were the most prominent saints who converted a
great number of people to Islam in Sindh and Punjab. Sharif-ud-Din who was
called Bulbul Shah Converted Ranjan Der, the ruler of Kashmir to Islam. Shaikh
izarn-ud-Din- Delhvi carried on their mission in Gujrat very successfully.
A famous Muslim Saint Khawaja Mion-ud-Din Chashti came to Rajputana
governed by a Hindu Raja. He played his role in spreading Islam in this area. His
fo llower Bakhtiar Kaki and Harni-ud-Din Nagori also sincerely served the cause of
Islam. Other saints belonging to this Chain were Qutb-ud-Din Baba Faried, Shaikh
Nizam-ul-Aulia and Shaikh Ali Sabar who carried on the mission of their
predecessors. Many of Hindu families were converted to Islam on the hand of these
worthy Muslim saints.
The Formation of Muslim Government in Sub-Continent
lh
In the first half of lO century, Mahmood of Ghazna added the Punjab to
the Ghaznvid Empire and launched seventeen attacks and opened the gate to
preaching of Islam in the Sub-Continent. The most successful invasion came at the
end of the 12'h century by Shahabuddin Muhammad Ghori. This eventually led to
the formation of the Delhi sultanate . In the whole of the Sub-Countinent fi rst
Muslim government was _form�d by Qutub-ud-Din Aibak.He permanently
established Muslim dynasty m India that followed Sulatine and Mughal dynasties.
Thus a strong Muslim community had emerged in India who had its own way of
life, traditions , heroes, history and culture. Islam could not be absorbed in
Hinduism. During this period a great number of Hindus converted to Islam and
Islam by that time had also been introduced in Ladakh and Baltistan.
75
-
Hadi Pakista11 Studie!>fer (BS-4 yellrs)
3.3 MUSLIM RULE IN THE SUB-CONTINENT

The Muslims rule in the sub-continent started with the conquest of Sindh by
Muhammad Bin Qasim in 712 AD. The credit of establishing the first stable and
successful Islamic state in the sub-continent goes to Sultan Shahabuddin
Muhammad Ghori. This eventually led to the formation of the Delhi Sultanate.
In the whole of the sub-continent first Muslim government was formed by
Qutab-ud-Din Aibak. He was the released slave of Shahabuddin Muhammad Ghori.
He Y.(as the founder of the slave dynasty. The slave Dynasty ruled from 1206 to
1290 A.D. Sultan Ghias-ud-Din Balban's period was an era of Muslim revolution
and progress. After the slave dynasty Khilji Dynast) Ruled from 1290 to 1320 A.D.
Equity and justice reached its apex in Khiljis period. Tughlaq Dynasty ruled from
13.20 to 1413 AD The Tughlaq are thought to be the mile-stone in the spread and
progress of Islam. ln this era Islam reached the south of the Sub-continent. Syed
Dynasty (1414 to 1451 A.D) and Lodhi Dynasty (1451 to 1526 A.O) ruled the sub
continent in succession.
Rise of Mughal Empire
In 1526 Zahir-ud-Din Muhammad Babar founded the Mughal Empire wjth
the conquest of Delhi and Agra. After his death his son Naseer-ud-Din Humayun
became the king of the sub-continent. He was Pious but weak ruler. So, sher Shah
Suri snatched the kingdom from him and ruled the sub-continent for a number of
years. He was a good administrator and introduced very significant reforms. The
Grand Trunk Road from Peshawar to Calcutta was constructed during his time.
After his death Humayun regained his lost empire. After him Jalal-ud-Din Akbar
(1556 to 1605), Noorudin Jahangir, (1605 to 1627) Shah Jahan (1628 to 1658) and
Aurangz eb Alamgir (1659 to 1707) ruled over the sub-continent in succession.
Fall of Mugbals
After the death of Aurangzeb his successors were weak and had no interest
in the affairs of the government. _The Muslims of the sub-continent started
disintegration.
Governor after governor was breaking allegiance to the crown of Delhi. Hindu
Rajas, Particularly Marhattas, were the bitterest enemies of the Mulsim rulers.
Taking advantage of the weakness of the Mughal emperors, the Marhattas
strengthened in Decean and reached Delhi. They plundered Delhi several time. In
Punjab, the Sikhs fortified and devastated its peace. The political supremacy began
to sJip away from the hands of the Mughal emperors and the Mughal Empire
started to decline. In those circumstances the British and the French Traders were
looking for a chance to capture the country by taking part in the politics.
76
3.4 RISE OF BRITISH RULE AND AFTER AFFECTS

Advent of European Nation
Vasco De Gama a Portuguese national was the first person from Europ to
find a sea-rout to Ind-Pak Sub-Continent. In 1498 he reached India at the Indian
port of calicut. European nations such as Portugal, Holland, British and France also
reached there and set up their. own trading centres which led to trade and political
jealousies and clashes became to occur.
The first British Trade centre was established in 1608 A.D at Surat near
Bombay. An English Ambassador Sir Thomas Row got many trade conceassions
from the Mughal )(ing Jehangir in 1612 and established a permanent factory at
Surat in 1613. Big and small trade centres were opened by them at different places.
Most surprisingly, the Mughal Kings allowed the British to have their own
currency, build forts and Keep a smaJI army for protection. King Aurang zeb gave
British permission to build the city of Calcutta and also Fort William.
In the early years of the 18 th century the East India company was set up to
look after Britisfi trade activities in the Sub-continent. This company not only did
trade but also indulged in local political affairs. In the middle of the eighteenth
century the French and the British were fighting against each other for supremacy.
The first open clash occurred at Karanatak in which the French were defeated. This
opened the way for the British to grab territories and establish themselves as rulers.
Expansion of British Raj

Siraj-ud-Daula
Ali Verdi was the governor Qf Bengal when the Mughal Empire was falling
apart. He declared independence and broke his allegiance to the crown of Dehli.
After the death of Ali Vardi Khan, his maternal grandson Sirajud Daula asseended
the throne of Bengal in 1756. Ali Vardi, before he died had advised Sirajuddaula
not to allow the British to keep army or build forts otherwise Bengal would be lost.
The British attitude to Sirajuddoula was very hostile. They started
conspiracies agajnst him. They made the fort of Calcult ta a stronghold against the
wishes of the Nawab. Thus Sirajuddaula attacked the factory of Qasim bazaar and
occupied it. He also attacked Font William, defeated the British but some how did
not occupy the fort. The defects at Qasim Bazar and Calcutta produced great
commotion in the British Madaras co uncil. Army and naval units were set to
Ben gal under the command of Watson and Clive. They conspi;ed with Nawa b
chand, the Dewan of Dhaka and captured the Fort of Damdam and loote d lhe
property of the people of Hoogli. Nawab Sirajuddaula contacted the Mughal king
77
-
ol Delhi. thl! l'rcnch aml marhnttus. but no one agreed to come to his nid. In 1757
he mo,ed his ,mm to the battlefield of plm,se} I k had un early success but thtn
the treachcr. nnd ;hamcful ta1thh!ssness of Mir Jafar turned to u1blcs on the Na ....11b
�tir Jafor m�t Clhe and requested the British general to help him ascend the throrn:.
Ch'-'e agreed and ad, ised tum to make a dash for Mursh1dabad and. capture the
treasUf) ln the meantime sirajuddaula had also reached there When he learnt about
his arm)· s defeat and the treachery of Mir Jafar he wanted to run away but \.l.'aS
caught and killed b) the son of Mir Jafar.
Hyder Ali
Hyder Alt became the ruler of Mysore in 1761. He conqured the adjoining
territories and turned Mysore into a formidable kingdom. This caused great aJarm
m the minds of Marhattas, the Nizam of Hyderabad and the British. So they all
made a pact against Hyder Ali. In 1767 they attad.ed Mysore in the first lime But
Hyder Ali was an equal match for all the three. Marhattas were bnbed and the
Nizam was promised the territory of Karantak. With this, they left the Briush aJone
The British became Panicky and ran away from there. Hyder Ali follov,ed up his
conquest and reached Madras. A treaty was signed in 1769 and the British presuge
received a great set-back.
The second battle of Maysore was started in 1780. \\'hen the Bnt1sh
conspired with Marhattas and the Nizam, Hyder Ali sent his son to crush them
Tipu conquered the Fort of Tanjore and defeated the british army and made man�
prisoners. On the other side, Hyder Ali was inflicting crushing defeats on the
British and forced colonel Bailey to lay dov,m arms. On his way to Arakot Hyder
Ah fell ill and died. If he had lived a few more years. the histon of India would
have been written differently.
Tipu Sultan
After the death of Hyder Ali, his talented and hon-hearted son fateh Ali
Tipu ascended the throne of Mysore in 1782. Before dying. Hyder Ali advised his
son not to rest until the British had been hunted out of India. The war was still on
v.hen Tipu became the Sultan. He continued the war and carried on a ceaseless
campaign agai�t the B :itis� for libe:8tion of the counll). In 1790 he fought the
war 0� J_vtysore m the thlrd tn1;1e and m the fo� time in 1799 against Briti sh But
the Bnttsh .used !he n:ie8-? tactics of conspiracies and intrigues. By bribing hea'-'il)
they succeeded m wmrung over traitors like t,..lir Sadiq. Mir Ghulam Nabi and
78
Diwan Purnia. After some time the British and Tipu made a treaty by which they
returned each other's territories and the Prisoners of war were released.
The Marhattas and the Nizam were agafo won over by Lord Comawalis
who promised them great rewards for traitorship. The sultan fought against them
and then entrenched himself in the fort of Sarangapatarn. Lord Wallesley sponsored
an attack on sarangapatam with a big army. The Sultan fought with great valour but
once more his own noblemen betrayed him. Mir Sadiq and Purnia helped the
British Geheral and were successful in demolishing the wall of the fort. The sultan
had no option but to come out and give battle to the enemy. The sultan fought
valiantly. His motto was "It is bener to live for a day like a lion than to exist for
hundred year like a jackal.'. Unfortunately the Sultan ree;eived a bullet in the head
and died. When the English commander heard of the Sultan's death, he cried with
joy "Today India is our".
Sultan Tipu·s death sounded the death-Knell of Muslim rule in India. There
was now no one to unite the Muslim rulers and no one to head them. They were
eliminated one b) one. But the fire kindled by Tipu and others kept smoldering in
the hearts of Muslims and eventually came to the surface in the form of the war of
independence in 1857.
3.5 THE WAR·OF INDEPENDENCE (1857)

The war of independence of 1857 is the outstanding event in the history of
the sub-continent. The British historians called it a Mutin but this is not justified.
Because it was regular movement to oust the British from the sub-continent.
Causes of the war of 1857
The causes of the war are as under:
I. The people of the sub-continent came to the painful conclusion that the
Europeans were no true friends of theirs objective was to acquire and
consolidate political domination over whole of India. They annexed eight
states within eight years, like Sitara in 1848, Jaitpur and Sambhalpur in
1849, Bhaght in 1850, Udaipur in 1852, Jansi in I 853 and Nagpur in 1854.
In those circumstances the Las king Bahadur shah Zafar was no more than a
glorified pensioner of the company. Dalhousies refusal to continue the
pensioner to Nana Sahab, the adopted son of the ex-Pcshawa Baji Rao II
was disliked by the Hindus. His proposal to remove the Mughal Emperor
Bahadur Shah Zafar fr om the palace in Delhi created suspicion among the
Muslims. This was considered to be direct interference in the political rights
of the people of the sub-continent.
79
lladl l',dl\ti11t .�tudtt"I jiu I H\ '•' mnJ
�I dr 1 • and ""''h &he F 01

2• Ii ion in had :.c:tup ,dm(,ls in Ben ,,,I ,nd _ --'
. .,ruse. ti lfl I the Brill h were dctcrmhKU
t
,,c-.tcm cduc-,\11,,n. 1 gcncr., 1 lc,1r
·
_iron pant 01 prolfi1
com �·rt thc: pcopk of the -.uh-con�in_cnt. �u: u
1 s. .
uc,clnped ,1g,1inst the 1cal ol the Christian m1s�1on11� �
,. A kgi,lati,ln wus introduced to stop tht.: practi ce ol Sut�1 b} ! lutd U5 nd lO
r rencc rn
tntcrac
alto" "indll\\� to rcm3JT). Th,s ""as cons,dert.:d to he d1rcc1
thc so<: io-rchg 1 ous practices of the people of the sub-cont�ncnl. .
4. In 1806 \lardras government ga,e the orders to the native oldtcr • -��
on their moustache and beards, exchange their old turbans for nc,, ones wN
10 ab ·u11n from putting sectanan marks on their forhcads. It v. so
considered 10 be direct interference m socio-relig1ous practice o f the people
of the sub-continent.
1
5 On 10 " of may, 1857 the immediate cause of the war was the refusal b)
local troops-first at Merut, then elsewhere, to use greased canridge�. The
cartridges for the new Enfield rifle were smeared with CO\\ and pigs fat.
unclear to both Hindus and Muslims. The p rade was d1smbscd and the
eight) ft, e (85) troops were arrested, brought to speed.> coun m:mial :ind
sentenced to \'arious terms of imprisonment. This e, ent led to open ". r.
[\-cnt of the War

I he \\ar of rndcpendcncc spread from Merut to Ddh 1 . 1 he troop�
proclaimed that Bahadur Shah /afar was the Emperor ol the \\ hole of lndida ::md
they pledged ohcd1cncc. I he troops also compellt.:<l IHm to lead t.hi: trc�dom
Jightt:r!>. r he Mughal rmpcror Bahadur Shuh /ufar took. �hapc the pall.cm of nc.:,,
regime rapidly I Jc issued his own coin and uppomtcd his sons to kc.:� po�ts. He
appointed Mirta Lahccruddin as a commander-in-chief. \\lulc other princes were
appointed U!) colonels of the regiments A military court ,,.u;
also setup. lhc
freedom fighter.., fought with great coumge but ,,ere unable to rest':>l against the
latest \\capons of the British forces <;o, the Bnush forces soon °'
crpo,, ered the
freedom fighters.
British forces attacked Delhi with great preparation and broke the
suITOunding \\1111 of the Cit) and enten!d. The Mughal Emperor Bahadur Shah Zafar
left the fort and took refuge in Humavun's tomb British forces arrested him along
"ith queen Zinat Mahal Begum and � on Mirza Jaulan Bakht and sent to Rangoon.
th
where he did on 11 November 1862.
After the war�f independence the power of East India Company came to al1
l
end and transferred to the crown. The Board of Directors and the Board of contr0
80
j
Hut/i Paki�lllll Studie\ for (BS-4 l'eUr.\J
\\3S abolished in 1858. and their place \-.Js taken h) the s�'cretary of state in the
Indian council. The l1l)\ emor C,em:ral rccel\·e<l the title of --vicerO)". In 1858 the
Queen Victoria proclaimed that the British government would not annex the Indian
state.
Effect of the war of 1857

When the war of independence began. both the Hindus and Muslims
equall) participated in it. But the Hindus com inccd 1he go\errunent that 1hey were
not a part) against the British government in the war. The British Government was
abo more afraid of Muslims than the Hindus. So, the Muslims were held
responsible for the so called ··mutiny". The) were made the target by the revengeful
British soldiers. The life of Muslims became miserable. Its details are as under:
1. The Muslims were killed mercilessly and their properties were confiscated.
2. The Muslims were expelled from the government jobs and they were
deprived of 1heir Jagirs.
3. The doors or government educational institutions were almost closed for
tbem.
4. The Muslims were crashed sociall) and economicall).
5. The Muslims were made a do"n trodden and suppressed race.
ome authors have portrayed the gloomy picture of the plight of Muslims in the
following \.\Ords:
Lord Roberts: ··J passed through the Chandni Cho\.\.k Delhi. There were heaps of
dead bodies lying everywhere."
W.W. Hunter: ··The properties of Mu::,lims were distributed among the Hinuds and
the Sikhs' and to be a Muslim was considered a crime."
Bosworth Smith: "The British soldiers were like blood hounds. They entered one
house after the other m1d looted the belongings of the Muslims".
ir Sved Ahmed Khan: ··No devil from sky has descended on eanh before
ransadking the house of a Muslim."
3.6 DECLINE OF MUSLIM RULE JN THE SUB-CONTINENT

The reasons for downfall of Muslims in the ub-continent are as under:
I. Incapable and weak Successors
After the death of Aurangzeb Alamgir in 1707. his incapable and weak
successors failed to contr ol the vast empire. The governors of Bengal, Decan and
Odh formed their independent states; consequent I). it weekend the central
government and stimul ated a reduction in the income, under these circumstances, it
81
Had/ Pakistan St11diesfor (BS-4 years)
became difficult for the Mughal emperor to keep a huge army for the defense
purposes.
2. Detachment from Religion (Islam)
The Muslims invaded sub-continent with Islamic values as their asset.
blamic society was devoid of every kind of evil. hut gradually the Muslims started
turning away from the Islamic pi·inciples and un-lslamic wa) s popularized. which
became one of the reasons of Muslim downfall.
3. Foreign Attaches
In 1739, Nadir Shah attacked on sub-continent ddeating the Mughal
emperor Muhammad Shah Rangeela m Kamal. l le carried out a massacre in Delhi.
After Nadir Shah, Ahmad Shah Abdali established an independent government in
Afghanistan. He made several attacks on sub-continent. destroying the remaining
good will of the Mughal Empire.
4. Battles for Succession
There was no definite law for succession in the Islamic government. When
a king expired. his sons fought for succession. This tug of war weakened the
Islamic government, and mctny princes, nobles and experienced commanders lost
their lives in doing so.
5. Lack of knowledge of new Jm·entions
In the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. several revolutions took place
in all filled of education, and with the help of the latest knowledge many problems
were solved. New inventions revolutionized the war str-1.: .,., .l:> in the west. They
started using guns and tanks, but the Muslims paid no head lO the changing trends
and failed to cater to the needs of time.
6. Lack of the spirit of Jihad
One of the reasons of the downfall of the Muslim in the sub-continent was
the lack of the spirit of Jihad. Muslims could only establish their rule because of
this spirit. The spirit of Jihad that was the real source of strength to the Muslims
rule disappeared gradually.
7. Ease-lovingness and Laziness
The Muslims rulers became ease-loving and lazy. This laziness and ease
loving attitude destroyed the abilities of the armed personnel also.
8. Nobles scekecl their own interest
The nobles were divided into Irani and Torani groups. They were s elfish
and seeked their interests. II was also one of the reasons of the Muslim downfall.
82
Jladl Pokista,r Studies for (BS-4 years)
9. Conspiracie of Hindu
The Mughal rulers Akbar left no stone unturned to please the I lindus I le
even sabotaged the interests of Muslims in trying to do so I le appointed them on
high posts. fhese steps encouraged Hindus so much. so lllJt the) started conspiring
against the Muslim::,
10. Absence of Naval Force
During the era of Mughal emperor. European rafts and ships v.ere afloat the
oceans all o, er the v.orld. The Mughal emperors paid no attention 10 the need ot
aval defense. Due to absence of aval forces. the Portugu1:se. the British and the
rrench substantiated on the coastal areas.
I I. The rise of Marhattas and Sikhs
Taking ad, antage of the v.eakness of the Mughal emperors. the \t1arhattas
strengthened in Deccan and reached Delhi. They plundered Delhi several times. In
Punjab. the ikhs fortitied and devastated its peace.
12. Moral deterioration
The Muslim rulers and nobles indulged in merry-making and became
invalid. The rulers lost these virtues and strength of characters. ""hich used to be a
\ ital part of the lives of the earlier Muslims rulers. Anarch). corruption and bribe!")
became common places and resulted in deterioration of Moral values in this state.
13. Conspiracies in the court
Due to the incapable successors of Aurang,eb. the court became a hub of all
conspiracies. Ministers and nobles appointed themselves on the important ranf..s.
They got so involved in establishing their monopoly that the management of the
state was sabotaged.
U. The arrival of the British
The British came to the sub-continent with the purpose of trade. Finding the
weak political system of here, they defeated Na-.\ab iraj-ud-daulla in the battle of
Plassi in 1757. Later, they got control uver the ,..,hole sub-continent after war of
independent in 1857
3.7 GEO-STRATEGJC IMPORTANCE OF PAKISTAN
Background
th
Pakistan was created on 14 August 1947. The area of Pakistan is 7, 96,096
square kilometers, and 0.67% of the total area of the v.orld. About 58% of the total
land of Pakistan consists of mountains and plateaus, v.,here as about 42% are plains
and deserts. According to censes of 1998 total population of Pakistan was I 4Crores
23 Lac 80 thousands. But now according to the estimate of 2009-20 I 0, the
83
/Judi Pukist<m Stu die�fiir (BS-4 rean)
population of Pak i stan 1s round 17 Crorcs 71 Lac (177.1 n� i� lion!. ltc; 98 ° 0 oftl� l'
ltital populutinn b \11uslim v.hilc ::! 0 o Christian. 1 lindus. Pans1s. Sikh and Ahmadis
l:IL
Location of Pakistan
l\ t• ,,
Pakistan is lm:ated between 23½' to 37 north latitudes anc.1-61 to 77 La,t

�
longitude.
Ceo-Strategic Position.
Pakistan is surrounded by various countries. Its detail is as follows.
In East
India is in the East of Pakistan. The boundar) between India and Pakistan is
1650 k.m. Long.
In North
China is in the North of Pakistan. The boundary between china and Pakistan
is 600 k.m. long. It is called silk rout or Korakaram highway.
lo West
Afghanistan is in the West of Pakistan, Pakistan has the longest boundary,
with Afghanistan which is 2252 k.m long. It is called deorand line. It was made in
I 893.
In South West
Iran is in the South West of Pakistan. The boundary between Iran and
Pakistan is 805 km. long.
Geo Strategic Importance
Geo strategic means the importance of a country or a region by virtue of its
geographical location. The Geo-Strategic importance of Pakistan is unique because
of being a close neighbor to Middle East, having a common border with China.
India, Iran �fghanistan and less than one hundred kilometer distance from Central
Asian state of Uzbekistan. Geo-Strategic importance of Pakistan according to his
political and economical position is very important in all over the world. Its detail
is as follows:
84
Ilad/ PuJ.ista11 Stutlie., for (BS-4 re11rs)
1. Heart of the Islamic World

Pakistan is situated in the centre or the Islamic countries from Indonesia to
Morocco. If we look at the map of Muslims Countnes. Pakistan occupies a central
location. foward� West or Iran. China extends to I orth Africa. Thus it can ac11vel)
participate in the activities of Muslim World-economic deveJopment. transport of
resources. So. Pakistan is also called the hl!art or Islamic world.
2. Fort of the Islamic World
In the region. Pakistan is the only Muslim country having nuclear c<1pabilit)
v,hich has great inlluence on the political. socia-economic activities in the n:g1un
and the maintenance of status quo in the region. Pakistan has an Ordnance factor)
at Wah where weapons are prepared. Owing to this. all the lslumic world agrt:cd
that Pakistan is a fort of the lslamic world.
3. Gateway to Central Asia
Pakistan is siuated at the junction of South Asi:.t. West Asia and central
Asia. It is locateJ very close to the oil rich Midt!le Eastern Countries. l he belt
starts from Iran and extends to Saudi Arabia. Thus Pakistan c;un influence shipment
of oil. Iran is struggling to export its surplus gas and oil to Eastern Countries:
Qatar, Pakistan and Turkmenistan pipeline project highlights the position. China
finds way to Indian Ocean and Arabian Sea through Karal-.oram highv.a). Because
its own port is 4500 k.m away from sinkiang but Ciawader is 2500 k.m. away. Land
locked Afghanjstan now at the phase of reconstruction, finds its wa) through
Pakistan. Gawader Port with its deep waters attracts the trade ships of China.
central Asian and South East Asian Countries.
4. Natural Resources
Pakistan has the best natural resources of the world. Lack of technology.
fragile infrastructure and limited financial resources arc the main hurdles in the way
to explore and utilize these resources
5. Political Importance
Pakistan is located at the junction of great powers. In its neighbors. one
world power Russia and the other emergii:ig power China lies. Any alliance among
worl d powers enhances its significance. Security and business are two main US
interests in the region. Apart from this US interests in the region to contain the
growing China, nuclear Iran, terrorist Afghanistan and benefit from the market of
India. In all these issues, Pakistan is directly or indirectly involved especially after
85
Hadi Pakistan Studit'.\ for (BS-4 ycun) zz...
al- Qaeda operations. The American thin!-.. tanb have repealt!dly accepted that \\ar
against terror could never be \\On without the hdp of Pakistan.
6. Defence Importance
The border of three sides of Pakistan i.e. North, West and South are secured
natural I)'. because. in the North of Pakistan the mountain Ranges like Himalya and
I lindu Kush are located ' while in the West and South West the Muslim countries of
ct:ntral Asia. like Afghanistan, Kazakhstan, Uzbekistan. Turkmenistan. Tajikistan.
Kyrgyzstan anJ Persian Gui�- countries like Iran. Kuwait. Iraq. Saudi Arabia. Qatar.
Bahrain. Oman. l 'nited Arab Emirates etc are located. All the Muslim countries
r�,ssc,s the \\eat1h uf oil. Pakistan has cordial relations with these countries
\\'herea� in the south of Pakbtan an Arabian Sea is locutcd. In short the boarder of
three sides or Pakistan is protected by Northern Mountains. Muslim countries and
Arabian Sea against the aggressors.
7. Importance of Arabian Sea
Pakistan is situated at the bank of the Arabian Sea that merges into the
Indian Ocean. Thus it is the gateway for Central Asian states to reach the Indian
Ocean. World 75% trad<.! passes through Arabian Sea and Pakistan enjoys the
privilege of being a central point in that trade route having 700 km of coastal line
anci deep Sea Port of Gawader. There is no doubt that Pakistan is situated in a very
important geographic location.
3.8 PHYSICAL FEATURES OF PAKISTAN
The study of physical map of Pakistan shows that Pakistan has a number of
Peculair fe·atures. The major part of our country consist of fertile plain that is
drained by the river Indus and its Tributaries. It has lofty mountain on the north and
west and few deserts areas also, thus Pakistan can be divided into the following
regions.
1. North Eastern Mountain Ranges.
2. North WesternMountain Ranges.
3. WesternMountain Ranges.
4. Indus Plain
5. Plateaus
6. Deserts
86
lladi Paki!;ta11 St11die\ for (BS-4 years)
I. North Eastern Mountain Ranges

The mountain ranges are located in the north of Pa"1stat1. lh�-,e mountain
ranges make the orthern boarders of Pakistan secured to n great c.,tent. I hey stop
tht! winds coming from the Arabian Sea and BcngalGuJr causing sno ..., -foll am.I
rain. Their Peeks are covered with snow throughout the year. The snow ,.., a sourer
or supplying our rivers with water all round the year. Among these ph-1c1;:-.. :\ lurrcc.
Ayubia. Nathiagali. Kaghan, Lipa valley, Skardu. Sv\al Vullcy. Kalam. Nt!clam
Valley. Bagh. Hunza. Chitral, Chilas and Gilgit are famous. �here people go for
tourism. The Northern mountain ranges are given as follows.
Sub- Himalayan Range or Siwalik Hills
This Mountain range is in the east of the Rive::r Indus and its height is almost
900 meters. 1t is the southern branch of Himalaya which s·-·etches from east to
west. It is also called Siwalrk Mountain Range. Pabbi Hills arc its famous hills
which are situated in the south of Hazara and Murree. Their western range is in
Pakistan whereas the major part of them is in India.
The Lesser Himalayan Range
The Lesser Himalayan Range lies north of the Sub-HimalayanRange or
iwalikRange. This range stretches from east to west. Pir PanjaJ is the highest
mountain range here. Murree, Ayubia and Nathiagali are the famous resort places
of this range.
The Greater Himalayan Range
lt is one of the highest mountain ranges in the world. There average height
is 650 meters. It is covered with snow throughout the y�ar. The b�auti ful , alley of
Kashmir is located between the Pir Panjal range and The Greater Himalayan
Range. The glaciers are found in this region which melts to fom1 rivers. Nanga
Parbat is the highest peak of this range. 8 I 26 meters high.
Karakoram Range
Karakoram Range stretches from west to east in Kashmir and Gilgit along
with the borders of China. The average height of this range is 7000 meters. It is in
the north of Himalayas. The second highest peak in the world is locatl.!d in this
range. It is called Mt. Godwin Austin or K-2. It re�chts to a_ height of 8611 metres.
Shahrah-e-Resham. whic h is also known as Karakoram Highway passes through
this range and leads to China via Khunjerab pass.
87
'l lw llindukhu,Mounuain11
I he I ltn<lukush Mountain 1s located in the No11h WesL of Pakistan. Most of
1h1..· rnm11llmns 111' tlrn, rungi.: arc in Afghanistan. I he highesL peak of this range is
I 11-ch Mu. \\h11.h 7<>90 mews high.
l\1ountains of�" at and ( hitral
'-)m.tll mountain rnng.cs stretch to the south of the Hindukush range. These
mountain� arc 1000 to 5000 high. Between these mountains. there is the Lowari
Puss which connects C'hllral with Peshawar. lt remains closed in the winter due to
snow-fall. A tunnt.!1 named Lowari Tunnel is constructed here. Through this tunnel.
traffic bct\\ccn Chitral and Peshawar runs throughout the year. The Swat River. the
Panjkora River (KunarRivcr) and the Chitral River flow between these mountain
ranges.
2. Northwestern Mountain Ranges
Salt Range
I his mountain range is located, in the south of Pothwar Plateau. between River
Jhclum and Jndus River. Sakesar is the bc.::autiful place in this range. Deposits of
salt, gypsum and coal are found in this range. 1 he average height of the range is
700 metes, Sakesari 1500 meters high, is the beautiful place in this range
KallarKaharLakc is also situated in this region.
The Sualiman Mountain Range
lhc Sulaiman Mountain Range, stretches from north to south, it starts from
south of Riwr Gomal and reaches to the centre of Pakistan. Ta\...ht-e-Sulaiman is
the highest pi.!ak. of the SulaimanRange whose height is 3443 feet.
KirtharMounhtins
To the South of Sulaiman Mountains and to the west of lndusRiver
strctchi.!s the range of Kirthar Mouuntains. lt is located to the west of the Lower
Indus Plain. It consists of low high and barren mountains. I lubRi ver and
l.yariRivcr now from Kirthar towards the Arabian Sea.
3. WesternMountain Ranges
Koh-e-SufaidRange
Koh-c-Sufuid stretches from cast to west in the south of Ri\'cr Kabul
Khyber Pass. which is a historic passage between Pakistan and Afghanistan. li es Ill
�
the north of the Koh-c-Sufaid. River Kurram flows in the south of Koh-e-Sufaid. It
88
Hadi Pakistan Studie\for (BS-4 years)
average height i.., 3600 meter. fhe highest peak of this range is Sikaram whose
height is 4 761 ml!ters.
Waziristan Hill�
This mountain range stretches in the south of River Kurram along the Pak
Afghan border from north to South. fochiPass and GomalPass are situated in these
hiUs. These hills rise to I 0, 000 feet.
Toba Kakar Mountain Range
Toba Khakar Mountain Range is situated along the Afghan border to the
South of Wazirisan Hills. It extends from north-east towards south west till it ends
in the north of Quena.
Cbagi Hills and Ras Koh Hills
To the west of Pakistan, along the Afghan border, there lie the Chaghi Hills. Ras
Koh Hills are situated in the south of the Chaghi Hills. Pakistan tested atomic
bombs on 28th May, 1998 in Chaghi Hills.
Saihan Hills
To the South of Ras Kho, there are Saihan Hills m the province of
Baluchistan.
Central Makran Hills
These hjlls are situated in Balochistan. The winter season here is extremely
cold whereas the summers are mild.
4. Indus Plain
A vast, less steepy and comparative!) even surface of land is called a plain.
We can divide the plains of Pakistan into two parts. (i) Upper Indus Plain (ii)
Lower Indus Plain
Upper Indus Plain
The upper Indus plan starts from the south of the plateau and Himalayas and
reaches Mithan Kot in the Province of Punjab. Its southern edge touches Suleman
Hills. The soil of this plain is very fertile that is why all kind so crops are cultivated
here. Even before the establishment of Pakistan, the United Punjab was famous for
its yield of wheat. The world remembered it as the Home of Grain. So a network of
canal helps to irrigate the plain.
Lower Indus Plain
From Mithan Kot to Arabian Sea. the Plain region is called the Lower Indus
Plain. To the South-\\f est of this plain lies the Kirthar range whereas the Thar
Desert is located to the east of this plain. Like the upper Indus Plain. the Lower
Indus plain is also very fertile and it is irrigated by the waters of the rhcrs Indus.
89
Hudi Paki.\tan Studies/or (BS-4 years)
Because of the soil being so fertile, all kinds of crops are cultivated here. It is well
k.nown for early season vegetables and fruits. Here, the river flows slowly and is
divided into many branches, forming the shape of delta, before it falls into the sea.
That is v. h ) this area is called ··Daltaie".
5. Plateaus
An area which is of a lower height than a mountajn and whose surface is
not flat is called plateau. In Pakistan the plateau regions have been divided into the
pothohar plateau and Balochistan Plateau.
Potohar Plateau
Potohar plateau is from 300 meters to 600 meters high above sea level. It is
in the middle of River Jhelurn and IndusR.iver. The Potohar Plateau is rich in
minerals. Huge reserves of Gypsum, Coal and mineral Oil are found in it. River
Sawan is an important one of this area. It makes its valley here. This is known as
swan valley. The districts of Rawalpindi, Jhelum, Attock and Chakwal are in this
Plateau. There are hills in some parts. Cultivation is dependent solely on rain. Its
surface is mostly broken.
Baiochistan Plateau
Balochistan Plateau is located in the west of SulaimanRange and
KirtharRange. It is at the most 900 meters above sea level. It is uneven and barren.
It receives very low rain fall so, this area has desert lil-.e characteristics, and the
desert area is called Kharan. To the north of this 1•: .. here are mountain ranges
l1f Chaghi and Toba Kabar. In the west 0f the prov111ce of Balochistan are the
saltwater lakes. among them the most popular and the largest one is the Hamoon-e
Mashkhel Lake.
6. Deserts
An area where it rains less than 10 inches annually is called a desert region.
This area is not favourable for cultivation. Due to very little rainfall, desert
vegetation is found here. There is a vast desert in the south eastern part of Pakistna.
This desert is called ·'Cholistan" or Ruhee in Bahawalpur, whereas in Sindh it is
called "Thar." The Thal desert is situated between the River Jhelum and the River
Indus. Most of the area is unpopulated. Another desert area of Pakistan lies in
northwest of the province of Balochistan and is called KharanaDesert.
==------•-------------� 90
Had/ Pakist"" Studies for (BS-4 years)
EXERCISE-3
Q. l: Encircle the correct options.
I. Muhammad bin Qasim came in Sindh on
(a)711 Ad (b) 712 Ad (c) 713 Ad (d) 714 Ad
2. --------------Formed the first Muslim government in the whole of the sub
continent.
(a)Muhammad-bin- Qasim (p) Qutub-ud-Din Aibak
(c) Shahabuddin Ohouri (d) Mahmood Gaznavi
3. ---------------- was the last king of sub-continent.
(a)Zaheer-ud-Din Babar (b) Akbar
(c)Jahangeer (d)Bahadur Shah Zafar
4. -.::-==-==:.:.::----- is located in the north of Pakistan.
�) China> (b)India (c) Iran (d)Afghanistan
5. ----------------- is located in the South of Pakistan.
(a)Red Sea (b)Bay of Bengal (c} Arb1anS�a (d) Persian Gulf
6. The Boundary between Pakistan and India 1s ----------------
l@_ 1620 Km (b)1650 Km (c) 1670 KM (d) 1690 KM
S. Karakoram Highway 1s located between Pakistan and --------------
(a)China {b) India (c)Afghamstan (d) Iran
6. The Indus civilization 1s ------------ old.
(a)5000 years (b)4000 years (c) 3000 years (d) 2000 years
7. The ruins of Harrapa are situated in district -------------
(a)Lahore (b) Sahiwal (c)Okara (d) Multan
8. Pakistan tested atomic bombs on 281h May m
(a)1996 (b)I997 (c)l998 (d)1999
9. The boundary between China and Pakistan 1s.
(a)500 k.m (b)600 k.m (c) 700 k.m (d) 800 l.m
IO. The boundary between Iran and Pakistan 1s.
(a)650 k.m (b)700 k.m (c)805 k.m (d) 900 i...m
11. Pakista n has the longest bounda ry, with:
(a)India (b) China (c)Afghamstan (d) Iran
12. Taxila is only 40 k.m away from;
(a)Rawalpindi (b)Murry (c) Pishawar (d) Swat
13. The current village of Harappa is:
(a) 6 k.m (b) 7 k.m (c)8 k.m (d) 9 k.m
14. The ancient Indus Valley civilizations were destroyed around.
(a)2500 year ago (b) 2600 year ago {c)2700 }Car ago (d)2800 }Car ag,1
91
Hadi Pakistan Studie\for (8S--4 years)
Q.2: Tick the True and False. . . .

I Mubammad Bin Qasim defeated Raja Dah1r m Smd. True/False
.., Mehmood Ghaznavi was the King of Sub-Continent. True I F,tlse
3 Orangaib wac; the last Kmg of Sub-Continent. True I False
4 Independence war v.as fought m 1857 True I False
5. Arabian Sea 1s located in the East of Pakistan. True I False
6 The totaJ area of Pakistan is 7, 96,096 sq Kilometers. True/ False
7. The border of three side of Pakistan i.e. North, West and south are secured
naturally True/ False
8. The war against terror could never be won '-"ith out the help ofPakistan.
True I False
9. Iran is the south west of Pakistan. True/ False
10. China is m the Last of Pakistan. True/ False
11. Pakistan has the k,ngest boundary with Afghanistan. True/ False
12. The Capital ofGandhara was Taxila. True/False
13. The people of the ancient Indus Valley worshipped the idols. True/ False
14. The people of the ancient Indus Valley buried their dead bodies in the graves.
True/ False
15. Mohenjo-Daro means the city of the dead. frue/ False
Q.3: Fill in the Blanks

I. How old is the Indus valley civilization ______________
2. The area of Pakistan is -:--:-:----:-=----:-:---- ---
-
3. The boundary between India and Pakistan is __ __________
----- --
4. How many long the boundliI) of Pakistan and Afghanistan-------
5. Muhammad Bin Qasim came in Sindh on -------------
6. Who defeated Raja Dahir in Sindh --=----------------
8 The independence war in sub-continentwas fought in -----,------=--=·
7. fn the whole of the subcontinent, first Muslim government was fo rmed by
9 In V:hich _mo_untain range Pakistan made the nuclear tests on 2s 1h May 1998 .
?_
-------------- --
I 0. Pakistan 1s situated in the centre of
11. The Ruins of I larrapa are situated in District
12. ·me_ dista�ce bet ween llarrapa and Mohcnjo-daro is_·_ _
_
13 P�1stc111 1s tha only muslim count!) of the Islamic world
_ "l11ch ha, l!
14. China has own port which is --------- away from Smking
1'; Gawadcr is----------- away from China. --
----
16. I ltc bordc, or At'i:;hnnistan is c,1llcci �---
------·
Hatli Pakistan Studies for (BS-4 ••eurs)
ANSWERS (�1id Term)

l.(b) 2.(b) 3.(d) 4 .{a) 5.(c) 6.(a) 7.(a) 8.(b) 9.(c) 10.(b) 11.(c) 12 .(c) 13.(a) 14.(a)
15.(a)
Q No.2: Tick Mark the correct choice.
l.(T) 2. (F) 3. (F) 4.(T) 5.(F) 6.{T) 7. (T) 8. (T) 9. (T) I 0. (F) 11 (T) 12.( I ) 1 J.(T)
I4.(T) 15.(T)
(I). 500 years (2). 7. 96.096 sq. Km. (3). 1650 Km (4).2252 Km. (5). 712 (6).
Muhammad Bin Qasim (7). Qutab-ud-din Aib� (8). 1857 (9). Chaghi hills (] 0)
lslmic world (11 ). Sahiwal (12) 650 k.m (13). Atomic Reactor (14). 4500 k.m (15)
2500 k.m (16). Deorand line
SHORT QUESTIONS
I. Write down the names of the countries located ..ilong the Persian Gui f
.., Write down the names of the central Asian States.
3. Describe the location of Pakistan
4. What were the weapons and tools used by the ancient people of Indus valley?
5. Write down an) tow features of ancient IndusValley.
6. Discuss, the belief of the people of AncientlndusValley.
7. What kind of food was used by the ancient people of Indus Valley?
8. Discuss. how Islam was came in the sub-continent through Arab traders.
9. Discuss the preaching of Islam through Muslim Saints.
I 0. Briefly discuss about the fom1ation of Muslim C,O\ ernme nt in Sub-contine nt.
LONG QUESTIONS
I. Discuss the importance of location of Pak.isl� in th� reg ion.
2. Discuss the features of ancient IndusValle) c1v1l11atton.
3. Write a short not on the Muslim advent in suh-contincnt.
()J
Hadi Pakista11 Studies or (BS-4 •ears
CHAPTER-4
POLITICAL AND CONSTIUTIONAL
DEVELOPMENT OF PAKISTAN
4.1 Causes of Failure of Parliamentary Democracy in Pakistan
Parliamentarv democracy is a form of government where voters elect the
parliament. "hich then forms the government. This system was introduced after the
establishment of Pakistan. But because of some unavoidable problems. this system
could not be established. The democratically elected governments have not been
allowed to function and to serve out their tenures. which in tum lead to a lack of
strong democratic institution. Causes of failure of Parliamentary democracy in
Pakistan are as follow;
t. Un-experienced Leadership
A large number of Muslim Leaders joined the league quite late only when they
became sure of the establishment of Pakistan. Their commitment to the Muslim
League was not deeprooted. They wanted to make best use of the opportunities. the
new state of Pakistan was to offer. They did not have essential for running a
parliamentary system of government. In the absence of commitment, experien ced
leadership and vigilant public opinion a shadow was cast at the very outset on the
future of parliamentary system.
2. Early and sudden death of Quaid-e-Azam
Quaid-e-Azam became the first governor general of Pakistan and played an
active role in running the state affairs. He enjoyed· such a popularity and confidence
of the people that he was, remarks Keitch Callard, "the personification of the state."
But his sudden death on 11th September 1948 created a void which could not be
filled. If he had not died then, but lived for another ten years, almost certainly
Pakistan's bad year the period i.e. 1952 to1958, would not have shaped themselves
as they did.
3. The performance of the first constituent assembly
. �he .constituent assembly of Pakistan performed two major functions, that
1s. const1tut1on making and serving as a legislature under the parliamentary system
It was responsible for setting up a government. lt failed bauly in performing these
94
Had/ Pakista11 Studiesfor (BS-4 years)
functions. It took a long time, probably the longest. in producing a constitution,

which could have been done in a year or so.
4. Downfall of Muslim League
Before the emergence of Pakistan. the M uslim League had a lofty mission
and a positive programme. It rallied the Muslim masses and· mobilized their
energies for the achievement of their common goal. But after the establishment of
Pakistan. the League became the ruling part)'. Gradually. it lost touch with the
common man and got deep! ) involved in power politics. Since there was no leader
or common programme to keep the party united. it was soon divided into different
factions. Their internal feuding created great mistrust and frustration amongst the
people.
S. Decline of democratic value
Democratic traditions which play an important role in the working of a
parliamentary S) stem were rarel) encouraged in Pakistan. The Quaid-e-Azam set a
democratic precedent b) stepping down as president of the League when he was
elected the governor general of Pakistan. He said that as a head of the state, he
should not have afliliations with any political organimtion because he had to look
after the interests of all sections of people.
It was also decided that the ministers should not hold offices in the
organization of the league. It was expected that the league, being an independent
body, would keep a check on the acti, ities of the parliamentary party and the
ministers.
This practice would have served as a great restraint on the activities of the
politicians, but Liaquat Ali Khan, who was the elected president of the League after
amending the party's constitution. discontinued this practice. This step retarde d the
growth of an autonomous party organization and undermine d the democratic
values.
6. Un-democratic steps of Governor General
The weakness of the Muslim League encouraged the go\ernor-general to
impor t leaders from outside the country and to impose them 011 che par ty. The
league always accepted them with open arms. Muhammad Al i Bogra, \\ ho was the
ambassador of Pakistan in the USA, was appointed prime minister by Governor.
General Ghulam Muhammad, and was readily elected its leader by the Muslim
League. Likewise, Chaudhd Muhammad Ali accepted leadership of the League
95
I ladi Paki!Jta11 Studiesfor (BS-4years)
st the spirit of
after his appointment as the Prime Minister. This was entirely again
the parliamentary system of government.
7. Opposition to the Basic Principal of Parliamentary system
The essence of the parliamentary system is that the leader of the majorit)
party is invited to fonn the government. But, in Pakistan. the Prime minister was
usually appointed first; he was then owned by the majority party. The members of
the League parliamentary party were aly;ays ready to join any cabinet. The prime
minister could remain in office during the pleasure of the head of the state. and had
to resign when the latter manipulated to deprive him of the support of the party.
This practice hamp,ered the development of democratic concepts in the country and
brought about political instability, which ultimately led to the failure of the
parliamentary system.
8. The Role of Politicians
Jn Pakistan. quite a number of civil servants became political leaders and
filled the political vacuum created by the General incompetence of politicians, with
the exception of Chaudhri Muhammad Ali who did not try to cling to power. had
little, if any. respect for democratic principles Ghulam Muhammad dismissed
Prime Minister Khawaja Naztmuddin m 1953 thought the latter had successfull)
piloted the budget in the assembly. Ghulam Muhammad had such a strong hold on
the ruling party, the Muslim League. while Nazimuddin was still the president of
the party. According to the nonns of the parliamentary system, the governor
general could not dismiss the prime minister as long as he enjoyed the support of
Lhe majority in the assembly.
9. Un-comtitutional steps of Governor General
The governor general of Pakistan Mr. Ghulam Muhammad dissolved the
constituent Assembly in October 1954. It was thoroughly an unconstitutional step
Laken by the governor general to protect his agenda of personalized rule. He also
dismissed the government of Muhammad Ali Bo�ra to fonn the cabinet again. He
neither had regard for democratic values nor did he understand the parliamentary
endeavour to cling to power at any cost.
10. The performance of provincial parliament democracy
The parliamentary system faced similar problems in the provinces. Th e
dismi ssal of provincial government-; and the frequent imposition of governor'� rule
in the provinces did not leave scope for devdopment of democratic traditions.
96
Hadi Pakistan Studiesfor (BS-4 year:,)
In West Pakistan, politics was a privilege of land lords who were mostly ill
educated and had no interest in the welfare of the people. They were not loyal to
any party. Their on!) aim in life was to remain in power among different groups led
by Mwntaz Daultana, lftak.har Mamdot, Gurrnani and others in the Punjab: and by
Qayywn Khan, Pir Manki Sharif. Dr. Khan Sahib and others in the NWFP; by
Ayub Khuhro, Pirzada, Talpur and Others in Sindh. These feudal and Khans struck
blow after blow at democracy and provided an unmistakable proof that feudalism
and democracy could not co-exist.
11. Parliamentary democracy in East Pakistan
The soil of East Pakistan was fertile for democracy but certain groups of
politicians, supported by religious minorities and leftists, created a l>ituation which
was not conducive to the growth of democracy. The scramble for power between
rival factions turned so ugly that, in September 1958, the speaker and the deputy
speaker of the East Pakistan assembly were assaulted by the members; the deputy
speaker received serious injuries and later died in the hospital. There are not any
examples in the history of parliamentary democracy of this sorrowful event.
12. The Regime of Sikandar Mirza
Sikandar Mirza became governor general after Ghulam Muhammad in
1955. He was a strong advocate of ''controlled Democracy" for ensuring order and
stability in the polity. He was an expert in palace intrigues and played one political
faction against another. During his tenure, the civil service attained great
ascendancy and corruption increased manifold. Again, it was mainly due to his
efforts that the Republican Party emerged overnight as a rival to the Muslim
League in the centre and in the West Pakistan. Skandar Mirza wanted to perpetuate
himself in power and, for the achievement of this purpose; he indulged in all types
of intrigues.
13. Chaudhry Muhammad Ali's Period
The Prime Minister of Pakistan Chaudhry Muhammad Ali had to make
many compromis es for frami_ng_ the constitut_ ion at th� cost of democratic traditions.
_He supported Dr. Khan Sahib m West Pakistan ag�mst the mandate of his party,
appointed Fazal-ul-Haq as the governor of East Pakistan to prolong the life of the
Sarkar ministry , and allowed the united front to remain in office in East Pakistan
for the whole year with out facing the assembly. All this can not be conceived in a
truly democratic country.
97
Hudi PaJ.i!ilan Studies for (BS-4 years)
t 4. Martial Law of 1958

the Mu_slim Leag�e He was
Khan Qanum Khan ,\a s elected president _of
an election cam �::ugn On tht
given a historical welcome when he visited Gujrat 1�
?etween m�Jor groups in
other hand . Suhrawardy was planning to forge an alliance
Khan for �e post of
Ea st and West Pak.istan. He had promised his support to F1roz
Mus!1m_ League
president after the general elections . The gro\\'ing pop_ularity of the
ab1 groups
and the prospects of an alliance between the Awam1 Lfague and :unJ
was.
meant that there was no possibility of Mirza ' s re-election as the president. fh1s
not acceptable to him. So he conspire d with the command er-in-chhief of the arm)
General Muhammad Ayub Khan, and d eclared Martial L aw on i October 1958
With one strol-.e of his pen. Skandar Mirza turned the whole couna: into a
graveyard of the d ream of e stablishing democracy in Pakistan.
15. Basic Democracy of Ayub Khan
Under the S)-Stem of b asic democracy, a limited number of basic democrats
d ecided the fate of the nation. They elected the pre sident and the members of the
provincial and national as semblie s, which made it eas)' to ·'bribe and bu)·· the
voters. The common man could develop no sense of participation in the count[) ·s
affairs. The politicdl lead ers and parties wer e not obliged to keep in touch "ith the
mas ses and the gulf between the government and the people further widened.
16. Undemocratic steps of People's par�
The government adopted an intolt!ront attitude toward s dissent· the
oppo sition was harasse d and their leaders were pl.!riodically arrested; the fre�dom
of the pre ss was also rcs1 rictt•,t. The democratic trad itions and political in�titutions
,vere not_ allo,�ed to gr?"'· �o the people ' s part)· s government degenerated into a
personal!zc d d1ctatorsh1p wh.1ch resorted to undemocratic practices time ·and again.
l 7. Martial Law of 1977
The return of P�istan to democracy in 1973 engend ered much hope that it
\.\.Ould soon overcome it s problems and create a viable and dt!mocratic system
� lowever, the�e hopes w��e soon dashed to the ground. When general Zia-ul-Haq
im�sed martial lav. on 5 July 1977 and constitution of 1973 \\.a s suspended on ce
�ga�?j. the democr?t}c experiment failed due to the rnisd <.:cds of its architects, the
ma 1 ity of lhe pohhcal lead ers to manage the political crisis. and their personalized
and narrow-based approach
98
1/nrli Pakistan Stt1dies for (BS-4 years)
18. Perv ez Musharrars Era

Pervez Musharaf dismissed the government of Nawaz Sharif on 12' 11
October. 1999 and Look the control of the country and became Chief Executive of
Pakistan. He suspended the constitution and enforced PCO (Provincial Constitution
Order). He presented a seven point programme in which uprooting corruption was
the highlight.
On 20th June 200 I, President Rafiq Tarar resigned and General M usharraf
grabbed the opportunity and became the president of the country. Like General
Ayyuab and General Zia-ul-Haq, he �ot himself elected as the president of the
country by holding a referendum on 30t April 2002.
-t.2 Quaid-e-Azam as the first Governor General of Pakistan (From

August 1947 to September 1948) Liaqat Ali Khan as the First
Prime Minister of Pakistan (From August 1947 to October 1951)
On 14th August 1947, Pakistan emerged as an Independent Islamic state on
the map of the wor.)d. On 7'h August 1947, Quaid-e-Azam reached Karachi from
Delhi.There he addressed the constituent Assembly of Pakistan on 11t h August
1947, and declared that the Partition of India and creation of Pakistan was the only
"'Solution'' of the problem in India.
h
Mount Batton reached Karachi on 13t August 1947 for transfer of rower to
Pakistan. For this purpose, a special meeting was held at Karachi on 14t August
1947, in which Lord Mount Batton performed his formal duty. Quaid-e-Azam took
the Oath by Justice Abul Rasheed as the first Governor General of Pakista n. Nawab
Liaq at Ali Khan was nomina ted as the Prime Minister of Pakistan by Quaid-e
Azam.The first Cabinet of Pakistan took Oath on 15 th August 1947 .
Constitutional Evolution (l 947-1956)
On 14th August 1947 Pakistan emerged as an independent Islamic state on
the map of the world but it had no constitution of its own. So under section eight of
the Indian independence Act of 1947.' t�e go�ernment of India Act 1935 was
promulga ted as the provisional const1tut1on with certain essential amendments
according to the need of the country .. A�erwar�s a ne � constituent Assembly was
established for framing the new const1tut10n which consisted of sixty nine members
but this number was increase d to seventy nine. Moulvi Tameez-ud-Din ws
appointed the first speaker of the Assm bly.
99
Hadi Paki!lta11 Stmliesfor (BS-4 year5)
The Prime Minister of Pakistan, Nav.ab Liaquat Ali Khan started efforts for
constitution making. But in the mean-time. the Quaid-e-Azam Muhammad Ali
111
Jinnah passed awa} at 10:25 P.M. on Sunda}. 11 September 1948. The sudden
death of the Quai-e-Azam was a serious loss for the nascent Country. The political
tunnoil which Pakistan had to face after his death. perhaps might not have been
created if he had not died.
4.3 Kbawaja Nazimuddin as the Governor General of Pakistan
(From September 1948 to October 1951)
After the death of Quaid-e-Azarn, Muslim League council appointed
1h
Khawaja azimuddin as the gmemor general of Pakistan on 14 Septembr 1948.
At that time. he was the Chief Minister for the East Pakistan and had a \aSt
experience in the administrative matters. I le remained a member of the All-India
Muslim League from 1937 to 1947.
Pakistan Objectives Resolution 1949
th
On 7 March 1949 the Prime Minister of Pakistan Nawab Laiqat Ali Khan
presented the Objectives Resolution in the legislative assembly which was passed
on 12th March 1949. This Resolution occupied Prime importance in the formulation
of constitution. The important points of this Resolution are as under:
Important Points of the Objectives Resolution
I. Sovereignty belongs to Allah
Sovereignty belongs to Allah Almighty alone and the authority to be
exercised by the people within the limits prescribed b} Him is a sacred trust.
2. Power and Authority of the State
State will exercise its power and authority through the elected
representatives of the people.
3. Islamic Legislation
The constitution of Pakistnan shall be formulated in the light of the Quran
and the Sunnah and no legislation will be done repugnant to the teaching of Islam.
4. Obeying the Islamic Principles
The Islamic principles of democracy freedom, equality tolerance and social
justice as enunciated by Islam shall be fully observed.
100
Hudi Pakistan Studies fer (BS-4 years)
S. To Providl' the Islamic atmospherl' to the people

The Muslims shall be enabled to order their lives in individual and
collective spheres in accordance with the teachings of the Holy Quran ancl the
Sunnah.
6. Protection of Minorities
Adequate provision shall be made for the minorities, freely to profess and
practise their religion and develop their culture and traditions.
7. Federal System
Pakistan shaJI be a federation, in which provinces will be autonomous with
such boundaries that all limitations on their powers and authority as may be
prescribed.
8. Independent Judiciary
The independence of the judiciary shall be fully secured.
9. Basic Rights
Basic rights of freedom, equality of status. freedom of thought, expression,
social, economic and political justice, belief, faith, worship and association shall be
guaranteed.
Reaction of the Opposition party
The Pakistan nation al congress was the main opposltlon party in the
constituent Assembly. There where sixteen out of sixty nine none Muslim members
in the assembly belonged to the national congress. When the Objectives Resolution
was passed in the constituent Assembly, the opposition party objected to it, on the
plea that it mixed politics with religion. I t would reduce the minority communities
to the status of serfs. Acco rding to Safdar M�ood, "The leader of the congress
Party, S.C. Chattopa protested that the Resolution would make the non-Muslims in
Pakistan drawers of water and hewers of wood." According to G. W. Choudhry
Hindu l�ader Mr. Dutta stated, "Politics and religion belong to two different
regions of mind" He explained, that "under the Objectives Resolution politics was
intenningled with religion and was pa�sed in�o t�e other �phere of faith." All the
non-Muslims communities were defimtely d1ssat1 sfied with the resolution. They
expressed their distrust that it would allow the state to interfere in the personal lives
of the citizens.
lOI
I/mil Pukiwm Stutlit:.\ or (BS-4 •eun)
Importance of Objectives Resolution

importan�c in the
I he ObJ ecttves Resolution occupies a special
ood. m_ Pakistan
wnstituuonal history of Pakistan According to Safdar M�
Khan as t�e most
political roots &De\clopmcnt. ··It was described by L1a�u�t Ali
only to the
important occasion 111 the life of this country. next m 1?1portance
that the
achievement of independence." Through this Resoluuon. 1t ws declared
establishment of an Islamic society in the light of the Quran and the Sunnah was
the real purpose of the state. According to G.W Chaudhl). ·· fhe most outstanding
and novel feature of the Ob1ectivc Resolution was that it sought to base the
C onst1tutron of Pakistan on the 1deab of Islam." fhe Objectives Resolution
fulfilled the purpose of the creation of Pakistan and it was induded in the preamble
of all the three constitutions of Pakistan. According to G.\\- Choudhry. "'It laid the
foundation of the constitution and indicated the broad outlines of its structure:·
Basic Principles Committee
On 12th March 1949, the basic principles committee was set up b) the
constituent Asscmbl}.MoulviTamcc,-u-Dm was elected as the president and the
prime minister Nawab Liaqat Ali Khan was elected as vice president of this
committee. Seven members of the centr:il cabinet. chief Minister of all the
provinces and chief justice of Pakistan Sir Abdul Rasheed were the members of this
committee.
Formation of Sub-committees
The basic principles committee setup several subcommittees to examme
separately certain important issues.
Sr. No. Name of Committees Members
·-
--·-
1----------
--
I
2 -
Sub committee for fedcral, division of powers
_S_
25
f-- --+ ub-committee for right to vote. 15
3 Sub-committee fou_u�iciary. 8
4 Sub-committee for Bas·ic ri_ght. 8
. -1
Formation of Board for Isfamic Education

A board for Islamic education was also formed. Mufti-Muhammad Shafi.
Mufti Jaffar Hussain, Syed Sulaiman Nadvi, Zafar Ahmed Ansari, Professor Abdul
Khaliq and Dr. llamccd-u-llah were the members of this committee. It \\as their
responsibility to submit their recommendations from religious point of vie� fo r
making the crn",titution to the sub-committees.
102
H, ,t ll,'lHH t of tlw ( on1111ict1.·,·
l)n ",.,lh .. . . .
(' ...,1.•pt1.·m l'1.'1 I 1hll, .111 11111.•rn11 11.·p111 t 111 1111. l\a•,11..· 11nm:1p I cs
1.·,,mmit11.·1.• \\,Is p11.''-1.'l\h.'d 11, tlw 1.n1ist1tt11.·11t nss1.·111hh. \\.h11. h 1, ,is follows.
I. \ b1c.1m1.·1,1I kd1.•1,1l kp1sl,1tm1.· '"th cq11;II pmn·1, H'st1.·d in hoth tlw ho11.scs,
the 11pp1.•r Il,,11s1.\ 1-..tHn, n us Iln11s1.· ol t l11its w;ts to co11.,1sl or a11 equal
numb1..•1 or n.-pr1..•s1.·nt,lll\ 1.•s from ,111 prm 111ccs. \\,hilc the lower I louse was
C'\.pCl.'t1.·d w g1, 1.· rqm.'s1.•nt,11ton on h,1s1s ol pup11l,1t1011.
2. lhc hcnd 1.,f tlw st,\11.' \\,ls to he 1.·k'c.:tcd hv both the houses I tis tcmm.: was
Ii, c , 1..·,ns but he e()Uld he remoH·d h) th� two third ni.tJonty of the cc11trul
kgi,lawrc
3 Go, ernmcnt 1.,f Pal-..istnn would be ,l federal type I he centre w.1s to be
strong "tth r1.•s1du.1r� po,,crs gh en to it In c,tsc of' 1n cuns1stcncy hctwecn
thc t�dcral 1.m and the pn)\ 111c1,1I law. the federal l,1v. was to prevail.
4. Purlinmcntnr) system nf gowrnmcnt would be 1ntrnduccd 111 the country.
The prcsitknt of thl.! country would bl.! the heud of thc: �late and the pnme
Minster would be the 1 kad ol the Ciovl.!rnmcnl
5. Pro, incial kgislnturc would be 1:kcted h) thc: volc: ol the people. 'I he
go\ emor \\Ould hc: the I lead of the prm incc and the ducf Minster v.ould be
the I kud of thl.! gm crnment.
6. The judicinr} wns dcclan:d quill' indc:pendcnt and husic rights were giv1,;n to
pcoph! of the countr}.
7. Urdu was givl.!n thc: stutus of Nat1onul La11gu.1gc:. 'while Bunguli langua ge as
ignored.
Reaction to the Report
The report caused grc:ut d1sappomlnH.!1�t mno11gst _
the people ,md was
subjected to sc,erc criticism. lhc pc:opk of P� 1k1stan reJcct cd �hrs rc:port und wcrc:
argued that it provided un inco m �letl.! const1tul1onu l ':ilrucl urc:. I hc: urgumc:nts of the
people against this rcpo1i arc: as Jollows.
I. It v.as rejected on the b�sis that il did not have Islum,c character according
to the objectives resolution.
2. The East Pakistani leaders contended that their majority was being reduced
to a minority.
103
i:
/lut/1 f>llk/\1011 St11tllr, t>r IJS-4 f!llr\')
rk off full-scale
3· In l·m,t Pukista n, the publication of the report sp� :�
• the province.
agitation causing a sp 1·1t betwccn tl1c centre and
. language which created
4. I he report dcc I arcd U rdu to be the only national
great rcscntmt:nt in the East Pakistan.
In view or an all-round criticism and · public dema nd, Liaquat Ali Khan
· and
uskcd the committee to review the report in t hc 11ght of the criticism
suggestions made by the members and others.
·1 he basic principles committee received proposals and comments in _l�rge
number. In order to scrutinize these proposals and to carry out necessary add1t1ons
and alterations in the report to improve it, a special sub-committee was form�d
headed by Sardar Abdul Rub Nishtar. But in the meantime, while the Basic
committee was reviewing the report, Liaqquat Ali Khan was assassinated at
Rawalpindi on 16th October, 1951.
4.4 Malik Ghulam Muhammad as the Governor General of Pakistan
(October 1991 to August 1955) Khawaja Nazm-ud-Din as the Prime
Minister of Pakistan (October 1951 to April 1953)
After the death of Liaqat Ali Khan, the bureaucracy compelled Khawaja
Nazim-ud-Din Lo accept Lhc office of the Prime Minister. ThenKhawaja Na7m-ud
Din stepped down from the ofiice of the Governor General to become the prime
minister, and Malik Ghulam Muhammad was appointed as Governor General.
Malik Ghulam Muhammad was a bureaucrat and had no role in the struggle for
Pakistan. His selection was the refleclion of bureaucratic influence on the national
issues. I le remained Governor General till 1955 and during his tenure, he
encouraged the atmosphere of political conspiracies.
Second Report of the Basic Principa, Committee
The task of constitution-making was left incomplete during Liaquat Ali
Khan's Government. Khawaja Nazim-ud Din took up the task of constitution
making on his assumption of the office of the Prime Minister. On 22 nd December
1952, he presented the consolidated report of the Basic Principles committee in the
assembly with some alterations which also called the second report. Its main points
are as follow:
1. The head of the state shall be a Muslim. He shall be elected by the joint
_ of
session both the Houses of the central legislature. But will not be a
104
'. ..,
Hadl PaJ.irnm Stwlie:, fur (BS-4 rean)
me mber of th1.: legislature. and his term of office shall be for five )Cars and
during tlrn, term. no action shall be taken against him in an) court of law.
2. r he l'.cntral lt.!gtslaturl.! shall consist of two Houses. fhe house of the units
consist� or 120 membcn, and the house of the people consisting of 400
members. both gi\ mg equal representation to the two wings of the count!").
l he term of ..:ach house shall be fixed at live years.
3. The mmistr) shall be responsible to the lower house but could address both
the Houses.
4. The subjects v.cre di, ided mto three lists for the division of powers between
the federation and the units. The centre was to be strong with residuary
powers given to it.
5. Adult franchise was to be introduced.
6. Board of l.,lmas was to be set up both b) the Head of the state and the
pro"incial Governors, consisting of persons well-versed in Islamic law. All
proposed legislations were to be referred to these Boards to ensure that
nothing against the teachings of the Quran and Sunnah was e nact ed.
7. There was to be a supreme court and also high courts, one in each province
The Chief Justice of Supreme Court was to be appointed by the Head of the
State and could be removed b, him on the ad\ice and report of bench of
judges.
Reaction to the Report
This report also faced opposition fr?m many political quarters. It gave rise
to an unending controvers) and generated _b1ttcn�css bl!tween the East and the West
Pakistan. The arguments of the people against thts report are as under.
l. A cont ro\'ersv regarding the federal structure of the constitution, particular!)
the quantum· of repr�sentation . in the_ fe�eral l�g.islature , arose. fh� p�rity
proposal was against all recogmzed prmctpl�s of lederatt�n. So, tI:e pnnc1ples
e !:a �t P a ktstan. This _part of the
of parity >were not acceptable t� t_h� people ot th
p
report was. therefore. widely cnttc1zed bY the unJab1 and the Bengali groups.
t the East :akistan had be e� give� a
2. The politicians of Punjab feared tha
post·t·ton of complete domination over the west, whtch was a 1 ready dt\ 1 ded into
. f . . repo'rt was
. 1stan. Thts
t_he _ Fast_ Pak
nine units against one unified um_t op
b1 cns1s report. A· ccordmg to
popu 1 arI y ' know n as the Bangah unJa
Hadi Pakistan Studies/or (BS-4years)
G.W.Chaudhry, "This time the reaction in the Punjab was extremely

unfavourable."
3. The greatest drawback for the parity proposal was that it diverted people's
thinking into provincial grooves. As the people had never been part of the
mainstream of Pakistan movement and they had only agreed to federate the
provinces of the East and the West in the new state of Pakistan. G. W.Chaudhry
wrote in his book''Constitutional Development in Pakistan", "Nawa-i-Waqat, a
th
leading Labore daily, in its editorial of 28 December 1952, opposed the parity
formula on the ground that it was likely to result in the pennanent domination
of one province (East Pakistan) over all other provinces of Pakistan.
4. To review the central and provincial legislation by the Board of Ullma was also
criticized. These boards sought to give sweeping powers to a handful of persons
who could monopolize the right to interpret the Quran. This part of the report
appeared to be motivated by the extreme religiosity.
Conclusion
Safder Mahmood wrote in his book, "Despite the defects inherent in the
report, Khawaja Nazim-ud Din commended it to the nation as a document
representing the ·maximum agreement'. He described it as the first golden ray of
the sun which illuminates the sky". According to G.W.Chaudhry, "The Country
seemed to face a constitutional dea<Hock of great magnHude. National unity was
threatened for a time it appeared that no compromise was possible which would be
acceptable to the two wings of Pakistan.
Removel of Khawaja NazirnuJdin trorn his office of Prime Minister
During the government of Khawaja Nazimuddin, the country had to face famine
and for the first time, wheat had to be imported from the foreign countries. The
People of Pakistn started calling him by the nick name of "Quaid-e-Qillat". The
Bengalis became riotous and they began lo take part in unlawful activities. The
political situation in the country began becoming worse rapidly. In those
circumstances the government of Khawaja Nazimudin was removed on I ? 1h April
1953. I. H.Qureshi wrote in "A short history of Pakistan" The proceeding was not a
breach of law. But it was an obvious violation .of well established parliamentary
conventions." According to Dr. Abdul Hameed, "Nazimuddin's entry in the office
of Prime Minister was unusual, His piety, integrity and patriotism were
unquestionable but he failed to give leadership to the country.
106
Hadl Pakistan Studies for (BS-4 years)
Muhammad Ali Bogra's reign as Prime Minister (April 1953 to August 1955)
Muhammad Ali Bogra who was the Phlcistan's Ambassador in the U.S.A
was appointed as the prime minister of Pakistan. He had also served as Ambassador
in Burma (Rangoon) and Canada (Ottawa). In the pre-partitioned days he had also
held the portfolio of finance Minister in Bangal. But he had no significant position
in the Muslim League or the country's politics. General M4hammad Ayub Khan
writes in Friends not Masters, "The Governor General appointed Muhammad Ali
Bogra Prime Minister of Pakistan and number of Nazimuddin's Colleagues in the
Cabinet accepted office in the new Cabinet without demur."
Muhammad Ali Bogra Formula
On 7th October 1953, Muhammad Ali Bogra announced his constitutional
formula in the constitution Assembly. These proposals are known as .. Muhammad
Ali Bogra Formula." According to G.W. Chaudry, "On his appointment, Prime
Minister Muhammad Ali in 1953 considered it as one of his principal task to
overcome the constitutional deadlock. He was soon successful in achieving a
compromise on the issue of representation between the East and the West Pakistan
in the federal legislature". Its salient features are as follow:
1. The central legislature shall consist of two Houses, upper and Lower. In the
upper House, there shall be 50 members distributed among the 5 units of
Pakistan including the East Pal<lstan. That meant that the four west
Pakist.nai Units were to have forty members (ten each) and East Pakistan
was given ten. The lower House shall consist of 300 members to divide
among the same 5 units on the basis of Population. East Pakistan was
allocated 165 seats and the four units of West Pakistan were given 135
seats. Whe n the two houses met together, both the wings had equal
representatives, East � ak.istan lo+l 65�175; West Pal<lstan 4o+1 35=175.
The allocation of seats m the central legislature was to be as follows.
Sr. No. Units Unoer House Lower House Total
I East Pakistan 10 165 175
2 The Punjab 10 75 85
10 24
3 NWFP and tribal Areas 34
10 19 29
4 Sindh and Khairpur
es 10 17
5 Baluchistan, Baluchistan Sta� 27
and Karachi
Union Bahawalpur
Total 50 300 350
107
1/udi Pakistan Studies for (BS-4 years)
2. The power� of the two Houses were to be equal and a ministry was to be
responsible for both the Houses.
3. In ca�c of conflict between the two Houses. a joint session of both_ the
Houses was to be held to decide the issue. But in case of senous
disagreement on matters of exceptional importance. the head of the state
was competent to dissolve both the Ilouses and order for fresh election.
4. If the head of the state was from the West Pakistan. the prime minister shall
•be from the l·ast Pakistan and "ice-versa
5. The function of Board of Ulma was assigned lo the Supreme Court. It \Vas
a significant change in these proposals.
Reaction to the report
These suggestions were generally \\elcomed whole heartedly b) almost all
sections of p!.lblic opini-on. It was thought that these would lead to closer integration
and co-operation bct""een the two wings. The parliamentar) party of the Muslim ,
League rectified this formula on 6111 October 1953 But the opposition parties
remained unsatisfied. "
Response of the Government
The Government appointed a drafting committee to write down the
rrovisions as pro"ided b) the assembly. For this purpose. the sen, ices of an
eminent British constitutional expert. Sir Ivor Jennings. \Vere also obtained. On the
14th October, the draft bill of the constitution \\as finalized. The prime minister
declared that the constitution would be promulgated till December 1954. But in the
meantime. the Governor General Mr. Ghulam Muhammad dissolved the
constitutent Assembly.
Dissolving the first Constituent Assembly
On 24th October 1954, the Government General Mr. Ghulan1 Muhammad dissolved
the Constitutcnt Assembly although the Assembly had completed the tash. of framig
the constitution and all abstacles in the \\ay of its implementation had been
removed. After the dissolution of the constituent assembly, the Governor General
again invited Muhammad Ali Bogra to form a new cabinet. He formed new cabinet
\\ hich consisted of some new ministers like General Muhammad Ayub Khan.
Major General Skandar Mirza and Dr. Khan Sahib. and l lussam Shaheed
Suhrawardy. It was the first time, that commander 111 chief of the ann). General
108
ta,, Studies for (BS-4 years)
!!!di Pakis
Ayub Khan. was included in the cabinet and paving wa} for the involvement of
anny in polities.
Federal Court and Counstituent Assembly
The Governor General's action was challenged in the Sindh Chief Court by
vi
Moul Tarnizuddin Khan, Speaker of the constituent Assembly. The court gave a
verdict against Ghulam Muhammad and declared his step illegal. But when this
trial was brought in the Federal court by the Government, the Federal Court gave
its ruling in favour of the Govemal General, and announced that the constituent
Assembly had not framed the future constitution of Pakistan after seven years since
its inception. So it had not right to continue any further.
Second Constitutional Assembly
On 28th May 1955, the Governor General issued order, for holding elections
for new constituent assembly as early as possible on 23 rd Ju ne 1955. Thus second
Counstituent Assembly came into being. It consisted of eighty members divided
equally between the East and the West Pakistan; the seats Qf West Pakistan were
further rli\ ided among its counstituent units. Its seventy two members were elected
by the provincial assemblies. The elections by the provincial assemblies were held
o n the basis of single-transferable vote and eleven seats were to be filled in by non
Muslim members. The detail of seats allocation in the second Constitutent
Assembl1y .1s as fio11 ows.
Sr. No. Name of Provinces Total Seats Non Muslim Seats
1 ·East Pakistan 40 09
2 Punjab ' 21 l
3 NWFP 4 X
I
I 4 Sindh 5 1
II ,
10 X
I...___ 5 Other territories
I 80 80
Total
emblies were held for t�e second
The Elections by the provincial ass . .
consfLtuent assembl y. Ten me mbe rs from BaJoch1 stan, Front i er states, Tribal Areas,
.
Kha·1rpur State an d Karachi were to be nommated bY the Govemer Genera,I and .m
o ther areas, th'ey were to be elected by the Provm · I assembl.1es. Mus 1·1m League
· c1a
. ·
lost ·ts pr v. ous po_s•. h. �n •in second Constituent Assembly, because 1t was defeated
in thte gene i n in March 1954. Although it was still the
eral election m th e East Pakista .. .
largest par . n Assembly.The party pos1t1on 1s as under.
ty m the sec ond C onstitutio
109
--,
ll111/l l'ukhttm St111llt•\ [!ir (HS 4 ttin)

J
West East
l'olltle11I Purtle, Total
Pakistan Pakistan
Muslim cuguc 24 1 25
United l·ront 16 16
Awum1 I c111:tuc(l mer the membership Rose to thirteen) - 12 12
Muslim I cuguc (md�ndent) - 1 1
Noon Grou_p 3 - 3
Commumsl - I I
lndc�ndcnls 3 - 3
Non-Muslims
Nutionul Conl¾rcss - 4 4
Schdulcd castes l·cdcration - 3 3
United progressive parliamentary
Party - 2 2
Others 2 - 2
Total: 32 40 72
The remaining eight seats, out of the forty allocated to West Pakistan i.e.
two for Bahawa\ Pur state, one for the Khair Pur state, one for the Baluchistan
states Union, One for the Frontier state and three for the Tribal Areas. were to be
filled later, after the mode of election for these seats had been detennined by the
elected members,of the Constituent Assembly.
Cboudhry Muhammad Ali's Reign as the Prime Minister (from August 1955
to September 1956)
Choudhary Muhammad Ali was one of those high ranking Muslim officers
in whom Quaid-e-Azam had full trust. Ile held many key posts and everywhere his
honesty and untiring hard work was acclaimed. He worked as the Minister for
Finance and EconomicAffairs in the central Cabinet of Mr. Muhammad Ali Bogra.
Before the partition of India when an Interim Government was established in 1946.
in the sub-continent, the Government and congress offered the Finance Ministry to
Muslim League, Chaudhry Muhammed Ali met Quaid-e-Azam and requested him
to accept the offer.Ile assured Quaid-e-Azam of his full cooperation in this
connection. The famous English writer Mozey writes in his book, ·'Toe last days of
British Imperialism in India" that the Budget prepared by Muhammad Ali proved
to be the forerunner for Pakistan.
bly was held at Murree on 7111 Jul7
The first session of new constitutional assem
elected Choudhry Muhammad Ali tht;!.
I 955. In th i s session the Muslim League
1 I0
-
Had/ Pakistan Stud/e\f<Jr (BS-4 years)
lea der. The prime Minister of Pakistan Muhammad Ah Bogra resigned and went
back to the U.S.A as Ambassado r On 11 August 1955. Choudhry Muhammad Ali
th
took over the charge as the prime minister of Pakistan In the meantime. Malik
Ghu lam Muhammad was made to retire from the post of Governor General due to
his falling health.
. ts SKINDAR MRZA AS THE GOVERNOR GENERAL OF PAKJSTAN
(OCTOBER 1955 TO MARCH 1956)
Skindar Mirza took over the charge as the acting Governor General of
th
Pakistan on 6 August. 1955; after the resignation of Ghulam Muhammad he
became the Governor General of Paksitan on 6th October 1955. During his regime.
the first constitution of Pakistan 1956 was finalized and all the provinces and
princely states of West Pakistan were merged in-to one province.
One Unit
Pakistan comprised of two un-equal parts and separated from each other by
more than a thousand miles. The population of East Pakistan was larger than that
of the West Pakistan. while the West Pakistan was composed of four provinces and
many states. The Government decided that all the four provinces and the states of
West Pakistan shoul d be merged into one pro\ ince and the whole country was
composed of two provinces (East& West Pakistan). This formula was designed by
Hussain Shaheed Suhrawardi. The constituent Assembly passed the law
establishing one unit of the West Pakistan on 30th September 1955. On l 5th October
19 55, it was implemented and all provinces and states of Pakistan were merged into
one single unit to form the province of West Pakistan. Pakistan now had two
provinces i.e.East and Wcsl Pakistan. 1 he first Chief Minister of the one unit was
Dr. Kha n Sahib while Mr. Mustaq Ahmed Gurmani was appointed as the first
governor of West Pakistan.
According to G.W Choudhry ·'The first important and highly controversial task
pe rformed by the second Constituent Assembl y was the unification pf West
P akistan."
Advantages of One Unit
The Prime Minister announced the advantage of One Unit m the first official
rneeting, which are as under.
1
· Administrative expenses would be re<.1uced.
l,,.Backward areas would be developed.
111
..
H{l(/i Pakista11 Studies/or (BS-4 years) """'
3. Constitution making would be easier.

4. Both the provinces could be given maximum autonomy.
5. One Unit of West Pakistan would remove the curse of provincial hostilit}.
Conclusion
Although, One Unit of West Pakistan was a big project and had some
advantage to solve the polititicaJ problems of the country. like Constitution making.
In the light of people's view, G. W Chaudhry writes in ''Constitutional
Development in Pakistan" that ·'Mere abolition of provincial boundries by an
Administrative Act and tabooing the names, Punjab, Sind. Pathan, Boluch and so
forth could not automatically change a long established psychology. The greater
need to curb provincialism is for a change in the outlook and policies of some
politicians who promote such feeling to pursue their own narrow interests."
Constitution of 1956
After the formation of one unit, the constitution framing had become easier
because the problem of giving equal representation to both the provinces had been
resolved. So. Choudhry Muhammad Ali as Prime Minister of Pakistan started the
work of constitution making. A draft of the constitution was prcsenteJ in the
rd th
· Constituent Assembly on 23 January 1956, which was passed on 29 Februar)
1956. The Governor General of Pakistan, Sikandar Mirza approved the constitution
· on 2 nd March 1956 and was implemented on 2Yd March 1956, proclaiming
Pakistan an Islamic Republic. It was the first constitution of Pakistan ""·hich
consisted of 234 clauses and 6 headings. According to the constitution 1973.
Sikandar Mirza took over the charge as the first president of Pakistan.
Salient Features of the Constitution 1956
The salient t�atures of this constitution an.. as under:
1. Written Constitution
The Constitution of 1956 was a written document which consisted of 234
articles, which were divided in 13 parts and six schedules. The objective resoluti on
was included in the constitution as a preamble.
2. Federal t)·pe government
Th7 go"ern�ent of Pakistan would be of Federal type. The princi pl es for
the allocal!on of subJects between the centre and the provinces would be· follo,ved.
112
1/fldi Paki'ilflll Stmlie\ for (BS-4 J't!llf\}
3. Parliamentary System of Government

Un er the constitution of 1956, a parliamentary system of government
�
would be introduced in the countr). The prime Minister and his cabinet members
\\Ould be accountable for their policies before the National Assembly.
�. Basic rights
fhe people would be given the basic rights e.g. security of their life ana
property, freedom of speech and ""riling etc.
Under the Constitution of 1956. the judiciary wa� declared quite
independent. No retired judge would be appointed to any administrative post nor
would any officer of the administration be appointed as the judge of a court. The
judge shall have the security of their service. A judge could be removed only by the
president after an address by the National Assembly, two-third of the members
concurring.
6. Single citizenship
The citizenship of Pakistan shall have only a single citizenship. All the
coitizens shall be called Pakistanis. In America. the people enjoy dual citizenship
i.e. one citizenship of central Government the other of the Government of the
states.
7. Flexible Constitution
The constitution of 1956 was flexible in nature. Two-third majority of the
members for the National Assembly could amend any clause of the constitution and
authentication by the president.
8. Unicameral Legislative
Und er this constitution, unicameral legislature was introduced. .
The
Nation I A embly was of 300 member s an d b oth t he .
provinces were given equal
represe:tat�:n. The seats were reserved for women. five for each ""ing. The
Assembly was elected for a tenure of five years.
9. National Language
Both Urd u and Bengali were given the status of official languages of t 11:
Country. S.1mu 1 taneo usly• English was also to be reta1m . .: d t·or another ..,_5 , \.'.ar-.,
official language.
113
8S-4 1•ei,r.,
/lad/ Paki5ta11 Sttulli:., or
10. Supreme Court 1i1 na11t to tlu:

ed o dcc l11rc uny luw ,,s rcp1
power t
Suprcrnc Court wus em
const itut ion.
Con titution 1956
Islamic Provisions of the
t. Name of t h e Country lsl,111uc
. co nst"tt1
1 " o n of 1956 Pok1stn n \\.US dcc lmcd un
Accord mg to the
t 1
Republic.
Sovereignty to Allnh Almig ty
h
2.
n g s to Allah
n or l 956, so, crc1g nty belo
According to the constitutio
Almighty.
3. Objective, Resolution
t he prcu111bk uf the co n
stitut io n .
Object1,·cs resolution was included in
4. Presidenf to be Muslim
, 1t \.\U'{ m.idc crnnpulsmv tor the
According to the constit ut ion or 1956
president to be the Muslim.
5. Enforcement of Islamic L w
, II h1: 1:nforccd Ill the countr)'
According to the constitut ion, lslnm1c lil
hy tl1c 11\)i� (.:1m1,1 ,md Sun nuh und the cxisllnl1,
And all t he laws would be moulded
y ith lsinm.
laws will be brought into conformit v.
6. Establis hment of Islamic Rescnrch Oq�anization
will
According to the con�titut10n of 1956, Orgm111ut io n ol lslu1nic rcscurch
be est ablished, ,,hich will d0 n.·,carch to, the legislation a n d l! n lorccm
cnt of
Islamic principles.
7. Elimination of Riba
Accor'Jing to t he const it ution of 1956, it was also mentioned thut th!!
government v.ould eliminate Riba and mokc the economy of the country free of
Riba.
8. Relations with Muslim world
According t o the �onst itutions of 1956 Pakist an will cstublish good relation�
. .
"1th other Islamic count ries for the unity of Muslim world . .-
114
-
Had/ Pakista11 Studie$for (BS-4 years)
According to the constitution of 1956. it was made guaranteed for the
judiciary to work independently and security of the service to the judge was
ensured.
10. Protection of the rights of minorities
According to the constitution of 1956, the ri ghts of minoritjes will be
protected and they would be given complete religious and cultural freedom.
t t. Security of Islamic traditions
According to the constitution, the government will protect the Islamic
traditions and all non-Mulsim traditions like gambling and publishing of porno
literature, prostitution etc. would be banned. But drinking would not be banned on
religious occasions of non-Mulsims.
12. Islamic Values
According to the constitution of 1956, Islamic principles like democracy,
freedom, equality tolerance and social justice will be implemented.
4.6 SIKANDAR MIRZA AS THE FIRST OF PRESIDENT OF
PAKISTAN (March 1956 to October 1958)
After the promulgation of the first constitution of Pakistaf:l 1956, Sikandar
Mirza became the first president of Pakistan on 25th March, 1956. But Choudhry
Muhammad Ali's Mirustry could not remain stable. His health was growing worse,
so, he wanted to go to Europe for medical treatment. He was relieved of his
responsibilities as Prime Minister on 9 th September 1956 and went to Europe.
Hus sain Shaheed Sabanvardi as the Prime Minister of Pakistan (From
Septe mb�r 1956 to October 1957)
He became the Prime Minister of Pakistan on 12 September 1956. He was
th
a very brilliant figure of Pakistan. He had . a v�sl �oliti�al experienc� �d the

dynamic quality of leadership. Prof. K. Ah wntes m his book, Qua1d-1-Azam
Jinnah as I knew him "Suhrawardy was the only national leader who command ed
respect and
good wili from the peo�le _of both the wings of th� country. It was
considered tha t a ft er the death of Qua1d+Azam and Shaheed-e-M11lat, Suhrawardy
'but1• on to the cause of
s
;a the only all-Pakistan popular figure whose contn
akistan was no less than anybody".
115
Pnnni.:. 11:-- mnn,u,. m.m, h,\hb ,\f hlt •t�'l\ ,t:1h.·, ,,1 tlwn Pt 11\\l' � ll1H,h'1s , 1,1kd
l\1 \$\;n I md,• P-.·k�,m,,n ,,t �.m,h \1;1t,;,,, th,' l\11h.111wn1.1n lklqPll\lll ,,IS, 11:1
,md l\n ,, .,b,, , t�lt :\l l',1l,..1-.t.m Snml,u-h. h,• .11-.,, , 1s1h·,I nu111, fl,, ·1�11 ,·,,111111 ll''
During. hi$ l\'�tn•�- tlw ,t'l\\.lt\',ltt,,n ,,f \"-'llthl,lr\ Im,· b,•1,, ,·,·n lr:m ,111d l\11,..1,1.111.
\\ ,1$ J1..'\:1J,-J l'.llt$t,ltl ,,h�,, l'l\h.'l\'d mt,, ,1 dd�·ns,· l',h'l "1th \11wn1..'.1
lk :\l$,, t�•ll , h.'1\m h.' ri\,1lm•� ,m,t 1,,lit1l'.1I k� pullmgs I h,• 1 ,•p11hh,·:11is
\\ f\.)t' t,, thl' Pt 'Std,•nt. \\ 1th1.k\\\ It\� th,•n �ur,p,,rt ,,r th,· ,.,,,11tt1,rn llllllisll)
Snhr:mni� l\'qU,'$tl'J thl' ro.'$hknt ,,, ,._,11 n �,'$Si,,n ,,f th,· \$s,·mbh "' dl'll'rn1111,·
ll::- (\mtid '\\,'l' in him �\It th,· PTt·s1,knt t\lir,1 n'lt1s,·d h' gin· tum :-;t1\'11 an
''N"-'rtunit� l k gah' tht' dl\\ll.'.'t' l'il't\h','l\ R'�1gn,1u,,n .md d1sm1s:-.1l. S11h1,l\\ :1r,h
pt\:'ft·rred fonn,·r ,mJ t\:'St�th.'J ,,n l "'111 l\.·t,,lx·r I'>:-.,
lbrnhim lsnrnil Chundrigar u� tht Pritnl' i\tiniskr of P:t"i:-t:rn (Odolwr
l �5 "' to Ot-rentbl'r l Q5�)
.\fkr Suham\\ ,\N) · s re�ignatil'1l. tlw \ luslim 1 t\\�u,· h,1d .1gr1.'1.'d 1,, forn1 a
,x1aliti1.1n go, enun1.·nt "1th Rt·puhltcan l\1rt, ,,n th1:.• ,.l,nditt,,n that b, antt.·mling the
Ekctof3tl..' \ct. the Princ1pk· ,,t st:p;\r.tte '-'k,·h,r.ue ",,uld b,• 1mpkm,·nh.'d in 1hc
c1.,w1tr). On l $ 1\.kh.'lx-r I Q5 '7. LI l'hundng,n "h,, hd,,ns.,•d tl, tushm l c..•ng.u1..' w:\s
.,ppointe<l as the prime linister l,f Pal,..ist.m Hut ,\tk1 th1..• fon11atil,n of tlw cnhmel.
a group of \limsters from the fa1st Paki�tnn starll·d tlpp,.)sing the p1·,,p,)s,·d
J111endments �cause h� mtroducmg the pri1w1pk nf s1.•pnrn1c dt:1.'tornte their
politicnl fut� might� endanged. fhe Republil:an Pan� nlSl) \\,lilied to ,kprh e ,1f
P'-'litical opponent p!lrt� of gnining power. o th1.') tkdmcd thnt Fkctorak Act
,, ould not be .unend1.-d. Due to chnnge in nt1itud1.• of Repubhcnn Pmt, . Prime
�linister LI. Chundrignr presented his resignntion tt, the pr,·sidcnt on 11th l)ecl'mher
l 957.
Befon: resigning, the Chundrignr ministl") tm,i... a step whkh later greutl�·
ntfrcted the;: fate of the .\ womi Lcugur colition ministt) in East Pnkistun. On I 011
December 1957 at n high le, el conference, attended b) the cc111rul ministl!rs. thl'
East Pakistan chief minister. govemment ot11ciuls tmd the commnndcr-in-d1kt' or
the Anned r orcl.!s. General A) ub Khnn. o scheme, "Opcmtillll Closl' Dol,r''. wns
apprO\ ed to put the armed · forces in compktr o, eroll contn,I nnd supreme
command of the anti-smuggling opration in Enst Pnkistnn. An ordinance \\tlS issul'd
to this effect. and the oprotion started on 20 December I 957.
l 16
Hadi Pa/..ista11 Studies for (BS-4 years)
F'eroze K han Noon as the Prime Minister of Pakistan on (December 1957 to

October 1958)
Feroze Khan Noon of Republican Pan, was appointed as the Prime
Minister of Pakistan on 12Lh December 1957. He had great experience in the
adminintrative affairs. He worked as the Governor of East Pakistan and Chief
Minister of the Punjab. Before becoming the Prime Minister he worked as the
Foreign Minister in the Central Government. Awami League Party of Hussain
Shaheed Soharwardi had assured its cooperation with his cabinet. But A wami
League had not joined the ministry. Awami League was in power in East Pakistan
and had great influence in East Pakistan and also in West Pakistan.
Feroze Khan oon and Hussain Shaheed Soharward y had ,tgreed that after
the elections Feroze Khan Noon would be the president of Pakistan and Soharwardi
would be the Prime Minister of Pakistan. So President Sikandar Mirza did not like
the collusion of Soharwardi and Feroz Khan oon. With the establishment of Noon
Ministry, he lost grip over the politicians. Disappointed from all sides, Sikandar
Mirza turned towards General Ayub Khan and dissolved the Centeral and
Provincial Assemblies.
4.7 MUHAMMAD AYUB KHAN AS THE PRESIDENT OF
PAKISTAN (October 1956 to March 1969)
The president of Pakistan Sikandar Mirza declared martial law at midnight
on 7 October 1958. He dissolved the Centeral and Provincial assemblies and
th
abolished the Counstitution of 1956. All political activities were prohibited.

Comm ander- in-chief of Pakistan Armed Forces, General Muhammad A)oub Khan
was appointed as Chief Martial Law Administrator. He wanted to have civil
government and martial law at the_same time. _But it was not �ssible. So. General
Ayub Khan removed Sikan�ar Mirza fr�m his office on 27 October 1958, and
a ssumed himself as the president of Pakistan. He was also the Prime Minister of
Pakista n from 24th October to 27'h October 1958.
Prompt Action taken by Ayub Khan
After assuming powers, he took some prompt actions against black.

marketing, bribery and corruption. He �� sever�!� _against politicians and political
org�zations. So he banned all the pohll�al act1v1 t1es. He freezed the accounts
of
Vano us political parties and sealed their offices. Several Chief leaders wer
arrest ed. EBDO was an act wh1. ch basc d many po 1·1t.tca 1 le aders from e
takin� pcpt in
117
1/adl PaH'ilat1 Studle\ for (BS-4 yeun)
future elections. I le was of the \ 1cw that politu.:al lenders were the rool cause of all
the anamolics ol Pakistan o. he decided to deal them \\ 11h an iron hand.
Basic Democracy System
In 1959 Ayub Khan introduced a nev. system of ··Baste Democracies".
.\ccordmg to the system. the people were to elect the member of basic
dcomocracies.
I he total rumber of members of basic democrac) was eight)' thousands (enhanced
to l. 20.000). I on) thousand each from both East and West Pakistan were
m\minatc<l in ti cse democracies. These members formed an electoral college to
d..:<.:t th..: pn::..,1J..:n1 Democracies system setup li,e tiers of mstitut1ons. 1 c (i)
L nion Council and Union Committee. (ii) Tchsil Council and Thana Council
(Thesil coum:il in thl! \\ est Pakistan and Thana council in the East Pakistan). (iii)
District ( tiw1cil. (i,) On isional Council. (v) Pro, incial Council.
Presidential Referendum
In I 960. Ayub Khan held a referendum to get himself selected as the
president of Pakistan. All the members of basic democracies were asked to giw
their opinion. so he was supponed as the president of Pakistan.
The Constitution of Pakistan J 962
8�1ckground
On 7th I cbruary 1960 the President of Pakistan Muhammad A) oub Khan
appointeJ a constitution commission headed by Justice Shahabuddin. Attcr careful
consideration. the commission submitted its report on 6th Ma)' l 96 l . The report of
the commission was examined by several committees. In the hght of its
recommendations, a new constitution was framl'd and implemented on 8th June
I 962. It was framed by a body of men appointed b} the president and \.\3S not
framed b) any elected Assembly. After the imposition of this constltution. Ayub
Khan became the civilian president. The martial law was deposed and Politico!
parties were restored. Ayub Khan himself became the head of Functional Muslim
League and the elections were held for the Provincial and National Assemblies.
Salient features of the constitution 1962

t. Written constitution
The constitution of 1962 was a written document It consisted of �50
Articles and five (5) schedules, (8) amendments and 31 Martial La\, regulauons. It
\\'8S divided into 12 parts.
118
--
2. Fctkr:11 i-ysh•tn 01: �O\ll'rnnu.·n•
,
I h1.' l'lll\stil11lt01\ or 1 1)()) WIIS in kdcrnl l\tlllln:. !"he IW() p111ts or lhc eOllllll)'
1\1.'lr l'iven 1.·q11,ll -;1t1111s. Hoth the provinces had ,111 cqunl 1n1mhl!r ol rcprl!scntmivcs
111 the l · b:h1rul ( olkgc, •10,000 cnch I he powcn, ur the ccntrnl µovcrnmcnt were
l.''-pl11i111.·d 111 the 1.·onstilt1tinn I he rcmainmg pm\cr-. wen; trnnsfc1n:d to the
ptllVlllCl'S,
3. Prcsitk11ti11I system
In the co11st1t11tton ul IW,:. prcs1dc1\t1,il form ol' g_<.)\crnmc11t wn-.
c-.tublishcd. I hi:-. constitution 111tnH.lm:cd u pu,\crtul presidential sysh:m, lhc
pres1ck11t pcrfonn1.:d cxccu11vc !unctions und was solely n:sponsiblc for the
cnuntry's udminbtration. I lowe\.cr. the president could nm he .i mcmhcr of the
lcgisluturt.
-'· Nntional l1111�ua�c
Urdu urh' lkngali both would be the 11atiun ..il l11n!'ll.1g\.'s ot' Pnl-..1swn an<l
I .nglish '"as dcclmul 11s th1: u11icial lung1111�c 111' the country until the 1wtional
lnnguagc ueh1evcd the ortict:tl stulus
S. Ril,!id constitutions
The constitution of 19(,2 wns the rigid umsl1ttttion. I 01 nmc11ume11l m th.:
constitution two third mujority or votes wus nccl.!ssnr) for p.1ssi11g the l\ill. If the
president declined thl.! umcmlmenl. it wus ncccssar') to have it passcd ng,1in h) the
Nutionul ;\sscnihly with II mujority uf thn:c lhurth or the vuks In this
rc-;rcct nlsn the pn:-:icknl wo11ld he 1.•mpmw11.•d lo p1cscnt the matter b\.'1'01\' till'
1 lccto:·:\I ('nlll:g,.· for rcli:n.-11d•1111. irsu lksi1cd.
<,. ('upitnl of the country
l\,o cupituls were prnpo-;cd in the 1.•1mstitutiiH1 or I 9(,.., . I IK· scat ol
Nntt\)l)lll J\ssc.·nil>h W\Hlld bl! al l>11t·1.·11 a11d IIH: (\.•ntr:il (,,1,1.·rn1nc11t \\,n.ld I\\. .H
lsl nmnhud.
7. V eto powers of the president
ii. II' uny luw pusscd by the N11tio11ul A��cn1b,ly ,�us nut . 1c_nl11:.1_l\.·d b� _ th�
1 '\ 1.>I the
president, und thi.: Nnlionnl ,Asselllhly pnsscd tl ugum wllh the rn�qurtly ol
totnl votes, the luw would be trcntcd to hove bc,·n l.!nti�tcd msp,te or tht.• , 1.•to
11\.lwc:·�i of lhl' pi·1.•sidcnt, who wnulu ho,�c, c1· hll\'1..' the n�tht to 1'r1..•scm 1: io llw
d 1 if so dcs1r�,t.
�Hite c:ollcgc 1'111· rcl'c.:rc11 � -• •- aaaw, -i
I llJ
-
f"1di Pakb,ta11 Stutliel for (8S-4 yearl)
for himsell
b. The president could dissolve the National Assembl) and seek
rt:-election.
It was declared in the constitution of 1962 that judiciar) would be free from
a 11 pressures.
9. Fundamental rights
Although, in the beginning, fundamental rights were not mentioned m the
constitution of 1962. Yet on the pressure of the public, these rights like securit) of
their life. propert) freedom of speech and writing etc were given to the people on
I963. These rights were guaranteed; no law could be made in violation of the rights
laid down in the constitution. No department of the government could take any step
against these rights.
10. Unicameral Legislature
In the constitution of 1962, National Assembly would be a single house
legislative bod). There would be a central legislature in the country to be knov.n as
ational Assembly. In both the provinces, there would be Provincial Assemblies
separately.
11. Provincial autonomy
The provinces were given full autonom) in the constitution 1962. The third
schedule of the constitution laid down the list of subject to be dealt with by the
central government. The provincial governments were full) empowered to deal
\\ith those subj_ects which were not included in the third schedule.
12. Indirect Electorate
The government proposed indirect election. For this purpose, an electoral
college was formed consisting the memhers of the basic democracies. The people
would elect directly eighty thousand representatives ( enhanced I, 20,000), who
would elect the president and the member of the National and Provincial
Assemblies.
13. The National Assembly •
According to the constitutions of 1962. the National Assembly was
composed of 156 members. Six seats were reserved for women. All the scats \\ere
equally distributed between the two wings. The normal term of the assembly was
five years.
120
-
Hadi P akista11 St11dle!> for (BS-4 years)
14. Single citizenship

Lik !he co_n s_ titution of 1956, the constitution of 1962 enforced
. . le : Smgl the
prm 1_ � of
c e citizen ship of Pakistna. All the citiz
ens of Pakistan were neither
the c1t1_zens of the East Pakistan or the West Pakistan. Rather they were the citizens
of Pakistan.
Islamic provisions of the constitution 1962
I. Sovereignty
Accordi�g to the constitution of 1962, the sovereignty belongs to Allah
.
Almtghli'.,, exerci se of power through the elected representatives of people .
2. Name of the country
According to the constitution of 1962, Pakistan was named Islamic
Republic of Paki stan.
3. President to be a Muslim
In the con stitution of 1962, it was made compulsory for the president to be
Muslim.
4. Islamic Law
According t o the constit ut ion of 1962 all t he existing law s would be brought
into conformity with Islamic teaching anJ also mentioned in the constitution that
no law will be enforced, which is repugnant to the Islamic teaching.
5. Safety of Islamic institute
It was decided in the constitution of 1962, that the government wou ld
protect all the Islamic institutions like Mo sques, Eid-Gahs, and Shrines.
6. Islamic Research Institute
According to the constitution the govem _ ment �ou l� e�tablish the Islamic
Research Institute to give its opinion regardmg the lslarmc Pnnc1p les.
7. Relation with the Muslim countries
d that th� gove rnm� nt
According to the constitution of 1962, it_ was de�lare
Would establish good relations with other Is lamic countri es for the umty of Mu slim
world.
8. Elimination of Riba
it was mentioned that the
Accordin to the constitutions of 1962,
economy of the country free from
&o
Rj vem • te R'iba and make the
.... t WOUgld e1.tmma
"uuen
...,ha.
• 121
Hadi Pakista11 Studiesfor (BS-4 years) I =
9. Religious and cultural freedom of minorities
According to the constitution of 1962, the rights of minorities would be
protected and would be given complete religious and cultural freedom.
10. Islamic way of life
According to the constitution of 1962, the Muslim would allow to lead their
lives individuaJly or collectively in accordance with the principles of Islam to form
an Islamic society.
1 I. Implementation of Islamic Principles
Islamic Principles like, democracy, freedom, equality, tolerance and social
justice should be implemented in the country.
12. Protection of Islamic traditions
According to the constitution of 1962, government will protect aJI Islamic
traditions and would ban non-Islamic traditions i.e. gambling, publishing of
pomoliterature etc.
13. An Islamic Advisory Council
Jn thb construction an Islamic Advisory Council was set up, which
comprised of such scholars and e.x.perts who were also well conversant with the
country's social, political, legal and administra 1 i, problems besides having a deep
insight into the Islamic Fiqah. Jf there ,1,cre a uoubt as to what was the Islamic
point of view about any matter, Islamic Advisory council could be consulted about
that. It would give its views about the matter to be approved by the cabinet,
whether it is in accordance with Islam or not. But this council would not be
authorized to make any change.
Ayub Khan's Reform

Agricultural and land r:eforms
After taking over the charge of the country Ayub Khan setup commission
for land reforms. Mr. Akbar Hussain was the head of this commission. The
rnmmission presented the first agricultural reforms report in 1959. The details of
agricultural reforms are as foJlow.
122
C
The limit for the� essfoo of tbt �yi ltoral bod

. "
i. ACJ:Or dmg ti1e5C ire,orrr.:5, a pe:-500 �, re-..afo la;-.d t.:p to 500 Acres of
inig.ated or l 000 Acres of -;fri� Land.
2. 1be land in e-/.cess to ti',e pre1eri� lirr.it 1o)a5 to oe iaken mer "'" t.i.e
go, emment for dist:rf ion arr.o.-.,gs fr.:e deserving people.
3. The owners •;,·hose Land oat! been :aci over v.ere � L--iterest bearing
bonds as compensation •,1,ilich ;, ere pa) ai>Ie o\(er a period of 25 years.
4. These agriculturists ;,no
v,ere fa.?JTiing on the la.""Ki already acquire<i ·-,.ere
g;..-en the guarantee of foeir lease periods. And tJ-.:ey were also all◄ .ed .,,.
purchase tile land on pa�ment of price in easy installments.
5. It \J.a:, prohibited to dhide a plot ofland in differ::m pieces.
6. A programme for consolidation v.as also prepared for tile scanered tracts of
land.
teps for the promotion of agriculture
Govt. too other steps for the promotion of agriculture. The details are
given as follow:
Agricultural Dev elopment Corporation
ln order to develop agriculture -Agriculrura.i De�.etopment Corporation..
·�as set up. which was a semi government organization. Its function 1s to pro, tde
hi gh quality seeds to the farmers and educate them to increase their produce and to
J)reServe them from diseases.
Fertilizer factories
To get more produce, high q�1?' of _fertilizer is also necessaI). But in
those days there was a shortage of fertiluer in ,hc: counlr}. So the �?vemm�nt
established two large fertilizer factories in the countr) to produce feruhzer which
made up teh deficiency of the fertilizers to great extent
Agricultural Bank
ide loans. For this
Farmers are usually in dire need of money in order to prov
P\Jrpose agricultural Bank was established.
123
l/11dl Pak/yta11 St11dle, or BS-4 year\')
Agricultural univcr ities

portion of our agricultural
Every year pests destroyed a considerable
them. For research work two
produce. Valuable research work was done to destroy
universities were also established in the country.
� olvcd the canal water dispute
s
In 1960. Ayub government settled the canal water djspute. a famou
agreement of Indus basin treaty was concluded with India.
Industrial reform
General Muhammad Ayub Khan's industrial reforms recommended b)
commission are as follows.
I. Price o( the industrial goods was stabilized through price 01�chanism
which relaxed the control over industrial investment and trade. The
government also removed the compulsion of profit margin and price.
2. It provided incentive to the traders, wholesalers and private investors.
3. Investment procedure was simplified which involved relaxation of
restrictions on the imports and exports.
4. The government placed a number of items on the free list for which no
import license was required for import purposes.
In the light of recommendation of the commission a number of mills of jute
and cotton fabrics were set up in both the provinces of Pakistan, and many goods of
daily use began to be manufactured with in the country e.g. woolen and conon
cloth, soap, product of jute, cigarettes, matches, paper and many other things of
common use.
Hydro electric stations of Warsak and kaptai removed the shortage or
electric power to great extent.
Sui gas provided fuel for the factories in West Pakistan.
The plan for setting up a steel mill was brought under consideration.
A programme was also chalked out to establish more industries in the
country and action was taken to put it into practice, and Pakistan industry made
tremendous progress during this period.
124
-
Hali Pakistan Studies for (BS-4 ,·�ars)
L:Abour Reforms
President of Pakistan General Muhammad Ayub Khan announced an
emergenc) lav. to decide the industrial dispute. And the purpose was that better
arrangements be made for the settlement of industrial disputes between workers
and the entrepreneurs. In those days the mill owners did not recognize the
representative position of the trade union. This hurdle was removed by this law in
1960. Its details are as under.
l. It was decided that the mill-ov.,Tiers should recognize all those unions which
fulfil cenain conditions if they refused to do so the matter was to be brought
before the industrial tribunal.
2. The government fixed the wages of the workers.
3. ln May 1962, a nev. fund was established under a law, out of which
assistance was to be provided to the workers and their families in case of a
worker sustaining injUT), falling ill or an} of his limbs getting disabled.
4. The government compelled the mill-owners to get residences constructed
for their workers and let them out to them on cheap rentals.
5. Government labour directors were appointed in both the provinces that
protected the rights and interests of the workers.
Educational reforms
1. According to the recommendations of the commission new curricula was
complied and the books of new course were written according to the revised
curricula for class I to XII with the help of a number of educational experts
and writers in both the provinces.
2. It was recommended that the primary education would be free and
compulsory up to the 8th class.
3. It was proposed that intermediate classes be included in secondary
education and separated from the colleges.
4. It was also recommended three years degree course with monthly test but
the students' community strongly agitated against the three yeas degree
course and the government withdrew this.
5. It was recommended that English as medium of instruction be replaced
gradually with Urdu.
125
'
I/ad/ Paklvtan Studies fer (BS-4 yearv
6. A number of politechnical institutions were opened in �e con.try �herein

u
the subjects of civil, mechanical, electrical and autom obile engmeenng are
taught. And leather tanning is also taught in these institutions.
Health reforms
The medical education was expanded amazingly in PaJ<lstan. But there
were only two medical colleges in West Pakistan. So, Ayub Khan set up a
commission for improvement of the health sector. This commission recommended
the health reforms which are given below.
1. First of al I Auub Khan established four new medical colleges in Pakistan.
2. Jn large cities like Quetta, Hyderabad and Lahore. Health schools for
training in nursing were also opened.
3. Before Ayub Khan Regime Pakistani student had to go to England. U.S.A.
or other countries for receiving higher education in medicine. So, Ayoub
Khan made arrangements for teaching some basic subjects in Karachi in the
Post Graduate Medical Centre.
4. Many qualified doctors were sent for higher education in the foreign
countries on scholarship under Colombo plan or the World Health
Organization.
Family Laws ordinance 1961
Ayub Khan issued family laws ordinance in 1961. Before this ordinance a
man could marry more than one wife without any written permission to allow
second marriage from hfa first wife. But now. according this ordinance:
1. It was necessary for a man to get a written permission by the first wife to
allow him for second marriage.
2. The minimum marriageable limits were prescribed for males and females.
3. The ex-husband was bound to give maintenance allowance for the divorced
woman (Ex-wife) and her children.
4. All marriages had to be registered with the government.
5. A man, who wants to divorce his wife, will have to go through the union
council for its reconciliatory procedure before the divorce was accepted by
law.
126
1/1111/ l'akl\tatr Studie� for (BS-4 ►·.ears)
Throu�h this ordinanc e. General Ayu

. _ b Khan wanted to improve the status
nf the women m society and curtail the dominant position of
males.
Law of inheritance
. �cf?rc_ this or?in�ce a grandson could not inherit the property of his grand
lathcr, 1f lus lather died m the life time of his father. But throu
gh this la\\. grand
children were made eligible to inherit their grand father's prope
rty even 1f their
father hud died in the life time of their father.
4.8 GENERAL YAHYA KHAN AS THE PRESIDENT OF
PAKISTAN (March 1969 to December 1971)
President Ayub Khan . ruled the country for more than ten years. E\en
though he introduced a number of reforms and countr) also made a great progress
in industry and other fields. Yet his attitude was quite dictatorial. So. the people of
Pakistan started agitations against his regime and the situation became out of
control. Thus the president Ayub Khan resigned from the office and handed over
power to the Am1y Chief, General Yahya Khan, Y.ho abrogated the counstttution
and declared martial law on 25Lh March 1969.
teps taken by Yahaya Khan
New Army Chief General Yahya Khan as_sumed t_he po,�ers of_ Chief
Martial Administrator and announced that he will remain president till the
formation of a democratic government and that he had no aim to retain the po\\er
permanently. So he took the following steps:
l. Ile abrogated the constitution of 1962·
2. Prohibtted all political activities.
3. Dissolved the National and provincial Assemblies.
4. Dismissed the central and provincial cabinets.
5. One unit scheme w as dissolved.
. · were merged in Pakistan as
6. The princely stats o f o 1 r, Swat and Chitral
Malkand Division.
ognized as a province.
7. Baloch1stan
. 1or the fitrst time was rec
"'
to have simple majority for making an)
8. National Assembly was supposed . . y.
ont
-- law instead of having double maJ
127
• • fJladl Pakista11 Studiesfor (BS-4 years)
9. Justices Sajjad Ahmed Jan was appointed as a Chief election commissioner

and directed to proceed with the preparation of electoral rolls and
demarcation of constituencies.
I 0. It was decided that the representation of both parts of Pakistan should be
given on the basis of population. The election policy based on "one man
one vote·· was adopted. So National Assembly was composed of 300 seats
out of these 300 seats J 62 were allocated for East Pakistan and 138 for
West Pakistan on the basis of Population.
The Allocation of Seats for National and Provincial Assemblies
The allocation of seats for National Assembly and Provincial assemblies are
as follows:
r Seats of National Assembly of Pakistan

Sr. No. Description General Seats Women Seats TotaJ Seats
l East Pakistan 162 7 169
2 Punjab 82 3 85
3 Sindh 27 l 28
4 NWFP 18 l 19
5
6
Blochistan
Frontier Areas
. 04
07
I
0
05
07
Total 300 13 313
Seats of Provincial Assemblies of Pakistan
Sr.No. Description General Seats Women Seats Total Seats
I East Pakistan 300 10 310
2 Punjab 180 6 186
3 Sindh 60 2 62
4 NWFP 40 2 42
5 Blochistan 20 1 21
Legal Frame work order (LFO) 1970
General Yahya Khan, the president of Islamic Republic of Pakistan announced a
Legal Frame work order to hold General Elections in I 970. The salient features of
the LFO are as under.
i. Availability of basic rights to citizens of Pakistan and the guarantee for
these rights through courts.
128
/Judi Pak/stun Stutile!! fur (BS-4 years)
ii Distribution of subjects between centre and the prO\ ince!:> m such a ,,a) as
to meet the <lemand of provincial autonomy and simultaneously gi,mg to
the centre total power m financial and defence affairs
iii. 1 o eliminate econom ic non-equalit) between the pro, mces through la,\..
iv. To abide b ) the democratic prmc1ples and elections on the basis of ad ult
franchise.
v. To make it binding on the new elected assembl) to prepare a ncv.
constitution for Paki stan '" 1th m 120 days If It '"as not possible. the
assembly would stand dissolved automaticall).
General Elections 1970
In December I 970, General Yahya Khan held the general elections in the
�hole co untr) on the basis of adult franchise. f-or the firs time general elections
were held in the whole cou ntry. Elections of Nattonal assembly were held in th
December 1970 and provincial assembl) in 171h December 1970. EH:r) bod) gave
his vote to a candidate of his own liking and those elections were held to a great
extent freely and justly.
Elections Manifesto of Political Parties
All the political leaders welcomed the dec i sion of the militaI) go,emment
to hold general elections. After then all the pohucal parties issued election
manifestos and their leader s toured both the wings extensivd) to '"in the people
over to their side.
Elections Monifesto of Al' ami League
Uections monifesto of sheikh M uj1-ur-Rehrnan of Awami league was six. po i nts
formula which was aimed at drasticall) curtailing the federal authorit) ,md
converting Paki stan into a loose confeder�tion. Awam1 league launched us
campaign on the bas is of the rights of East Pakistan.
Elections of Monifesto of Pakistan Peoples Part)
lulfiqar Ali Bhutto of Pakistan Pe?ples _Party highlighted the :.conomic i�su;s of
e of Pak1s�an. (Rot i . Kapra
Pakistan and promi sed the economic uplift of the peopl
and Makan) was the slogan of Pakistan people' s party. Zulfiqar Ah Bhuno ga,e th�
four-fold slogan:
1. Islam is our Faith.
2. Democracy is our polity.
129
3. Socialism is our economy.

4. All power to the people.
His economic programme and the slogan e.i. Roti, Kapra and Makan
captured the mind of the people of West Pakistan.
Result of Elections
Awami League, the party of Shaikh Mujeeb-ur-Rehman, won 167 out of
169 seats (including seven seats of women) from the East Pakistan in the General
Election of 1970. Noor-ul-Amin and Tridev Roy (The Buddhist Leader) were the
only two non Awami League members. While in West Pakistan the People's Party
of Zulfiqar Ali Bhutto got clear majority by winning 86 out 144 seats (including
five seats of women). The remaining seats were won by the other political parties.
Conflict of power created a new situation in the country.
Results of the National assembly won by different political parties are as
follows
Political Party East Pakistan Puniab Sindh NWFP Belochistan Total
Awami League 160 0 0 0 0 160
Pakistan People's 0 62 18 I 0 81
Partv
O.M.L. (Qayyum G.) 0 I I 7 0 9
C.M.L. 0 7 0 0 0 7
J.U.I. 0 0 0 6 1 7
J.U.P. 0 4 3 0 0 7
N.A.P. 0 0 0 3 3 6
J.I. 0 1 2 1 0 4
Convention M.L 0 2 0 0 0 2
P.D.P. I 0 0 0 0 l -
Independent l 5 3 7 0 16
Total 162 82 27 25 4 300 _
Conclusion
The result of the elections made it clear that the future of Pakistan would
depend on whether Sheikh Mujib-u-Rehman and Z.A Bhutto could · reach an
agreement on the shape of the constitution, which would also be acceptable to
General Y ahya Khan. Some of the observers considered the elections "a significant
and successful first step towards the restoration of civilian government.''But th,,;.
130
ele ction results added a new dimension to the problem of East and West Pakistan
relations.
Distressing side of the Elections 1970
Mr. Z.A Bhutto went to Dhaka on 26 January 1971. He held talks with
Mujib and other Awami league leaders and tried to bring them around his point of
view on the framing of the future constitution of Pakistan. Awami league
leadership refused to accept his proposals and announced that none would be able
to stop us from framing a constitution on the basis of six point programme.
The president Yahya Khan called the session of the National Assembly at
I slamabad on the 3rd March 1971. But Bhutto demanded the postponement of
assembly session and also waiving of the 120 days limited for framing the
constitution. In a threatening tone he declared that he would launch a great
movement if the session of the National Assembly was held without his Political
Party. So, on the 1 st March 1971 he postponed the assembly session on the plea that
as the larges.t party from West Pakistan was not willing to attend the session and
said that the postponement would enable the politicians to arrive at some
agreement.On the same day Mujib-ur-Rehman declared in a public gathering at
Dacca that a movement for civil disobedience would be started as the government
did not want to transfer power to the majority party.
Civil Dis-obedience Movement
On 2nd March 1971 Sheikh Mujib-ur-Rehman launched civil disobedienc e
movement. Blood shedding, non-coopration, refusal to pay taxes, demonstration of
strikes, b�ycott of courts and not going of officials to their respective job places
became the daily routine. So, the administration was paralyzed by the show of
street power by the A wami League.
In a procession the Bangalies of awami league burnt the flag of Pakist an
and portrait of Quaid-e-Azam and adopted a slogan �or independent Ba�gladesh.On
rd
23 March 1971 Sheikh Mujeebur Rehman hoisted the flag of independent
Bangladesh at his residence and established a parallel government with the
unla wful help of I ndia. Then the situation of law and order in the East Pakistan was
out of control for the government of Pakistan.
R.eaction of the Government
On 26th March 1971 the president addressed the nation and told as to why
mi1itary operation had become unavoidable.Afterward he ordered the military to
131
Awami League had been
1110\c 0111and re· tort" law and order.All the activities of' arreSled.
ha1111cd aml a numhc.:1 of its lem.h.:rs includinv. Mujib-ur-Rchman were
�lC(>N taken hy government during Military Operation
1· irst of all the tc,IJowing steps were taken by the government
I. Arms from the Baltahon of East Pakistan regiment were taken.
2. Io defend th1,; cantonments.
J. Security for Chittagong port.
4 Control of air bases
5. Defence of cities and towns.
With the launching of military action against Awami League the authorit)
of the government was restored. But a large number of Bengalis. mostl) Hindus
crossed over to India. ·1he massive inllux of refugees into Indian Territory provided
a pretext to India to exploit the issue on the international level.
Tikka Khan as Governor of Ea,t Paki'ltan
On 7th April, 1971 General Tikk� Khan ""a:, appointed as Governor of East
Pakistan to control the situation. First of all he appealed to all persons believing in
one Pakistan to restore peace. But Pakistan Anny and patriotic volunteers had a
number of clashes with the mischief-mongers in East Pakistan and the situation
continued to worsen everyday.
Indian Interference
India was fully supporting Awami League and sending its miscreants to
East Pakistan who combined with the workers of Mukti Bahni killed Pakistani
soldiers and ordinary citizens. Thousands of citizens of East Pakistan migrated
towards India. On 27 March. 1971 a discussion took place on the events in East
Pakistan in the Indian parliament. On the 31)l March, 1971 Mrs. Indra Gandhi
declared that India would not keep quiet on the events in East Pakistan. Indian
Prime Minister claimed that the influx of millions of refugees from East Pakistan
threatened to undermine Indian political, economic stability. and demanded the
return of refugees to their homes. Indian government exploited the issue on the
international level. It also provided India a chance to interfere in the internal affairs
of Pakistan under the mode of helping the Bengalies and freedom fighters.
132
111111/ 1111/il\11111 St111lle\ or IJS-4 eur\
lndo-Pak-War 1971
In Novcmhl.!r, 1971 Indian Army began crossing the border of cast Pabst.an
und helped Mukti Bahini to launch attacks on Pakistan Army. In this connection
Pakistan immediately drew the attention of the Security Council to the military
intervention of lndia in Pakistan and lodged protests also. On 3 rd December 1971 a
full scale war broke out on the West Pakistan. On this Mr. Laichui Ching. the
Chinese delegate in the United Nations declared that China would give help to
Pakistan as at that time Pakistan alone was facing India and Russia and was
successfully repulsing their severe attacks. Turkey, Jran anct almost all the Islamic
countries also supported Pakistan whole heartedly.
On 8 1h December, 1971 United Nations General Assembly passed a
resolution with a heavy majority of 104 votes asking India and Pakistan to stop the
war immediately and to recc41l their armies to their own borders and to return the
war affected persons. Pakistan accepted this resolution immediately. But India
refused to accept this resolution. Foreign Minister of India announced in the
assembly that cease fire between India and Pakistan would be meaning-less unless
the representatives of Bangla Desh were also made to join the agreement. The
members of Security Council had started consultations among themselves since
I1 1h December 1977. According to the Bamayun Adeeb, in his book •'foreign
policy of Pakistan" (Urdu Eddition), in the meantime, a few days _before the war
Mr. Z.A Bhutto was nominated as the vice premier and foreign Minister of
Pakistan. So he went to New York as foreign Minster of Pakistan on J oth
Decem ber, There he made consultations with the delegates of USA and China in
the United Nation. But for some reasons the session of the Security Council could
not be held on l i h December. The Russian delegate wanted to gain. time to
continue the deadlock till such time as the Indian Army entered Dacca. On the
other hand , situation in West Pakistan was getting worse every minute.
On J 5 1h December 197 J the session of Security Council was held again. But
the members of the council instead of considering the war, began consulting one
another 011 the point. On this 13�utto was _very much frustrated. When Poland
moved a resolution in the Secunt y Council for cease fire betwee n India and
Pakistan, Mr. z.A Bhutto did not accept it and tore down the agenda of the Security
Council and walked out of the Assembly.
Ile paused for a short while at the_ main gate and told the newsmen that if
need be Agha Shahi could represe nt Pakistan, and that he would go back to hi i
�untry to continue the war. Mr. Z.A. Bhutto declared in the Assembly wh�
133
llflt/1 l'flk/\/(111 S11u/le\ jor (IJS-4 yetm)
swging thc wulk-out that the Security Council hml failed to �omc up lo the
l!Xpcctations of the people of' l'ukiswn.
/\ meeting of the Security Council wus held the swnc night in which lnd1u11
foreign Minister Sarcfor Swu1n Singh read out a lellcr lro111 the prime minister CJI'
India, in which it wm, slated that India would stop fighting on the Western front U'l
soon as 13angladcsh had been libcrutcd. lie ulso told the Security Council that strict
orders had been issued 'to Indian forces to treat wm prisoners in accordance with
C,cncva Convention. Afier listening to the letter from the Inc.Ihm Prime Minister, the
session or the Security Council was postponed. So the Security Council could not
wkc any step. as the city of Dacca was actually captured by India.
On 16th 01.:ccmhcr 1971 Indian forces entered Dacca and ()enernl Ni,11i signed the
Surrender Agreermmt. Eventually India succeeded in achieving her objectives and
I�ast Pakistan appeared on the map of the world with the name of Oangladcsh on
16th December, 197 l. President General Yahya Khan {lddrcsscd the Nation on the
radio, in which he said, "Retreat on one front docs not mean that fighting has
stopped. War with India is still continued and our resistance would continue till the
end of the aggression by India".
Causes of Separation of East Pakistan
The causes of separation of East Pakistan are as follows:
J Unique Geographical Feature of Pnkistan
Pakistan had � unique geographical feature. It consisted of two separate
blocks territory. East Pakistan was not only separated geographically from West
of
Pakistan by more than one thousand miles i.e. 1600 km, both India and a sea also
between them. India from the day one did not recognize Pakistan's existence.
Hindu leaders gave statements that it was a temporary division and very soon
Pakistan will come into Tndian fold again.
2. Provincial Prejudices
The people of East Pakistan were 56% of the total population of Pakistan.
East Pakistan was one of the five provinces of Pakistan but the politicians of East
Pakistan demanded their representation in the National Assembly according to the
proportion of their population. The politicians of East Pakisan and West Pakistan
stood against each other on this issue. It caused the partition of the country into two
parts.
134
Hadi PaJ..isran tudiesfor (BS-4 years)
3. Different life style in united Pakistan

In the united Pakistan, national life�tyle was different in both the parts.
.
besides colour and habits. Leadership of \'f1.:st Pakistan was land lord while the
BangaJies \\ ere led by middle class Lawyers, professors and retired officials. 1n the
�econd Constituent Assembly, out of forty (40) members from West Pakistan,
T\\enty Eight (28) were land lords and Dukes Whereas East Pakistan was
represented by Twenty (20) lawyers and nine retired officials. None of the Bengali
�lembers of the ational Assembly was a land lord.
4. Incompetent Leadership
After the death of Quaid-e-Azam there was no political leader who could
lead or guide the nation in the hours of crisis.The lack of popular national
leadership on either side created a sense· of deprivation among the people of East
Pakistan.
5. Control of Hindus on Trade and Services
In East Pakistan trade and services were totally under the control of Hindus.
At the time of partition, Hindus owned nearly 80% of the national wealth of East
Bengal. Although. the Hindus comprised not more than 25% of the East Bangal
Population. Yet they used to earn from her: and sent the wealth to West Bengal and
Calcutta where their relations had settled. While goods were also smuggled to
Calcutta. In the East Bengal most of the government officers, lawyers and almost
aJI the doctors and teachers were Hindus.
6. Economic Degradation
The economy of a country is the backbone of a country's development and
social status. T he people of Bengal expec_ ted_ an improveme�t in their general
condition after independence. But the s1tuat1on was �ppos1te. Economy was
completely controlled by the Hindus. Near!! all the cons1derable landow�ers �d
most of the heads of business firms were Hindus. But government of Pakistan did
not pay a y attention to promote the economic activity in the backward areas of
East Paki:tan . This created a sense of deprivation amongst the local people that led
to the separation of East Pakistan.
7. Nagative Role of Hindus Teachers
• was totally under the control of Hindus.
Educauon sector in East Pakistan · · · ·
70 of educationa
N'i nety fi1ve percent (95o") • l mst1tut
1on 1.e 1290· H'1gh schoo I s and 47
S o, under the gui'dance of Ind'1a they
coll
_ eges were pnva • tely organized by Hindus.
135
lulh PlHSlllWd thl' 1 111mb ,,t th,• lh-11��1111, 11µ,11111,1 1'11�1•,11111 11 1 1d p1\·p111\·d 1lw111 111
rd·wt n�11111s1 thl' nk11h1�, ,,t 11 11\-1,11111 ( )11 th,• ,,1h,•1 h1111d tlw "''' ,·1 111111·111 111
l'ubmn 1!11h:d 1,, 1·1,•1111• th1.• :-.tpnt ,,t l'u\-1,11111 1111t11H11d1,111, ,,, 11 p11, ,·d th,· "'" 1 111
µ,1.•t1 Ill� s1,.•p111 lll 11111 I l\ Ill I \\' 1•st I '11\- 1st1111
N. i\nti l'u�i,hm IUt•rntnn•
In l .1st P111'1s1t111, \1111 Pn\...lstc111 l1t1•111t111,· "''' s11111p.p.kd 111 1 1 11 l11d1,1
\1'l'lH'<.hn� 11, 11 "'1'1\\'I s1tbn11tll•d "' l 'h,,Hdht) h1h1111111111d \It. tlw 1'1 1111,· l1111sll'r
111' 1>11t...ishll\, stut,·d thnt \'111'111' l'111111111111i:-:1 ht,•1111\11"· rnltltin1,·d th1,111�h l '11111.1.
H11rm11. 1111d lndw l'11uld b,· s1\·11 ,,, l'I) "h1.•1\' 111 1•11 h:s, 1,•slt1111 :mt, 11ml p11bl ll' pl,1,·r,
I h,· communist, hml 1 11\'l' hund 1,, ,·t •nil· 1.•11111i1s1n11 und tlw kdi11rs ,,1 h,11,rd
9. LnnJ!tu\�t.• is11nt•
l 1mg11ng,• iss111.· b llf 111,· nwst imp,11 t1111t t111•h11s, "l11d1 ,,,,, 1.·d p1.•111111111·111
Sl'�ds or mbtrnsl 111\ll bitll'IIH.'SS b,·t" l'l'II tlw p,·,ipk \If l':tst 1111d \\ ,.:sl l' u k 1s11111 In
Ft•htttM) I l).H� n l ltmht 11wmbt·r th,m Fust l'nkh,t,111 Ii nh11\c't1d1 ,111nth nuu.
mon:d nn 1111\l'llllttwnt tn tlw l \>nsticm.'1\t ,\s�,·mbl) pkad111µ that lkn�uh llttl\ ,thl1
b� mmk olfo.·ml hm�.nmµ1.• l'lw n11wnd11\1.'11t l'l'1.':ltl:d u n n b1.'I\H•1.·n 1lw p1.·,,pk ,,t
Pt1kist11n. ·1 his 1.·11us1.•d �1'l',1t 11.·s1.·11tt1wnt nm! wn· :-l11,n ti 111,1\- th1.• slmp'-' l,r II pl,hltl'ill
UHl\t'tl\l.'111. \lthl'lll'h l,mgu l�l.' ISS\ll' \\IIS I ·s,,IH·d 111'dl'I th1.· l'l'll�tlt\llHlll ,,r 1'h(1
and I 9(>� but ,t hnd l't\'!lll'd II s,·us1.• ,,r lkprn 1111,,n 111\lllllµ th 1.• p1.•,1pk ,,r \ .1:-1
Pnt...istnn.
l 0. llispnrit) in th,• l'h ii �t•n il'\' nud 1u·mt•tl fon•t•s
P�oph.• l)t' l•ttst Pul..ish1n '"-'T\.' ,11:-.,, d1.•uumdin� pnrit) in thl." d, ti s1.•n k,·� .11,d
nrmt·d for1.·t•s. In I 964 th1.•n.· "l."tl." ,,nt t\\ ,, B1.•ng 1h 1.1tlk1.·1·s wh,l h1.•ld thi: r.mt... ,,r
ncting Sl'Cl'\. 'tnril·s. \\'hl."r1.•t1s in 19b) th1.'I'\.' wns 1.,11I) l'll1.' majM g1.'l\l."r:1l th,m Fast
Pnl..istnn out of s1.'\ 1.•11h.·1.•11 gl."n1.•ml:-.. rtms 1,, t\.'lllll\1.' tl1'.' db:p,1rit) g1.1, l."nlllll."lll
intro�hu.:-t·d qm11n S) st1.'m.
11. Vitl'uum of politil'nl kiufrrship in 1,�nst Pnkishua
Mid si,tv h; th� l'rtt or ,·nl'1.•um 1.1f pl)litkul knd,•1-ship in Fnst P.,kist.111
Soht·niworJ) nn�I Fn111l-l."-l lmt "�I'l' lknd. Dul." tl, lud, of Chrismt\lk kt1dc1- ship.
�t•nsc of frustration was pr'l'vuiling in thl." l."0\1t\l1'). lh�y "imtcd a kudcr, "h1.l 1.'lml�.
tukc their tn,k of nntionulism mid de fond thdr expk1ited rights. '\1, luj ih tilled tht�
gnp by bringing "ix Point Fornmlt, ns tht> lust nuil in th� Clltfo1 ,.)f unitl."d Pukisrnn
nnd the only rny 1.)f hope for lkngnlis.
!Jo
/lad/ Paki�ra11 Studic!\ Jor (BS-4 1•ettr\}
12. Agartala Conspiracy case

Aga:1ala conspirac) case was d1�closed 111 January. I 968.
About thirty five
(35)_ cons?1rators v.ere announced by the go\em
ment. In the beginning East
Pakistan I ully condemned the conspirators and demanded examplary
punishment
for them. But "'-hen Mujib·s name was included. about fifteen days after the
conspiracy \Vas un�anhed. it created doubts He was already behind the bars and
people questioned as to how he could participate m the conspiracy being himself in
prison. The people of East Pakistan were convinced that it was another attempt to
continue the dependency ol Last Y.ing over the West and. therefore. the movement
for autonom) gamed impetus under extreme political pressures. Ayub Khan had to
release Mujibur Rehman.
13. Short-sighted and power hungry
hon-sighted and power hungry leaders ruined the nation·s interests.
Dismemberment of Pakistan was caused by their power hungry leaders from West
and East Pakistan.
14. Sub-standard goods were sold in East Pakistan
Sub standard goods were sold from West Pakistan to East Pakistan at
double Price. East Pakistan �as not allowed to deal directly with an)' neighboring
countries.
15. Six Points of Sheikh Mujib-ur-Rehman
The Six Points Formula was onginally announced m I 966
th
and amended m
J 970. It strengthened the movements against Pakistan On 10 • January. I 972 m
Dacca, Mujib said. ··J had been working,,for the independence for the last twenty
live years. Now my dream has come true.
16. G eneral Elections of 1970
on
The General elections were held in 1970 �fter electio� the whole situati
of East Pak .1stan wa5 changed · Absolute majonty of Awam1 League under the
· ·
leadership of Sheikh Mujib-ur-Rehman changed the mode of thmkmg of the
people.
Hijacking o f G anga Aerop
lane
l 7.
. .. Ganga Aeroplane an<l sent it to Lahore. It put all the
�n?1_a h1Jacked. her .own
r��po�s1b1hty of this h1Ja . ckin on Pakistan. Aftcrv.ards, India pretended the
_ . ation wtth Pakistan. It was nothing but a
htJackmg. disc onnected aenaI c�mmunic
137
/lad/ PaAl�ta11 Stutli�for (BS-4 ye11n)
conspirac; prepared for the separation of I a�I Puk1'>l,111. /\ftc1 lhcn ,1111,d li11!,
between the two parts was suspended I he sc11d111g of ,1111i:1111cnls to 1�111;1 Pu� 1st1111
was stopped \\hich made 11 1mposs1blc to h111nt.h 111ili1,11y acli1111 in 1i111t·.
18. Indian Interference
India had a constant wish to weaken lhc 111lcgrily of Paki�t.111 Jin one 1c11so11
or the other. Indian Prime Minister Indra Gamlhi undc, the p1ctcncc oJ' tht· s:dcty of'
her borders against the terrorists Mukll 8uh111 111 I ast Palrn,t,111 alt.il h·d l·:1s1
Pakistan. The Pakistan Anny had to face dl'fcat because tlwrc ww, 11<> ,u.:iiul
protection. Pakistani soldiers had to surrender und the cmmll) wu1; put tit10lll'd
4.9 ZULFIQAR ALI BHUTTO AS TIIE l'RESIIH:NT OF
PAKISTAN (December 1971 to August 1973)
On 20 1h December, 1971 Yahya Khan stepped down Imm the pos1t1011 uJ'thc
president and Chief Martial Law administrator in favour of Mr. /.A Bhullo Mr.
Bhutto took over the office of the president of Paksitan as well us Chier Martllll
Law administrator. It was an unusual thing that a c1" ilian wus a Mi.11uul lav,
administrator. At that time the country was fac111g the worst crisis I he scparu11011
of East Pakistan, and the demolition of LFO were the inherited problems lor the
new government.
4.10 THE CONSTITUTION OF 1973
Background
On 14 1h April, 1972 an interim constitution Vvas approved h> the Nnt1011ul
Assembly to run the affairs of the country. On 17' 11 April 1972 the Nutionul
Assembly appointed a committee of twenty live mcmhers of Nallonul /\sscmhl)
Vv ith the task of framing the future constitution of the country. Murtml luw wus then
abolished. The committee presented its rccommmend ..111011s in the Nuuon.,1
s
Assembly on 31 ' Desember 1972.This Assembly discussed the com,tilullon 111
1h
detail and approved it with certain amendment on I 0 April I 973and assented to the
President on I 2nd April 1973.The Constitution was promulgated on 14 August
th
1973. The salient features of the constitution of 1973 arc as follows:

�
Salient Features of the Constitution 1973
1. Written Constitution
into
The constitution of 1973 is in written form huving 280 Arti<:h.:s divided
12 parts and it also includes six schedules. _
138
=--
2. Federal System of Government

According to the constitution federal system was introduced in the country.
The federation of Pakistan consists of four provinces, federal capital and some
tribal areas which are called FATA (Federally Administered Tribal Areas. The
constitution has enumerated the powers of the federal government in the federal
legislative list and powers which the federal and provincial legislature share
together in the concurrent list of subject. AID the residuary powers not mentioned in
the two lists. are left to the provinces that are autonomous in the exercise of these
residuary powers.
3. Parliamentary form of Government
The constitution of 1973 has a parliamentary form of government. The
president is the head of the state, while the prime Minister is the head of the
Government. The prime Minister and his cabinet are accountable to parliament of
Pakistan, elected by the people. The president is elected by the parliament and the
provincial assemblies, whereas the Prime Minister is elected by a majority in the
National Assembly.
4. Bicameral Legislature
The Federal Legislature is a bicameral legislature, consisting of a national
assembly, the lower House and a senate. the Upper House of parliament. The
provinces have been given; equal representation in Senate and it is a permanent
house. Its tenure is of six years.
5. Basic Rights
-In the constitution of 1973 Basic rights were given to the people of Pakistan
i.e. Security of Person, freedom of association. Freedom of movement, freedom of
tr ade, freedom of speech, Freedom of religion, protection of property rights etc.
The parliament and provincial Assemblies do not make any law that negates any
fundamental right.
6. National Language
age of
According to the constitution Urdu was declared the National langu
be made to impleme nt the
Pakistan. I n a peno · d of fifteen years arrangements. will.
status of l::Jrdu as the official language. Dming this penod Eng1·1sh w1·11 b e used as
th e official Language. This could not be possible so for.
139
7. �rmi Ri�1d Comtitution
I he constitu11un l,t' 1971 1-.. fairly ri�:'i<l h<.·cuusc unckr its article 23<J. It can
he amcnd1:d onh h\ two-th i rd \utes of 1hc towl memhcr hip of the 'ntional
t\sscmhh and th�n thl! sl!natc ':ihould puss thl! ,1mcmlmerll hill hy n majority of Its
tot.ii mc1;1bc:rship. l he method of amendment 1s neither too <liHicult nor too easy.
X. lndcpcndcnt .Judiciu11
In the conslltullon of 1973 JU<l1c1a1y was dcdari.:d fully indcpcn<lcm and
free from ull pressures. A guarantee has bl!en prov i ded for an independent
_1ud1c1al") rhe Judges are pa i d handsome salar i es and they have job security. lbe
jud1ctal) has been separated from the executive. 1 he judges will perfo rm their
Julies v. 1thout any fear or pressure.
9. Directh e Principle of Policy
The embodiment of directive principles of policy of the state is another
<lemocrat1c frature of the constitution of 1973. According to the constitution it is
the responsibility of each organ and authority of the Pakistan state to act in
accordance with these principles. These principles relate to observance of Islamic
,, a} of life. promotion of local government institutions, to discourage paroch i al and
other similar prejudices, to enable women participate fully in national life. to
protect the rights and interests of the minorities, to eradicate social e\1ls. and to
promote social and economic well-being of the people of Pakistan.
10. Permanent constitution
The constitution-1973 has been provided with its stubilit} nnd pem1anenc e.
It declares that obedience to the constitution is the basic obligation of c,el) cmzen
of Pakistan. It further declares that any person who abrogah!s or consp i res to
abrogate, or conspires to subvert the constitution by use of force or b} an} other
unconstitutional means will be guilty of high treason
t 1. Province Autonomy
Pakistan shall form a federation wherein the units w i ll be autonomous v.ith
such boundaries and limitations on their power and authority as may be desc bed.
. � hts.
I he integrit} of the territories of the federation, its independence and all its ng
including its sovereign rights on land, sea and air should be safeguarded.
140
/Jut/I Pu/..hla11 \'tuclle�for (BS--11•eanJ
12. upremacy of Constitution

If an) person abrogates the constitution or tries to abrogate it. he will be
cha rg ed v.1th high treason and the pcnalt) will be death.
Islamic Pro" i ions of the Constitution 1973
1. overeignty of Allah
According to the constitution-I973, sovereignty all over the universe
belongs to Allah and power 1s a trust to be exercised by the elected representatives
of the people.
2. ame of the Country
In the constitution-I 973, Pakistan is declared an Islamic Republic of
Pakistan and it also signifies that Pakistan is an Islamic welfare state.
3. Definition of Muslim
According to the constitution-I 973, the Muslim is one who believes in the
oneness of Allah, the finality of the prophet-hood of Hazrat Muhammad (SAW),
Oi,·ine books and the day of judgement.
4. President and Prime Minister to be Muslim
According to the constitution, it is made compulsory for the President and
Prime Minister to be Muslim.
S. Official Religion
According to the constitution-1973 Islam shall be the state religion of
Pakistan.
6. Error free Printing of Quran
According to the constitution the state shall be responsible to secure correct
and exact printing and publishing of the Holy Quran.
7. Enforcement of Islamic Law
According to the constjtution of 1973 all the existing laws will be brought
into confomlity with Islamic principles and no law will be enforced, which is
repugnant to the teachings of Islam.
.·
141
j
1/(l{I/ Pnkl,u111 Stmllesfor (BS-4 years) ....
8. Islamic Values
It was declared in the constitution-197 3, the Islamic principle s like
dcmocrac). 1:reedom. equality and social justice will be implemented and these
Islamic values will be the main objectives of the constitution.
9. Compulsory the Islamic studies and of Quran
According to the constitution the teaching of Quran and Islamic studies will
be made compulsory in schools and colleges.
10. Teaching of Arabic
Teaching of Arabic will be compulsory from 6th to 8th class in school.
11. Islamic Society
According to the constitution 1973, the government will be responsible for
providing them Islamic atmosphere in the country so that people should spend their
lives according to Islamic Principles i.e. the Holy Quran and Sunnah to fonn an
Islamic society.
12. Completion of Prophet-hood
According the constitution of 1973 a person who does not believe in Hazrat
Muhammad (SAW) as the last prophet of God will not be a Muslim. So especiall)
in the constitution Qadyanies have been declared non-Muslim.
13. Protection of Rights of Minorities
According to the constitution of 1973, the rights of minorities will be
protected. They will have complete religious and cultural freedom.
J 4. Safety of Islamic Institution

In the Constitution 1973, it was declared that the government would take
steps for the protection of Islamic Institutions like, Auquaaf, Mosques, Shrines, Eid
Gahs etc.
JS. Zakat andUshar
According to the constitution of 1973, system of Zak.at and usher was
introduced in the country by establishing the Zak.at councils.
142
"'·
,. Eliminution of Riba
Accord111g to the C'onstitut1on of 1973, the government will elimin,He Riba
nnd m nk.c thl.! economy or the country free from Riha.
17. Rclntion, "ith the Islamic Countries
/\ccordrng to the Constitution of 1973 the government will establish good
n:luti ons with other l�lurnic countries for the unity of the Muslim world.
18. hlumic Ideology Council
According to the Constitution-1973 the government will establish the
lslmnic ideology Council, which will guide the legislature to make the laws in
1.1ccordance with Islamic teachings and bring the existing laws into the conformity
"1th Islum.
Zulfiqar Ali Bhutto as the Prime Minister of Pakistan (August 1973 to July
1977)
On 14111 August, 1973 after making the Constitiution of 1973 Mr. Zulfiq.ir Ali
Bhutto became the Prime Minister and Mr. Fazal-e-Elahi becam the pre5ident of
Palistan. The major achievements in the reign of Zulfiqar Ali Bhutto are :is
follows:
I. Restoration of the pride of the country after the separation off· ust Pakistan.
2. 1 he Shimla Agreement with India in 1972 and reco'ver) of 95 thousand
prisoners from Indian custody.
3. During Arab, Israel war in 1973 Pakistan cooperated with the Arabs. This
co-operation raised the status of Pakistan in the Arab world.
4. I lolding Islamic Summit in 1974 at Lahore in Pakistan, which ensured the
political economical and social interactions with the Arab world.
5. The expedition of the Atomic programme after India bt:came Atomic power
in 1974. I le felt the urge of Pakistan for being an atomic power.
Reforms of Zulfiqar Ali Bhutto
. The Prime Minister of Pakistan Mr. Zulfiqar Ali Bhutto introduced refor ms
10 various fields in order to improve the economic condition of the country. These
ref_orm s were recommended by the commissions set up by 2.A. Bhutto
these were
headed by eminent persons bea ring highest qualifications in their ow11.
143
Hadi Pakistan Studie�for (BS-4 year<,) 2¾,
Industrial Reforms
On 2 nd January 1972. Government issued an ordinance. Under this
ordinance ten general industries were taken over b} government and cancell�d all
the industrial sanctions. According to Rafi-ullah in his book, "Year of Pakistan··
..1 wenty big industrial concerns in the country were nationalized on January 1972.
The main purpo se of nationalizing the big industrial concerns was to rehabilitate
the national economy.'' On 6th January 1971 the Board of Directors of these large
industries and managing bodies of such industrial concerns were dismissed. On the
other hand the government nationalized a few significant industries such as iron.
steel, heav} engineering, heavy electrical engineering, automobiles assembly and
manufacture of spare parts, tractor-making factories, chemical plants, cement
industry. production of electricity for Public use. distribution oil and gas refineries
etc. Later. on 16th January 1971 through another order government took over 11
other industrial units.
Import of the motor cars and tractors was banned and it was emphasized
that for public use trucks and Buses would be imported. On the other hand tractor
making industr) was developed. For this purpose suflicient raw material and
technical experience was available with in the country.
On 18 th February 1972, the government set up a board of lndustnal
Management (BIM). The function of this Board was to take care of those thirry-two
industries which v.ere taken over by government under the economic reform:.
orders. It included the function of the BIM that keeping in view the national
requirements, some new patterns and methodology of the economic development
should be designed. ln the second phase of nationalization. the government had to
take over the cotton, sugar and cooking oil industries because of hoarding.
Labour Policy
Mr. Zulfiqar Ali Bhutto announced a new labour policy on February 10.
1972. The purpose of that policy was to create cordial relations between the
workers and the entrepreneurs and to safe-guard the rights of the workers.
Rafiull ah Shahab writes in his book, "50 years of Pakistan''. The new labour
policy deprives the factory owners to dismiss any labourer. They were asked 10
arrange for the proper education of the children of the workers. Workers we re not
given representation in the management of the factori�, 6% profit of the factories
was reserved to be spent on the welfare of the workers. Old age pension was a\sa
144
Hadi Paki.5tan Studier for (BS-4 years)
in troduced for them." The salient features of Bhutto government's Labour policy
were as follows:
l. In the management of the industrial concern workers were given, at factory
level. 20% effective representation and they were also given the right to
appoint their own auditors to audit the accounts, to inspect a store or a
facto!) or its record.
2. The share of the workers in the annual profit was enhanced from 2% to 4%
and in the case of increased production l 0% of the excess profit was fixed
for the workers as bonus, payment of which was to be made either in cash
or in the shape of IT units.
3. The industrial was made responsible to educate one child of each worker
and the expenses for the education of other children were to be paid by the
government. This did not however, apply to those industrial units where
similar incentives were already in existence.
4. Two percent deduction from the salaries of the workers was discontinued
and the contribution of the entrepreneur was enhanced from 4% to 6%.
5. Every worker was made eligible to receive pension in his old age.
6. In case of death or accident life insurance was made compulsory.
7. The scope of working council was enlarged and this was entrusted with the
responsibility of settling all matters, and it was also made compulsory to
explain reasons for it in writing as this matter related to the investigation by
the labour court.
8. The principle of encouragement of making federation of union on the basis
of industries and forming federation at national level was accepted.
By that labour policy, above all, to allow old age pension to workers was
the unique and matchless decision of its nature in all the labour policies through out
the world.
Educational Reforms
On J 5 th March t 972, Mr. Zulfiqar Ali Bhutto announced a new educational
policy as the president of Pakistan. There were two phases of the programme to be
adopted for achieving the targets of the educational policy, in which stress was laid
Upon the education of science and technology. The details of educational reforms
are as follows:
145
I lt11ll l'11/d\l/m .\'1111II<'\ f11r (IJS-4 y{'(1n) "'"""
I. I he first phase was announced on I 51 October 1972. In this phase education

wns lllflC.h! compulsory and free upto class eight.
2. I he Second phase started on I 51 October I 974. J n this phase education was
mode compulsory and free upto class ten.
). New schools and other educational institutions had to be constructed to
meet the requirements of free compulsory education.
4, All private owned and managed institutions were nationalized and the
teaching fraternity was promised better service conditions. On 1�1
September 1972 all private colleges were nationalized.
5. A number of new universities were to be established in the country and
university ordinance was to be cancelled and UGS also setl)p.
6. The engineering colleges in Karachi, Jamshore and Peshawar were to be
raised to the status of universities and emphasis was to be laid on religious
education.
7. Five new Doards of intermediate and secondary education were setup.
8. N.C.C. wa:, started to give military training for one year after passing
intermediate examination.
Agricultural Reforms
During Z.A Bhutto regime the folio\'···- agricultural reforms were
introduced. The details are as follows:
I. The maximum limit for the ownership was reduced from 500 acres per head
for irrigated land to 150 acres per head and for non-irrigated land from I 000
acres to 300 acres or 15000 produced units whichever was greater.
2. The owner who transfers his land equivalent to 15000 produce units or
th
more, to another person or to make him partner in the same land, after 28
December 1971 was declared as null and void.
st
3. Any persons who owned land producing 15000 produce units or more on 1
March 1967. was required to declare all the transfers made by him during
the last five years.
4. All the hunting lands except those which being of historical importance
were under the management of the government were nationalized and
distributed among the farmers.
146
1/adi Pakistan Studies for (BS-4 years)
5. Farms of fruit, horses and cattle and the Auqafs in excess of the fixed limit
of ownership were also not exempted from the purview of these reforms.
6. All land of the putt feeder area of Baluchistan having being treated as free
from all encumbrances was taken over by government without paying any
compensation. The acquired land was distributed among the poor farmers of
that area.
7. If any government servant possessed more than I 00 Acres of land it was
confiscated by government.
8. One-sided and hostile ejections from land were totally stopped and it was
decided that in future such ejections could be possible only in cases where
the farmers would fail to fulfil the obligations of farming.
9. Auction of all government land was banned, and the procedure of leasing
out such land was also abolished.
10. Landlords were made responsible to pay abyana and other agricultural
taxes.
11. The responsibility of providing seed and to pay for its price was also
entrusted to the land owner. The rest of the relevant expenses were to be
shared by the landlord and the farmer equally.
12. To collect revenue by force and to get labour from their farmers without any
compensation was banned through out the country.
13. In connection with the sale of land the former in its neighborhood was given
the right of pre-emption.
14. A commission was promised to be set-up for the review of agricultural tax
and the case.
15. Incentives were provided to small farmers to enable them to purchase
necessary agricultural products on subsidized rates, in the shape of loan and
accessibility to markets.
16. By providing a number of incentives for cooperative farming rural
cooperation schemes were promulgated.
17. A large rural development programme was promised to be launched soon
under which agro-based industries were to be set up to combat the
unemployment.
147
-
Kedia Reforma (Policy)
During the Z.A Bhutto regime the Health Minister Mr. Sheikh Muha mmad
Rashid had appointed a committee on 5•h February 1972. The committee
recommended the following health policy for improvement in health sector.
1. For M.B.B.S the course should be of four years against 5 years in vogue.
2. For admission to the medical college the minimum educational qualification
required should be matriculation instead of intermediate.
3. Quota system should be abolished and admission to MedicalCollege would
be made on merit basis.
4. After qualifying the admission test, the candidates would be required to
study the pre-medical course for one year under the supervision of the
respective MedicalCollege. There after they should be called automatically
student of 151 year ofM.B.B.S.
5. Semester system would be introduced
6. During the academic session there should be no winter or summer vacation.
After every semester there should be vacation for two weeks.
7. After graduation there should be compulsory service for one year with pay.
8. For specialization in different Medical and surgical subjects one year's
diploma course should be arranged by the universities.
9. In the medical colleges the total seats should be increased to 250.
New Health Policy
On 26 March 1972, Bhutto's government announced a new health policy,
under this policy:
1. The government promised to bring the medical treatment with in an easy reach
of the common man.
2. Vigorous campaigns against smallpox, malaria and cholera were launched all
over the country.
3. The existing hospitals and dispensaries were equipped with the qualified staff
and sufficient amount of medicines.
4. New hospitals and dispensaries were set up.
148
1/udi Pakisra11 Studiesfor (BS-4 years)
5. The impon of medicines was switched over to the generic names instead of
brand names ,, ith effect from April 1973.
In March 1977. General elections were held in Pakistan. (Pakistan National
Alliance) which consisted of nine opposition parties decided to tackle the Pakistan
Peoples Pany: elections· results were not up to the expectations of P, A. This
alliance of opposition refused to admit the elections results. It accused the
Government of severe rigging and bycotted the provincial elections. It presented
thirty two demands. one of them was the resignation of Bhutto and appointment of
new election commissioner. After several weeks' dialogues. the negotiating teams
from both the side reached unanimous proclamations. Out of thirty two demands of
the opposition. thirty one were approved. This agreement was signed on 4th Jul)
1977.
4.11 GENERAL ZIA-UL-HAQ'S REIGN (1977-1988)

General Zia-u1-Haq imposed the third Martial law in the country on 5 th July
1977. Senate Assembly and provincial assemblies were dissolved and a major
portion of 1973 constitution was suspended. And all the political activities were
banned. Zulfiqar Ali Bhutto was arrested after he was accused of the assassination
of one of his political rivals. A trial was filed in Lahore High Court which
announced death sentence for Bhutto. However, an appeal was filed in Supreme
Court against this verdict. Out of seven judges three rejected the accusation of
Bhutto and the other four rectified the decision of Lahore High Court. The final
de cision was to be made by General Zia-ul-Haq. He refused to accept the final
appeal for mercy inspite of several requests from international leaders. Bhutto was
hang ed on 4th of April 1979.
After the hanging of Bhutto, Zia-ul-haq needed another pretext to delay the
elections so he announced that he wanted to establish Islamic system in the
country �d he introduced several r�forms und�r the title _of Isl�ic system in the
country. The Russian government mten:ented m Afghanistan m Dece�ber l 9�9
which prolonged the reign of Gener�I Z1a��-�aq.. U.�;A that was against_ Russia
gave military as well as financial aid to MuJah tden to fight a war agamst the
super-power of Russia.
149
Htztfi Paiisra.n St'Jtdi� for (BS--4 ;«nJ
y
'.\10\ement for Re_toration oflnmocrac
ln 1981. a mo,emem for t.he restoration of democ racy ,;:as ta.:.t:'�: 0:· �
l
political parues. .\ countr) "1de campaign was a�� f
. . . �t -·�...., �· ·
'? ......
•T'\,,.
:1
...,...,
1'..
;J ��•
demand "as for lbe abolislnng of mania1 law anc ooomg Ge.�:� J f;l'.::U')�
E,tended pressure started exerting ns effectS along .,.ith L"lte.rnaJ aw..rca::,
interim Con titutioo

111 1981 �lartial Law co\'ernment enforced a'l int.eri.'11 consti .!tin:. �
constituted \1ajlis-e-Sboora (national Assembl:,) ir Da..ember 1981. -1,hfon ,,o:r.efc.
upto Fet-ruar:. 1985.
Presidential Referndum
In 1984. Z1a-ul-Haq held a presidential referendcm, and �..me '"=
president of the country for the next five years.
Islamization under Regime of General Zia- I-Haq
The major aspects of the lslamizaL.on process during ·9'"'"-1982 �e .::.s
under,
t. Enforcement of Hadood ordinance
On 10th February 1979. zia·s govemmen' introduced the Hadood Ord�
for the first time in Pakistan. Under which the offences against, the P,.zpe z.r<l. Oar
etc. were considered grievious crimes and their punishment 'nere prescrfuea ::J:
Islamic law.
2. Zakat and Usher
The Zakat and Usher ordinance to lslamize the economic svstem i,;as
imposed on 20th June, 1980. It was deducted from the Bank deposi� in 52'\�
accounts of the Muslims at the rate of 2.5% annualb, on first R.amdan, and the
Zak.at collection will be distributed by the Zakat Council among the desened.
The collection of the usher started in 1983. at the rate of I 0% of the
agricultural yield annually. The government appointed central, provincia:, D st.ic
and Tehsil Zakat Committees to distribute Zakat funds to needy. poor, orpnaP.5 and
widows.
150
Studies fer (BS-4 years)
Hadi Pakistan
=-=-
3. Elimination of Interest
st
On 1 January 198 I Mr. Zia-ul-Haq introduced a profi
. t and loss sharing
system account. to. which an account �older was to share the Joss and profit of the
Bank- All the savmg was converted mto PLS accounts with effect from I 51 J l
J 984. All the financial institutions under the control of government also sta:e�
giving loans on sharing basis.
4. Islamic Courts
th
On 10 February I 979. through an ordimenee. Shariat Benches were
esta blish ed in a �I high court� in which Ulema were included as ju _9ges. In May 1980
through an ordinance Shariat Benches were converted into Shariat courts. which
heard appeals from the subordinante courts and interpreted Islam. The Shariat
Benches of Supreme Court hear the appeals against the decisions of the Federal
Shariat Court and can declare any law invalid and stop which is repugnant to Islam.
5. Federal Shariat Court
Federal Shariat Court was established to decide cases according to the
teachings of the Holy Quran and Sunnah. Appeals against the lower and High
Courts were to be presented before the Shariat court for hearing.
6. Punishment for dishonouring of the Holy Prophet
According to the ordinance the blasphemy of the Holy Prophet (SAW)
would now be punishable by death instead of life imprisonment.
7. Majlis-e-Shoora
Zia-ul-Haq selected his Majilis-e-shoora in 1980. It was to be the Islamic
parliament of Pakistan in place of the National Assembly. Most of the members of
Shoora were intellectuals, Scholars, ULema, Journalists, economists and
professionals belonging to different fields of life. The Shoora was to act as a board
of advisors for the president.
S. Arabic as compulsory Subject
ut
. According to the ordinance other Islamization programs were ca1�ied �
inclu ding the to 8 ·
teaching of Arabic which was made compulsory from class 6
9· Isl subject
amic studies as compulsory
B.A,
According to the ordinance Islamic studies was made compulsory for
!:c, Engineering, M.B.B.S, Commerce, law and Nursing students.
I
151
Hadi PaJ.istatr tudie.sfor (BS-4 years)
10. Hafiz-e-Quran
According to the ordinance, for professional studies extra marks were given
to them who were Hafiz-e-Quran.
11. I lamization Campaign through Media
The media was also targeted; T.V specially was brought under the
i�lamization campaigns. News in Arabic were to be read on both. T.V and Radio.
Female anchor persons were required to cover their head. The Azan was relayed
regularly on radio and T.V to announce time for Prayers. Non Islamic and indecent
programmes were banned on Pakistan televeision and radio.
12. Ebtram-e-Ramdan Ordinance
Ehtram-e-Ramzan ordinance was issued in 1981 under this ordinance for
the sanctity of Ramzan was introduced to pay reverence to the holy month of
Ramzan. The ordinance for bad public, drinking and eating during the Holy month
of Ramzan. A three month imprisonment or a fine of Rs. 500 or both were
imposed.
13. Observation of Salat
General Zia-ul-Haq launched a program to ensure the regularity of Prayers
called the Nizam-e-SaJat. Arrangement for observing Salat of Zuhar in government
and Semi- government offices, schools and colleges were made. In August 1984
Salat Committee were also constituted to motivate the people for Salat.
U. International Islamic University
An international Islamic university was established at Islamabad, which
started functioning from 2nd January 1981. It makes research in every field of
Islamic law.
15. Patronizing of Deeni Madaris
.
Deeni Madaris were patronized and annual financial assistance was giv en to
them, and the degree (sanad) of Dars-e-Nazami was made equivalent to the de gree
of M.A.
16. Department of Federal Ombudsman_•
. I n 198� Federal Ombudsman Department was established to rectify the

_ .
nusadrnm1s trat1on of the Federal government officials and agencies. It also
observed the complaints against the governmental depa
rtments.
152
11111/1 l'ok/\1 1m S1tuJ/,,\ r,r IJS-4 •ettr\'
t 7. Shariat Council
A shariul council consisting of Ulema was e�lablished to look-into the
con stitutional and legal matters of the state in-order to bring them in line with
Islamic thoughl.
18. Steps against Qadyanics
General �ia-ul-J laq took some steps against Qadyanies to distinguish
between \he Muslim� and the Qadyanics. Which arc as follows:
1. A1an was banned for Qadyanies.
2. Qadyannies were banned lo call the companions of Ghulam Ahmed
Qadyani, Sahaba and his wives, Ammahatul Momeneen, of Ghuylam
Ahmed Qadyani.
3. ft was banned to use the name Mosque for Qadyanies for their place of
worship.
. The year 1985 ,s an important year in the history of Pakistan as it initiated
the restoratron of the democratic process.In fcbruary I 985 general elections
were held on non-party basis.In the absence of political parties, the
candidates focused on local issues and highlighted their personal qualities
including their piety and commitment to Islam.
Amendments in the constitutionl973
After these elections, on 2 nd March 1985, General Zia-ul-Haq introduced
man y amendments in the costitution of 197 3. These amendments gave overriding
power to the president by diluting the original character in the constitution of
1973.The prcsedcnt was given the power to nominate the Prime Minister, to
appoint Pro vincial Governors, Services Chief. judges of the Supreme Court and
High Courts. The amended constitution was entorced from 10 March 1985.
Muhammad Khan Junejo's reign (1985-1988)
After amendments in the counstitution, the President nominated Muhammad Khan
Jun ejo as the Prime Minister of Pakistan. So Muhammad Khan Junejo became the
Prime Minister of Pakistan on i,3rd March 1985.The first session of the newl )
e�ected p arliament was held o1'i 23 rd March 1985. Muhammad Khan Juneja was
give n a uanimous vote of confidence by the National Assambly.The smooth
transfer of power from the army to the civil authority generated a lot of optimism
153
I/ad/ Pal.i\lu11 Studle\/Or (BS-4 rean)
about the dcmocrallc.: prospects of Pakistan and 11c 1 pc·d to imprcnc

Pakistan·s image
in the world
Independent and official Parliamcntar) Groups
· divided into
fhc National Asscmhh wl11ch was clccteJ on non- pa11 )• bases· soon ·
an Independent Parliamentary <,roup (IP(,). �ons1stmg. of about forty mc�hers. and.
official parliamentary gr0up (OP(1) \\.htch mc.:luded_ the 5upport_cr.') of_ . the
government. rhc count[) was· still under martial la,,: l he '\.1t1onal Asscm�l, and
thl! Sanatc passed resolutions demanding removal ot r-. 1art1.1l km. So Marttal lav,
was lifh.:d on 30th Dcccmbcrl Q85.
,
Important events during Junejo's reign
fhe important events during his g�vemm�nt are as follo,,s:
1. Lifting of Martial La\\-
Al1er becoming Pnmc Minister of Pakistan. Muhammad Khan JuneJo
declared that martial law should be lifted. Then the parliament and the provincial
Assemblies passed bills to lift it which was done on 30th December. l 985. It
provided a sense of relief to the people who had suffered under the Martial La\\ for
more than eight years
2. Pakistan Muslim League-Re-Organized
All the non-party members of the National Assembly fom\ed an official
Parlimcntar) group in Janual"). 1986 ,1rh1ch was named the Pakistan Mushm
League. A large number of the members of the ational Asscmbl), belonging to
the OPG, joind the Muslim League Muhammad Khan Juncjo \\as elected its
president. He started introducing Muslim League memhersh1p in the entire count(').
The provincial Chief Ministers became Muslim league·s pro, inc1al president')
\1uslim League offices were opened. members \\ere enrolled, and partv elections
were held. As a result, Muslun League ,\.as orgamzed as a national political part)
11 was better organiaed in Punjab than in other provinces of the countr)-.
3. Development Program of Junejo's Government
Prime Minister of Pakistan Muhammad Khan Junejo announced his Five
Point programme aiming at development programs. improvement of litera q rate.
elimination of corruption. and improvement of the common man'<; lot \1embe rs of
the provincial assemblies were allocated fund to undertake development work in
their constitugncies. As a result. a lot of development '"ork was carried out.
154
Ha.di PaMsta11 Studiesfor (BS-4 yearj)
=-
especiall} !" the rural areas. Muhammad Khan Juncjo's modest). honest) and
national spirit was much liked by the public Ihc seven \tfarla I lousing �chemL.
Five-Point dc"elopment programme and plans to mcrcasl.! the literacy r,ue \\ere
appreciated '\\ hich played an important role in the development of the count!")
-4. The event of Ojhri Camp •
A sudden fire broke out in an arms depot located between RaY.alpindi and
Islamabad in 1988. In this hundereds of citizens died and numerous houses were
destroyed. After hectic efforts it was brought under control. The Prime \.'1inistcr
\\as on a tour of Sindh and the president was visiting Kuwait. Both retumcc.l
immediate! ) to Islamabad The Pnme Minister formed an imt.!stigation committL'L'
and its report was presented lo president 7ia-ul-l laq.
The dismissal of the Junejo GoHrnment
ln 1988 a conflict developed betv.een the Pn.:sidcnt.and the l'nme-Mm1ster

.over certain political change. 1 his conflict reached the uncompromising k\cl <;o.
the President dissolved the National Assembl ) m a press �onfi:renct: \\hich \\as
held in Army House and removed the Prime Mm1stcr on 29th \-1ay I 988 under
article 58-2-b ot the Constitution. fhc president blamed the members of the
Sational Assembly and the go'\emmcnt of corruption and failure to enlorce the
Islamic \\a)' of I if e. The Pro\ ind al Assemblies \\ere: abo dissolved.
1 he political parties demanded elections witlun ninety da)S. General Zi.1 \\Jntcd to
hold the new elections on non-party basis, as he had done m 1985.The political
circles were opposed to this proposal, but he insisted on thts.l Iowerc'\'\.:r. he died m
an Air crash on 17'J1 August, 1988 near Bahawalpur (Bast, Kamal). After the death
of General .liaul J laq, the Supreme Court held that non-part)' elections '\\ere again�t
the spirit of the fundamental rights guaranteed by the 1973 Constitution. Chairman
Senate, Ghulam Jshaq Khan became Caretaker President of Pakistan and he
conducted the elections in November 1988. 1 he elections produced a divided
man adatc, none of parties won a majonty m t�e Nattonal Assembly. In these
elections Pakistan Peoples Party got ma.1ont) ot seats m National Assembly by
securing ninety-four seats and JJl captured 5� �eat�. l�. the elect10ns to the
____________ ____
provincial assemblies, the PPP got a clear maJortt)' 111 Smdh. v..hereas the IJI
emerged as the majority party in Punjab. The ot!1c� tv,o provinces presented
confused picture as none of the parties had a clear maJonty.
...
_,,.,.,..,,..,. ...,._
155
llt1dl />lfkJWm Stll(/le\ /llr (BS-4 yeur5)
4.12 Benazir Bhutto as Prime Minister of Pakistan (1988-90)

President Ghulam Ishaq Khan invited Benazir Bhutto to . form �o�ernment ��
the centre. Muhtarma BenaLir Bhutto took the office of Pnme Minister on 2
• Deccmber l 988. She was the first woman Prime minister of Paksitan and of the
Islamic world ·1 he PPP formed its government in Sindh and became a major
coalition partner with other parties in the NWrP .•nd Baluchistan.The IJ[ led by
Nawa/' Sharif, formed its government m Punjab with the support of 151 members.
ugainst ninety-nine members belonging to the PPP in a house of 260 members.
2. Prc!!idential Election
Presidential election was held on I 2 th December 1988. Mr. Ghulam lshaq
Khan won the clcct,on against NawabLada Nasrullah Khan.
Important Events during Benazir Bhutto's Reign
Important events during her government are as follows.
J. Pakistan rejoined the CommonWealth
After the separation from common wealth in 1972, Pakistan rejoined it in
1989.
2. People works programme
The government of Benazir Nazir Bhutto had launched the People Works
• programme for the development and social Y.elfare of the country.
3. Placement Bureau
Departmen t of '"Placement Bureau" was set up for providing employment to the
Public. Thousands of People got employment through it.
4. Relations with India
Benazir Bhutto bad adopted a no-confrontation policy with India. When
Rajio Gandhi visited Pakistan to participate in the fourth SAARC Conference.
Benazir Bhutto joined hands for establishing good relations with him.
Ghulam Mustafa Jatoi as the Caretaker Prime Minister
On 6th August, 1990 President Ghulam lshaq Khan dismissed the
G overnment of Benazir Bhutto on the Charge of corruption and malpractices and
dissolve d the National and.'lf>rovincial Assemblies. Ghulam Mustafa Jatoi was
nominate d as the Caretaker Prime Minister of Pakistan.
156
Had/ Pakista11 Studies for (BS-4 years)
-

The caretaker Prime Minister of Pakistan held the Genr
al Elections on 29111
October 1990. lslami Jamhoori Ittehad (IJI) v.on the Elections capturing I 06 seats
against PPP's forty...,five seats m the National Assembly. Nawa7 Sharif, the leader
of the IJI, emerged as the national leader, winning seats in all provinces.
Muhammad Nawaz Sharirs first Government (November· 1990 to
July 1993)
Nawaz Sharif became the Prime Minister of Pakistan on 61h November 1990.Thc
new government concentrated on impro\'ing the econom) Some of Nawa1 Shari f's
steps like liberali;.ation of investment and lessening of burcaucrattc control m·cr
sanctioning new projects considerably restored the confidence of the domestic and
interationaJ investors.
Important steps taken by Nawaz Sharirs Government
Important steps of Nawaz Sharirs government arc as under.

1. Privatization Commission
The government constituted prit·atization comm1ss1on in 1991 Official
bank and financial institutions were reformed accordingly. Banks in private sector
\\:ere encouraged. Some banks and other institutions were sold out through this
Privatization Commission which created a positive impact on the national
eco nomy.
2. River water Distribution among the province�
A serious-dispute going on the water distribution of River Indus among the
four provinces of Pakistan. through the efforts of the government an agreement was
signed among the provinces and dispute of water was resol" cd forever.
3. Financial aid for the poor people
The government established 'Baitul Maar in 1992 which provided financial
help and aid to the poor people.
4. National Scheme
on-.1�c�i,:1�
The ovcrmncnt started national schemes like National � �l;hc.: n�
otorway project and Yellow C uh
l'rogrammc. �elf employment scheme. m_
for the betterment of People. It proved quite successful.
157
1 /1111/ /'1tkltllm .\1111/lr, ,,, fl\ ' ·rttf\
> r
Hl,1kl1 },Ian M11,uri 1111 cnrdnkcr J rimc Mini11tc
years w�s better than an)
1 lw I ll' fi performance during it, fir ,t two
fortunat cly this government also
I'• •viou pulitiCJil govcinrncnl in l'akist.m Hut un. _
rnment o� 18
, ,,11ld 110 1 u,rnplctc the term ;ir1cJ the Prc�1dcnt d1sm1sscd the gove
':>her Mu,a n was nommated
/\p,il 1 1,11, on corruption charges. Afterwards Blakh _
J>1 in11 \11 1 11&tc, ol Puki�tm1. But the Presid ent's action was challenged tn 111'
S 1 1prc11w C olllt / hr <.·ourl gHvc a verdict against the president's action. So Nawaz
Slu,til , < ,ovc111 1 11tl11t revived again. 'J he government of Nawaz Sharif was restor ed
with i11 �t>. wed·,
Mo1u·t·n ()urt1'hi 1111 caretaker Prime Minister
Hut 011 1hc interference of Chief of Army Staff Nawaz Sharif voluntarily
decided to step do\\fl ,incl resign President of Pakistan. Ghulam lshaq Khan also
1c11ig11cd. Mouc1..11 C)urc ,hi became caretaker Prime Minister of Pakistan and
<"hainn:111 Senate. wa..,ccm 5a.11. ad became caretaker President of Pakistan .
Gc.·11cruf Elcc.-tiom, 1991
< 1t;m:r.1I elect ionc; \\.ere arranged under a caretaker administration headed b)
Moccn ()11rc ,hi i11 Octohcr 1993. I he elections, once again produced 11 divided
·11 111d:s1c H n.,111r Bhutto established a coalition government at the cl!ntre in
< J< lohcr I '>'JJ
Hcnazir Bhutto's Second Government (1993 to 1997)
J Bcmvir Bhutto became the Prime Minister of Pakistan for the second tenn
th
on J 9 October, 1993. She began her second term as a more secure Pnme
Minister than was the case when she assumed the office for the first time in
J 988, because she nominated Farooq Ahmed Laghari as the president of
f'ak1stan. She appointed Sajjad Ali Shah the chief justice of the Supreme
Court and repJaceded the head of the ISJ and of the 18.
Reforms
Reforms during her 2 nd regime are as follows:
2, The government setup kissan Bank for providing loans to fann ers and
launched National Tractor' Scheme.
J. Social and health policies were framed for women. Women police stations
and courts were setup for providng legal facilities to the lower classes.
158
4. 'I hl, ptl\'l'lllllll'lll l111111d1l.'d lhl· 8 live-year pla11 li>1 ,apid <lcvclopment un<l
111
p11,,111,:nt) ol the <.·0111111 y

.
I h1.· tll'lmi'l,nl of lhl' �OVl'1'111m·nt of Ucn,ir Uhutto
I )illi:rcntl' on d1 ffi:rent mutters wus developed her ween President Mr.
I ,1rnt1q i\h1111:cJ I q.!lwri und Prime Minister Hcnt111r llhullo President of Pakistan
h1rooq Ahmed I cpluu i dismissed the governmenr of 13enn11r Bhutto in November
1996 A lor111c1 PPP lender Mnl,k M,11nti Khalid wus nom111uted us tht: l'rirnc
r-.t1111stc1 for lhl intc-rim period, und ,11 the smnc time unnounccd the <lure for next
gcncrttl elections
(,cncrnl Elnl'litrn, 1997
1
I he (11,;nerul hlect,ons were held on 1" Februury, 1997. In this election
P11kistun Muslim J eagUl: got the absolute majority seuts in Nutionul Assembly.
While! its candidate:; ulso cuptured two scats in Kuruchi.A new political purty,
I d1rik-i-l11saf' headed hy Jmran Khan cntered to the I· lcctions, hut did not win a
:iinglc sent in the National and Prnvm,i.tl Asscmhli.:s.
Muhammad N;1waz Sharirs Rcign-2"" term (1997-1999)

Muhammad Nuwuz Shnrif hccume the l'riml.' Minister of Paksitan for the
second term. lhc Muslim League also formed coalition government in all the four
prov inces
V
\. n,ccm Snjj11d 11, the cuctakcr Prc�idcnt of J>akistun
Alter one month conflict cJcvclopccJ between Chief Justice of Pakistan und
Nuw11, Sharif (,o\cmment ·1 he confrontation wa� resolved through army
intervention and ('luef justice had to resign from his orfice. F.irooq Khan legari
also resigned from the presidency on 2nd Dccembl:r 1997. Chairman Senate
i usecm Saj,1ad hecamc the caretaker president of Pakistan.
Presidential Election
I he presidential elcct10n was held in December 1997.Justicc (Rted) Rafiq
1 nra r was elected as president against Aftab Shabun Mir.mi of Peoples Party.
l{cforms during Nawa1. Sharif Government
I. Agricultural Policy
ultural policy in
Nawu✓, Sharif government announced on improved agric
l field.
<J<J8 Ten Crorc ru pees were fixed for this
-159
•
a:
J )
2. Education Policy . ed at opening man)

the ne w educa t 1o na 1 Policy aim
(1 ovcrn mcnt annou nce
d
new academic institutio n�
Important steps
. follows:
Important events of his second tenn are as
J. Right of Vote to Pakistanis abroad . .
. . .
rhe government gave the .right to vote to Pakistames hvmg abroad \\-hich
developed interest in them for Pakistan.
2. Census of 1998
·
· °fthe
The census of the people was conducted m 1998; the populat1on
country had reached to more tha n 13 core people accordingly.
3. Atomic Blasts
Mr. Nawaz Sharif had sha ttered the dreams of superiority of India in the
atomic field by doi n g atomic blasts on 28th May 1998 in Chaghi Hills.
4. Kargil Attack
General Pcrvcz attacked Kargil in 1999, bu t the forces
had to be called bacl
from the cap tured area on the advice of Bill Clin ton, the pres
ident of the U.S.A.
s. "Pay off loan and adorn the country", Scheme
Economic condition of th� country was
not improving and government had
to take loans from the IMF for lls budget. Na
waz Sharif started a schem e called
"Pay off loa n •. adorn the cou n t1:Y" and appeal
ed to the nation to pay off the forei�O
loan. The ?at 1 �n welcomed this scheme
and 17 billion rupees were collected ull
J u ne I 999in th 1s head.
Constitutional Amendments
1. 13 th amendment of th e Constit
ution 1973
The clause 58-2b was re
moved..flrom t_h
Government. With the sup ort e 1973 constitution y N wat
s of o pos ton
to dissolve the National As�em t t� W h t�h �ad given powers tob pres�ident
ly a any time. Th en
back through 13 th amendm b
ent po wers. is ngh t of the president w as talc
160
H-1 Pat.isl� StJ1dies for {BS-4 ,rrrors.J
,,,.._,
Ci
2. 14 amendment of the Con,tit ution 19i3
lbroug.h lhi �ndmem the el...�rc-d member l'•f
the A ,cmbl) \\11!- bounJ tu
l
i \e the \Ote o. conhdencc onl) t..., their own pam 1�::iJc:r. Villlntur i, to h<.·
expelled from the par.).
Labore declaration
The lndian Prime Mtm.ster. .\tal Bihari \ aip,1\ee. , isited Lnh
t1rc b, bu,
v.ith a messa�e '"6ood,,ill. :-..a,,az. �harif \\ekomeJ him at \\ Jg.ah Border." Both
le:3d� ann ul'l�ed man) plan!> to norm:tlize mutu:tl relations \ J'-'int agreement
•:assigned, li1c..1 \\as called .. Lahore declaration..
-1.13 General Pervaiz �tusharaf as the Chief E)..ecthe of Puki tan
(October 1999 to June 2001)
Rea.sons of Martial Law
l. �awaz Sharif gm emment passed 11 bill \\1th m::iJOnt) for e tablishmg
!)pecial couns for speed) tri:tl and the go,emrnent reduced the number of
Judged of the Supreme Court from I , to l 2 through a notific.mon m
September I 997. The Supreme Coun rejected this notification :ind the
relations between the government andjudiciru: became more ten�ifa.-d.
2. There was a clash between Pakistan and India in \ ht) l 9Q9. On the ad, ice
of American PresidenL Bill Clinton. �a"az harif ,i ·ited America and
signed the ceasefire agreement It \\i.lS called --\\ n....J\ington Dedurotion"
.
The �ation and Arm) :showed a deep sense t1f despair and anger o,er this
step.
3. General Jahangir Kararnat ad, ised for the formation of ..'lational Securit)
Council..for securit) purposes in Ocwber 1999. Na\\37 hurif t1.1ok. the
res,gnation from Jahangeer Karrunm anJ appointed G1:ncral Penez
Musharaf in his place
4. On 12th October 1999. the Chief of •\ntl) Staff General Pl'f\ c� � lus�a.mf
v.as abroad on lLm.�1gn tom. Prime \lmist1..·r '\,\\\.\/ Sh.ml ,1pp1.'111ll:d
General Ziauddin as the ne" Ch1el ot tht.> \rm) .:t.1l1 m lus nhscnn: l!ut lht'
l1.)1.>k <.1cncr.1!
Pro-Musharaf Ami) Gent!rob re,oltcd 3g,1111st 1t. 1 he arm�
Ziaud din into its custod) .\mi on the .uri\ .1I 1.,t Uenernl Pen e, \ lu�h,11.11
the go,emment o f '-' ' - rt'llW\d lkncral Pcn.v \lu�hm1l
·"a"az ...,harif \\3"
took the control of the countr) and became thr Chief l:.:-..c:cum c ot P.,k.1-.1,111
161
H•tll PdlslMI St•dlnfor (BS-4years) -
on I 2'h October, 1999. The "Plane Hijack Case was planned against Nawaz
Sharif He was sentenced to imprisonment and was declared unfit for any
Public post by a special court On the intervention of Saudi government, he
was sent on exile to Saudi Arabia.
Pervaiz Musharaf as the President of Pakistan (June 2001 to August 2008)
On 20 th June 2001. President Rafiq Tarar resigned and General Musharraf
became the president of Pakistan
Presidential Referendum 2002
Like General Ayyuab and General Zia-ul-Haq he �ot himself elected as the
president of the country by holding a referendum on 30' April, 2002. Afterward he
promised to hold fresh elections after introducing changes in the system of
government. In accordance with his promise he conducted the next general
elections on I 0th of October, 2002. Nawaz Sharif along with Benazir Bhutto were
banned to participate in these elections Muslim League (Quaid-e-Azam group}
came into power and Mir Zafarullah Jamali from Balochistan was appointed as the
Prime Minister of Pakistan.
Presidential Election 2004
The National Assembly again elected General Pervez Musharaf as
president on 18 th January, 2004. He announced elections in January. 2008 with the
condition that he \\'Ould be elected as president for the next five years before
dissolution of the present assembly.
Chaudhary Shujaat Hussain as Prime Minister (26June 2004 to 28 August
2004)
In these situations, Mir Zafar Ullah Khan Jamali could not retain his
position and on 30 June 2004 he resigned from his office arid Chaudhary Shujaat
th
became the Prime Minister for only two months and Shaukat Aziz was nominated
85 the next Prime Minister.
Shaukat Aziz as Prime Minister (28 th August 2004 to J 5 No,•embcr, 2007)

On 28 1h Au gust 2004 Shaukat Aziz was appointed as the Prime Minister of
Pakistan. Before General Elections 2008, General Musha,raf was re-elected as
president of Pakistan for the next five years.
•·
162
,.........
J/11111 /'llkltl1111 ,\'1tul/1•,j11r (IJS ,t yeanl
Reform� during Pcrvcz Musharaf's regime

1. Lo<•11I Go vtrnmcnt Plan of Musharaf Government
( ,cncral l'crvcz Musharaf Introduced local government plan in 2000. The
fl',wcr wu'I tc, be tnm.,fcrrcd to the lower level of the public. The local government
had been divided into three parts which are given as follows:
IJulon Cuvcrnmcut
Union government comprises of Nazim and Naib Nazim and members. The
people elect thirteen members of Union Council which are one Nazim, one Naib
Niuim, four male general councillors. four femafe general councilors, two male
lnrmcri, I lahour councillors, two female farmer / labour councillors and one
minority councillor. Making the annual development programme for the area
imposing taxes at the local level and solving the cases of crimes of small nature,
land and family disputes were the duties of a Union Council.
Tch�il Government
'I he ·1 chsil Government comprises of Tehsil Nazim, Tehsil Naib Nazim,
'I chsil Council and Administration the educational qualification of the Tehsil
N11zim and the Naib Nazim should be at least Matric. They are elected by all the
Union councillors present in thesil. Thcsil Nazim is the administrative head of the
I chsil gov<.:rnmcnt. 'I he 'f ehsil Nazim will be the head of the Tehsil Government.
The Naib Nazi ms of all the Union Councils will be the members of Tehsil
council, 33% of the seats in the 'lehsil Council are for women, 5% seats are for
farmers and labourers and 5% seats will be reserved for the minorities. A Tehsil
Mu nicip al Officer ('I MO) will work under the Tehsil Nazim. These departments
inclu de finance budget and account, record of land revenue, planning, rural and
urba n development municipal coordination and its stages etc.
Oi11trict Government
lt comprises of Nazim, Naib Nazim, Council and administration. The head
of lhc district government is the district Nazim. In one district, the Nazims of all the
Unio n Counc ils are included in the district council, and 33% seats for the
women,
5¾ scats for
the farmers and laboure rs and 5% seats are reserved for the minorities
out of the tota
l scats of district council.
'J he District Nazim is the head of all the administrative powers. The district
Pol ice and
adm inistration arc answerable to the District Nazim. The District Nazim
163
.,
Jludi Pakistan Studie.'5 for (BS-4 year'>)
. . . onsi'bl_ e for the development an d prosperit�

provides political leadersh. ip· and· 15 resp . ••s run through the district co-
of his district. The adm1mstrat1on f the d1st° . nc t
dep artmcnt 15 called the executive
coordinating officer {D C.O). 1 he head of every
District Oflicer (EDO).
2. Privatization Policy of General Pervez Musharaf
Musharaf also started
Like Benazir Bhuno and Na�az Sharif <?cneral
from priva tization was
Pri,atization. lts a,m was to end poverty and the income
spent on the pa)ment of foreign loans and social ':el fare.
Habib Bank was sold for only Rs. 22 billion and UBL was sold for onl) 13
billion rupees in December 2004. The Privatization Com�ission sol_d 26% shares
of PTCL to 1:-.tisalaat of Dubai Company. Pak-Arab Fert1hzer of M1rpu� �athelo
\\.as sold for 8 billion. Pak-Arab Fertilizer of Multan was sold for 13 billion and
Pak-American FcrtiliLer was sold for 16 billion rupees. So the Pervez Musharaf
Government earned 2.5 billion dollars in a year through privatization.
3. Industrialization during Pervez Musbaraf Government
Many new industries like car assembly plant industry, motor cycle
assembly, sugar industry, chemical industries, industries for making goods of basic
needs, electrical equipment industries, cement industries and steel making industr)
were set up during Musharaf Government.
4. Legal Framework Order (LFO)
According to the Legal Framework Order (LFO) General Pervez Musharaf
was given unlimited powers. He could appoint governor, three heads of the arme d
forces, Chief Election Commissioner and the Chairman of Federal Publi Service
c
Commission. He could dissolve the assemblies.
Reaction of the Opposition
Legal Framework order_ (_ LFO) became the main caus
e for dispute between
the government and the opposition. The Prime Minister of Pakistan Mir Zafar-ullah
Khan J�a_li made utmost ef!�rts for _ re�onciliation between the
government and
th� op�os1tton. All the oppos1t_1on_ parties publsished a white pape
r in 2003 on the
pnce hike, unemployment, waiving off the loans of favourite people and failure of
Musharraf government on internal and external fronts.
164
Hatll Pokiltan Studies or (BS-4 ye
f ars)
Muhammad Mian Soom ro as caretak

er Prime Minister (November 2007 to
:25March 2008)
Sha�kat Aziz was removed from his office and Muhammad.Mian Soomro was
appomted as caretaker Prime Minister of Pakistan on 161h November 2007. He held
,
the General Elections in February 2008. Pakistan Peoples' Party and Muslim
League (N) gained the majority in these elections, but Muslim League (Q) failed
miserably.
Yousaf Raza Gilani as Prime Minister (March 2008 to June 2012). Raja
Pervaiz Ashraf as Prime Minister (22 June 2012 to 25 March 2013)
Syed Yousaf Raza Gilani of Pakistan Peoples Party was elected Prime Minister of
Pakistan on 25 th March 2008.. In June 2012 the Supreme Court of Pakistan
declared Prime Minister Yousaf Raza Gillani as disqualified. In his place Raja
Pervaiz Ashraf became the Prime Minister of Pakistan on 22 nd June, 2012
Muhammad Miao Soomro as caretaker President of Pakistan (18 August 2U08
to 9 September 2008)
Muhammad Mian Soomro became the care taker President of Pakistan after the
resignation of General Pervaiz Musharaf on 18 1h
August, 2008.
Asif Ali Zardari as the President (9 September2008 to 9 September 2013)
P
In September 2008, Asif Ali Zardari was elected as the President of akistan.
Mir Hazar Khan Khoso as caretaker P�ime Minister (25 March 2013 to 5 June
2013)
On 25 0, March 2013 Mir H :5
. azar K han Khoso wa� appomted the Ca retaker
, the General Elections on 111 May, 2013. In
·
Pnme M"mister of Pakistan· He held g · · ·
. Muslim Lea ue (•N) game · d t he maJonty. Wh"t1 e Pakistan
1 an
these Elecnons p a k"st
po 1-1t1• ca I party through the General
Tahrik-e-lnsaf (PTI) also raised as a big
elections of 2013.
September 2013 to ---)Muhammad
Mumnoon .Hussam . as the President (9'h
Minister ( 5 June 2013 to ---)
Nawaz Shraf As p •me e
Shar if b comes the Prime Minister of Pakistan for the
Mu hamm1 aJ'Nawaz
. . e 2013 while Mumnoon Hussain became the President of
third time on 5 Jun , 201' 3.
h
9th Septe mber'
Pakistan on
165
J/adl Pak/Jtar, St"dlesfor (BS-4 yeort}
4.14 Amendments in the Constjtution of Pa.kistan 1973

First Amendment
This amendment was passed on 4 lh Mat, 1974 Pedefiend tnc boundrier; ,,t f><JY W:s:1
and removed reference to East Pakistan
Second Amendment
On 7th September 1974 the parliament approved second amend�ent. ·r�is
amendment defiend a Muslim and declared the status of Ahmad1e, a mmonty ar,d
non- Muslim.
Third Amendment
tJ;
Extended the period of preventive detention on J8 f·ebruary ''J75.
Fourth Amendment
On 21 s• November 1975. Decreed additional seats for minorities, it also deprived
courts of the power of preventive detention.
Fifth Amendment
On 51h September. I 976. widened the scope of restriction on the High C..0.1rt.
Sixth Amendment
On 22 nd December. J 976, Provided that ( h1ef Justice of Supreme �rt will be
r
retired at the age of sixty five and High ourt Judges at the age of sixty two.
Seventh Amendment
On l 6th May, 1977, enables the Prime Minister to obtain a vote of confidence of
the people 6f Pakistan.
Eighth Amendment
On 14 1h November l 985, the pariliament approved eighth amendment. It
introduced major changes in the 1973 constitution It JS explained as under:
Article�
Accordirlg to amendment article 5 l in the constitution 1973, article 5 l, and
the age of voter has been raised to twenty one years.
The general seats of the national assembly have been enhanced to 207. In
addition to this, ten seats have been reserved for religious minorities like
Christians t Hindus, Sikhs, Buddhists and the Qad1anis or Lahore group. Twenty
seats have now been reserved in the National Assembly for women for a specified
period of time. The members belonging to minority communities are now to be
166
Jfadl Pak/\1011 Stutlle� or BS-4 ear.,;
elected on the basis of separate electorates, 1.e. the registered voters of each
community electing their representatives.
Article 58
Und er this article the Eighth amendment has authorized the president to
dissolve the National Assembly as per his discretion and the circumstances.
1. Where a vote of no-confidence having been passed against the Prime Minister.
no other member of the National Assembly is likely to command the
confidence of the majority of the members.
• 11. Where a situation has arisen in which the federal government cannot be carried
on in accordance with the provisions of the constitution and an appeal to the
electorate is necessary.
Article 59
Under this article by the Eighth amendment, the number of senate seats has
been enhanced from sixty three to eighty seven; eight senators are to be elected
from the federally Administered Tribal Areas against five prior to the amendment.
From the capital area, three instead of two are now to be elected. Five additional
seats have been allocated to the Ulema, technocrats. or other professionals from
each province to be elected by the concerned provincial assembly. Half of the
members of each category are to retire after every three years. Previously the term
was for two years.
Article 60
According to this article, the term of the office of chairman and deputy
chainnan has been extended from two years to three years.
Article 75
Before the amendment, the president was required to give his assent to a bill
within seven days after it had been presented to him. If he failed to do so, he was
demanded to have assented there to. According to the amended article, it requires
the president to
give his assent to the bill with-in thirty days. He is also empowered
to return a bill
other than a money bill to the parliament for reconsideration of the
Whole or a part of the bill. If the parliament, in a joint sitting, again passes the bill.
the preside
nt cannot with-hold his assent.
167
Article 101 p0111lcd hy
. ti ,
c umc ndm cnt l 11c ( , ovc,nm ,s. to IK· 11p
Under this ar uclc, u ft er
. , . . e. Minister But bclorc the 11tlll'll(I llH.'111,
the Presiden t in consullot1on with thc Prim
1dcnt.
the Governor was to be oppotntcd by the Pn.:s
Article 105
Before the amendmen
r_
t, the unve rnor l)t' the prnvincc w11s rcqum:d to ud Ill
. - m.lvH.:c• wns. 1lll\J ing, on
accordance with the advice of tI1c• C'I uc·t· Mmistcr ,11H.I such
htm.
of the
But after the amendment, the (iovcrnnr sttll hus to net on _the mlvicc
Chief Minister. but now he cnn nsk the Chief Minister und th.c cnbind to n:consid l.!I
the advice. The Governor is required to uct in uccor<lance with the n<lv11..:e tcnth:n.:d
afler reconsidcmtton.
According to the other amendment tn th,-. .irtteh:. alkr the dissolution of thr
provincial as::.cmbl). the C1 0\crno1 shull uppomt u carctukcr go\crn1m:nt .ll lus
discretton but with pnor apprco\'al of the P1csidcnt.
Article 106
1
According rn sub-duu:-c ( 4) ot the unid:.• uflcr tu11endment, th'-· powers
conferred on the Govl!rnor. by ,·inuc of the umcm.lll\\;l\t fot <.h'isolut ,on of 11
provincial ussemhl) are similar to tl\O:;c 1..onfc11ell on the Pn.!'>1<lcnt for the
dissolution of the auonal Asscmbl) under mtick 58.
Article 116
Unde!r this article niter amendment. the pow ....•1:-; of th1..· gmcrnor
me :-imilM
in nature ns the pl)\>vl!rs of th� president under tu ti<.:h.: ]'i It en, i:mgcs th,\I thl'
governor is to g1, e his assent to a bill ,, ith in thirl) d�1\s ol the p,1ssing of thl' hill
by the prm inc1al assembl). [ he go,cmor can send b.1d. a bill c,ccpt nHll\C bill
u )
to the assembly for n;considerutton. fhe govemo1 hns to give his
assent to the hill
after it ha� bel!n recons1dercd b) the nsscmbl)
Article 270
13) Fighth amendment. this urt1dc .indemn1liC's all the
pn:s1dcnt s tmkr
ordinance. martini law regulations. martial la\\ ord
....•rs mcludinl). the r....·ten•nd \llll
order mudc bet"ccn 5 Jul) 1977, and D September
19�5 At\cr tlu\l lh\l1..' the
president's order, Martial h1\, rcgulntitn1s. mart
ial la\\ llr\lcrs arc ll) he c,mtin c,t
only to making such provisions us nrc to focilitl\tc
or incident.,! to th...• 1\!, <)�•oth'I\ 1..ll
1<>8
ihi· p1ml1111111l11111 ul S J!lly l'J77 /\ list of above mentioned secured enactments
th
11 utck 11111r111m l1n111 the Jtn1•,d1tt1on of courts after with drawl of martiai ,av.
�
ltrrn p,uvi(l\.:d 111 lh1. fllncnckd constitution. In this v.ay a blanket indemnitv and
l·1111�1,11111111111I t·11vc1 was pr'>v1dcd to all the actions and orders of the miJitan
vovr111111r111 ol /,1;1 111 I Jnq form s•t, July I 977 to 30 December I 985..
lnth Auwudml•ut
Bill lo �mpnw ,lia,iuh luw as the supreme law of land: The bill was passed b�
Sl·11utc 111 l'JH S hut rnuld never be passed by 1 ational Assembly O\\ing to the
Inlier '!i d1,;i,olutton
l'rnth Amendment
On 29 Murch I 'JH7, hxcd the interval period between sessions of the National
th
t\s'icmhly not to exceed J 1() days.

Elncnth Amendment
, In 19H<J the reserved scats for women in the nation assembly and the prO\ incial
usscmhlic'I were rcvi-,cd. J Jowever, two years latter on 23rd August 1992 the bill
ww1 withdrawn hy its movers that the government intended to introdu� the same
bill very soon.
Twelfth Amcmlmcnt 1991
Created speedy tnul court for three years
Thirteenth Amendment
In Fchruary, 1997, the Muslim League led by Na\\,'az Sharif s"ept the
general clectioni; by winning a comfortable majority which crossed the figure of
two third majority. Taking advantage of such strong support in the parhamenL the
government got a new amendment (Thirteenth amendment) passed b} the
parliament on J st ApriJ J997, curtailing the powers of the President and enhancing
lhc powers of the Prime Ministers.
. lhc President's power under article 58 (2b) \.\h1ch empowered him to
di!!solvc the N
ational Assembly in his discretion was omitted. He could dissohe lhe
l\s,emhly only on the advice f the Prime Minister as envisaged in the ongmal
19 o
73 constitution. After the vote of no•confidence no other leader could comm311<l
a majority in the National Assembly.
169
_J
1/11,11 l'ukl\tfm ,\'t1ull1•\
•
ft,, (IJS-4 vea,9 -
I hc thirteenth timended ulso amended the constitution to the extent that the
< i< 1 vernor. like the President, was also deprived of the power to dissolve the
provinciul ussembly ut his discretion.
According to the thirteenth amendment, there shall be Governor for each
province which shall be appointed by the president on the advice of the Prime
M mister. Under urticlc 247, this commission has further weakened the authority of
the President and has enhanced the position of the Prime Minister for the
appointment of chairman Joint Chiefs of Staff Committee, the Chief of the Army
Stuff, the Chief of the Navy Staff, and the Chief of Air Staff, and determining their
c;ularies und ullowanccs. This has obviously strengthened the position of Prime
Minister in relation 10 armed forces.
f'ourtccnth Amendment
On ) rd July. 1997 the parliament approved the fourteenth amendment to
introduce a new article 63-A in the constitution. The object of insertion of this
article was to add one more item in the long List of disqualifications for
membership of the parliament, already existing in the form of the article 63.
The new article was intended to eliminate the malpractice of changing part)
loyalties by the elected members of ·the parliament and the provincial assemblies
for personal gains and other ulterior motives. The prartice of defecting from one
party to another is known in common parlance as indulging in "horse trading" and
had been one of the major factors contributing to political instability in the past.
Under this clause (2). the procedure of action against a member charged with an act
of defection is provided.
Seventeenth Constitutional Amendment
By seventeenth amendment certain articles of LFO were changed while
others were made the part of the constitution even without the approval of the
parliament. Sali�nt features of the seventh amendment are as under.
I. Under the LFO Perviaz Musharraf could hold two offices of COAS and the
President of Pakistan. But according the article 63 after the seve nteenth
amendment, he will have to relinquish the office of COAS by 31 December,
st
,.
2004.
at
.., The President's authority of dissolving the assemblies was conditioned to th
the
of the president, after dissolving the assemblies, will have to refer
170
Studies for (BS-4 year5)
Hadi Pakistan
dissolution to the Supreme Court with in 15 dJys I he Supreme court v. ill

explain the constitutional status of the pres1dent1al action with-in 15 <la>�-
3 The LFO had set up the National Security Council. But according lo
seventeenth amendment the NSC would be established by 1he purliament
legislation and it will not be considered an institution.
4. According to the seventeenth amendment the age limit of the judge of higher
courts was enhanced for three years under LFO. Under tbis amendment 1t was
withdrawn and put under article 62 and 65 in the constitution.
5. According to the LFO Prime Minister had no role in the appointment of
Chairman joint Chief of staff Committee and the chief of three anned forces.
6. It was compulsory for the president to see k vote of confidence from the
parliament and four provincial assemblies.
Eighteenth constitutional amendment
The National Assembly passed the landmark constitutional reforms bill on
111
8 April 2010, and the senate passed it on 12th April, 2010. Its details are as
follows.
I. According to the eighteenth amendment president's power to dissolve the
Assembly on his own under article 58/2(b) has been with-drawn.
2. The name of the NWFP will be changed and re-named as Khyber
Pakhtunkhaw.
3. A proper system to appoint members of the superior judiciary will be proposed.
4- Concurrent list to be abolished to give more autonomy to the provinces.
5- Chief Election Commissioner to be appointed in consultation with the leader of
the opposition.
6 · Islamabad High Court to be revived.
Ninet eenth Constitutional Amendment
National Assembly passed the amendment on 23 December 2010 and the
rd
Senate passed on 25th December, 2010. Its details are as follows:

1· nder ad-hoc
U Article 182 Chief Justice of Pakistan recommends the name of
�Udges to the Pre;ident through the Prime Minister, in consultation with the
JUdicial commission of Pak istan. . .
2· n
U der Article 175-A clause (2) four senior most judges would be appointed 10
the judicial commission of Pakistan instead of two.
171
Hadi PaJ.,�tan Smtli�Jor (BS-4 rears) ""-t
Lak.ki ,Man,at and Tank districts

3. Under article 246 the tribal areas adjoining
have been declared part of FATA.
of Islamabad High Coun was
Under the articles 81 and I 75. the name
tal territol) to Islamabad High
changed from High Court for 'the Islamabad capi
court.
20'h Constitutional Amendment
The ational Assembh passed the 20 constitutional amendment on 3
th r:!
February. 2012 and the Senate passed it next week. The 20'h amendment is aimed at
making the election commission trul) independent and to establish a naruraJ
caretaker set up both in centre and in the provinces.
The tenure of the members of the Election Commission has been fixed for
five years. Amendment and additions in articles 48 and 22-l of the constitution
details the procedure that will be adopted if PM and the leader of the opposition do
not agree on who to be appointed as caretaker PM and CM. The incumbent Prime
Ministrr and Chief Minister shall continue to hold office till the appointment of the
caretaker Prime Minister and Chief Minister. According to an amendment in article
215 of the constitution, the Chief Election Commissioner and members of the
Election Commission would hold office for a period of five years.
EXERCISE-4
OBJECTIVE TYPE QUESTIONS
Q.1: Encircle the correct options.

l . Pakistan was created as independent Islamic state on
(a) 14th August 1947 (b) 15 th August 1947
th
(c) 13 August 1947 (d) 141h August 1948
_ .
2. Quaid-e-Azam left Dehh for Karachi on
(a) 11 th August 1947 (b) 121h August 1947
th
(c) 13 August 1947 (d) 14th August 1947
3. The first Cabinet of Pakistan took Oath on
(a) 14 th August 1947 (b) 15 th August 1947
th
(c) 13 August 1947 (d) 14 th August 1947
4. Quaid-e-Azam Died on
(a) 10th September 1947 (b) 11 th September 1947
(c) 10 September 1948 (d) 11th September 1948
172
5. The first governor general of Pakistan was

(a) Quaid-e-Azam (b) Liaquat Ali Khan
(c) Khawaja Nazimuddin (d) Sikandar Mirza
6. The first Prime Minister of Pakistan was
(a) Liaqat Ali Khan (b) Khawaja Nazimuddin
(c) Quaid-e-Azam (d) Mirza Ghulam Muhammad
7. The first interim report of the basic princjples committees was presented by
(a) Liaqat Ali Khan (b) Malik Ghulam Muhammad
(c) Sikandar Mirza (d) Ch. Muhammad Ali
8. Liaqat Ali Khan was killed on
(a)16 October 1951 (b)17 October 1951
(c)16 October 1952 (d)17 October 1952
9. Second Governor General of Pakistan was
(a) Quaid-e-Azam (b) Khawaja Nizimuddin
(c) Malik Ghulam Muhammad (d) Sikandar Mirza
10. Second Prime Minister of Pakistan was
(a) Liaqat Ali Khan (b) Khawaja Nazimuddin
(c)Ch. Muhammad Ali (d) Muhammad Ali Bogra
11. Third Prime Minister of Pakistan was ______
(a) Muhammad Ali Bogra (b) Ch. Muhammad Ali
(c)I.I. Chundrigar (d) Feroz Khan Noon
12. Third Governor General of Pakistan was
(a) Khawaja Nazimuddin (b) Malik Ghulam Muhammad
(c) Sikandar Mirza (d) Hussain Shaheed Soharwardi
13. Last governor general of Pakistan was
(a) Sikandar Mriza (b) Khawaja Nazimuddin
(c) Malik Ghulam Muhammad (d) Ch. Muhammad Ali
14. First president of Pakistan was
(a) Malik Ghulam Muhammad (b) Sikandar Mirza
(c)Ayub Khan (d) Ch. Muhammad Ali
IS. Muhammad Ali Bogra Formula was presented on
(a)l955 (b)l956 (c)1953 (d) 1952
16. The first constitution assembly was dissolved by
(a) Sikandar Mirza (b) Malik Ghulam Muhammad
(c) Khawaja Nazimuddin (d) Ayub Khan
17. The first constituent Assembly was dissolved on
(a) 1954 (b)1955 (c ) 1952 (d)1951
173
/Jadl Paklt.tart St11dle�for (BS-4 ytum)
18. One unit of Pakistan was promulgated on

(a) l952 (b) J 953 (c) l 954 (d) 1955
19. The first constitution of Pakistan wos implemented on
(a)23 March 1956 (b) 14Augu�l 1956
(c)8 June 1956 (d)24 March I 956
20. The constitution of Pakistan was consisted of ______ Clauscf-1
(a)234 (b) 240 (c)242 (d)250
21. Ayub Khan became president of Pakistan on
(a)1955 (b) l 956 (c) l 957 (d) 1958
22 . Family laws ordinance was implemented on
(a)1960 (b)l961 (c) l962 (d)1963
23. The constitution of1962 was implemented on
(a)8th June 1962 (b)23 March 1962
th
(c)14 August 1962 (d)15 August 1962
24. General Yaha Khan took over the charge as president of Pakistan on ___
(a) 1968 (b) I 969 (c) 1970 (d) 197 l
25. The first General· elections were heBd in Pakistan on
(a) 'J 969 (b) 1970 (c) 1971 (d) 1972
26. East Pakistan became an independent country as Bangladesh on _____
(a) 16th December 1971 (b)17'hOctober 1971
(c) 1 g lh October 1971 (d) 19th October 1971
27. Z.A. Bhutto took over the charge as civilian Martial Law administrator of
Pakjstan on
(a) 1969 (b) 1970 (c) 1971 (d) 1972
28. The constitu tion of Pakistan 1973 was enforced on
(a) 8th June] 973 (b) 23 rll March 1973
th
(c) 14 August 1973 (d) 15 th August 1973
29. The constitution of1973 having ____ _ Articles.
(a) 234 ·t (b) 280 (c) 28 I (d) 285
30. ' presented six points before general elections 1970
(a) Yahaya Khan (b) Z.A Bhutto
(c) Shaikh Majeeb-ur-Rehman (d) Noor-ul-Ameen
31. Objective Resolution was passed in
(a) 1948 {b) 1949 (c) 1950 (d) 1951
32. According to �bjective resolution the system of the country will be.
(a) Unitary (b) Non-federal (c) Federal (d) Presidential
33. Hadood ordinance was implemented in
174
Hadl Pakistan Studies for (BS-4 years)
(a)\979 (b)\980 (c)1978 (d)l981

34. Who implemented the system of Basic democracies?
(a ) Zia-ul-Haq (b) Sikandar Mirza (c) Ayub Khan (d) Yahaya Khan
35. In which year Pakistan made nuclear explosions?
(a)1997 (b) 1999 (c) 1998 (d) 1996
Q.2: Tick the True and False.
\ Quaid-e-Azam came Karachi form Delhi on 11 th August 1947. True/ False
1 Quaid-e-Azam died on 11 th September 1947. True/ False
3 Objective resolution was passed on 1949. True/ False
4 Liaquat Ali Khan was the first president of first principles True/ False
committee
S First interim report of the basic committee was presented in 1950. True False
6 Liaquat Ali Khan was assassinated at Rawalpindi in 1950. True/ False
7 Khawaja Nazimuddin presented the second report of the Basic True/ False
principles committee in 1952.
8 Sikandar Mirza was the first Governor General of Pakistan. True/ False
9 Khawaja Nazimuddin was the second Governor General of True/ False
Pakistan.
l O Sikander Mirza was the first president of Pakistan. True/ False
l \ Constitution of 1956 was the first constitution of Pakistan. True/ False
\ 2 Presidential system of Government was introduced in the True/ False
constitution of l 962.
\ 3 Ch. Muhammad Ali presented Muhammad Ali Bogra formula True I False
in the constituent assembly on 1953.
14 Khawaja Nazimuddin did not dissolve the first constituent True I False
Assembly.
\ S The first constitution of Pakistan was not enforced during the True/ False
regime of Ch. Muhammad Ali .
. . .
16 Shaikh Mujeeb-ur-Rheman presented his six pomt before Tr�e/ False
general elections of 197 0.
17 Mr. Z.A Bhutto was the president of Pakistan. True/ False
18 The president is a hea d of the state. True/ False
19 ln lslam sovereignty belongs to Allah Almighty. True/ False
20 Fede ral syste m wa s introduced in the objective resolution True I False
21 The consti tution of Pakistan 1962 was passed by Y aha ya Khan . True/ False
22 The system of ba�ic democr�cy was introduced by Zia-ul-Haq. True/ False
23 The Hadood Ordinance was implemented in 1979. True/ False
175
1/urll J>ukl\t1111 sr,11//1•\ or 11.\'·4 '1'11"
Q.1: Fill in tht• Ulnnk . _

n d. p ·ndcnt Jslumic stat e _ ____
I When did Puk1stnn emerge as u 111
� � - . ,chi ---------
()mud e A1 um lea ve D elhi I or K,tn
2 When did
1 When tltd ()uu1d-e-A1am die
4 When wus the ObJecti"e resolution p uss
uth
5 When did the first cu binet of Pnki5lun take O
committee
Who wus the president or first basic principles • . •.
ciple s com mitt ee pre s ente d m the ftrst mtcnor
�: When was the basic prin
report in . · . ·ct·
8 When was Liaqu at Ali khan s assm ated at Rawa 1pmi 1
u s
nd :
in
9. When was the ba sic principles committee presented the 2 .mtenor report
I 0.Who was the first Governor General of Paki stan __________

11. Who was the second Governcr General of Paki stan ________�
12. Who was the first Prime Minister of Pakistan ___________
13. Who was the s econd Prime Minister of Pakistan __________
14. Who di smiss ed the government ofKhawaja Nazimud-Din ______
15. Who was the third Prime minister of Pakistan___________
16. When was Muhammad Ali Bogra formula presented in the constituent
assembly _________ ___
17. Who di ssolved the First Constituent Assembly of Pakistan ______
18. When was the first constitution assembly of Paki stan dissolved __�-
19. Who was the fourth Prime Minister of Pakistan ______ ____
20. When was one unit of Pakistan promulgated ___________
21. When was the first constitution of Pakistan implemented ___ ___
22. The constitution of 1956 wa s consisted of _________ clauses.
23. Who was first president of Pakistan__________ __
_ _
24. Who wos the last governer General of Pakistan _________
_
25. When did Ayub Khan become pre sident of Pakistan, _____
26. When was the family Laws ordinance issued _____ ____
__
27. When was the constitution of 1962 implemented __ ___ _
___
28. When did general Yahaya Khan take over the charge as pres ident of
Pakistan --
29. When were the first general elections held in Pakistan
____ ___
30. Who launched civil disobedience movement in Bangl
adesh, _____
31. When did general Tika Khan start Military operation in Bengal ___.
_
176
32. When did Indian Anny enter jn Dacca---------------

33. Who presented six Points
34. Which was first capital of Pakistan------------·
35. The constitution of 1973 having ___________ c1fticle'.l.
------·
36. When was the constitution of 1973 of Pakistan inforccd
37. When did Z.A Bhutto take over the charge as c1vHtan Martial Law
administrator of Pakistan------
38. Objective Resolution was passed in ------------
- --------
39. The Hadood ordinance was implemented in -
40. In which year Pakistan made nuclear explosions ________
'
ANSWERS
1.(a) 2.(a) 3.(b) 4.(d) 5.(a) 6.(a) 7.(a) 8.(a) 9.(b) 10.(b) 11.(a) 12.(b) 13.faJ 14.(bJ
15.(c) 16.(b) 17.(a) 18.(d) 19.(a) 20.(a) 21.(d) 22.(b) 23.(a) 24.(b) 25.(b) 26 fa)
27.(c) 28.(c) 29.(b) 30.(c) 31.(b) 32.(c)33.(a)34.(c)35.(c).
Q No.2: Tick the correct ehoice.
l.(T) 2.(F) 3.(T) 4.(F) 5.(T) 6.(F) 7.(T) 8.(F) 9.(T), 10.(T) 11.(T) 12.(T) 13.(FJ
14.(T)15.(F) 16.(T) 17.(T) 18.{T) 19.(T)20.(T)21.(F)22.(F)23.(T).
th th
(1)141h august 1947 (2) l 1 august 1947 (3) 1 I September 1948 (4)1949 (SJ
ISaugust 1947 (6) Moulvi Tamiz-ud-din (7)1950 (8) 16th October 1951 (9)22nd
December 1952 (10) Quaid-e-Azam (11) Khawau Nazim-ud-din (12) Liaquat Ali
Kh an (13) Khawaza Nazim-ud-din (14) Malik Ghulam Muhammad
{15)Muhammad Ali Bogra (16) 1953 (17) Malik Ghulam Muhammad (18) 1954
(19)Choudhry Muhammad Ali (20) 1955 (21)23 rd March 1956 (24)Sikandar Mirza
(25) 1958 (26) 1961 (27) 8th June 1962 (28) 1969 (29) J 970 (30) Sheikh MuJeeb
ur-Rehman (31) J 971 (32) 16th December J 97 l (33) Sheikh Mujeeb-ur-Rehman
(34) Karachi (35) 280 (36) 14th August 1973 (37) 20th December 1971 (38) 1949
(39)1979 (40)1998.
177
llatl
a , Pakista11 Studies
' fior (BS-4 tat'l
J )
Short Questions
1 • Write down any two o s of · . .
t the obJ ect1 ve resolutions.
m
2. Write any two featuresp of M uh amrna d Ali
. Bogra Formula.
3. Wnte any t wo features of the constitution of Pakistan 1956.
4. Write any two featu res of the constitution of Pakistan J 962.
5. Write an) two Islamic provisions of constitution of Pakistan 1956.
6. Write a short note on lndusBasin treaty of 1960.
7. Write an) two Labour reforms, during Ayub Khan Regime.
8. \Vhat wns Ayub Khan's in heritance reforms.
9. Write in c;hort about family laws ordinance 1961 of Ayub Khan.
1 O. Write down any two reasons of separation of East Pakistan.
racy system.
11. Write down any two reasons of failure of parliamentary democ
12. Write any two educational reforms of Mr Z.A Bhutto.
13. What is Islamic Ideology council?
e-58.
14. Write the Eight constitutional Amendments, the Articl
LONG QUESTIONS
1. Discuss the provisions of obJ_ective Resolutionc;

2_ Write down the Islamic provisions of the constitution of 1956.
3 Write dov.n the Islamic provu,ions of the constitution of l 973.
4 Write do}\n the features of the constitution of 1973.
5. Write dov.n the main points of family laws ordinance 1961.
6 Write dov,n the educational policy of Mr. Z.A Bhutto?
7 Write down the Labour refonns of Muhammad Ayub Khan.
g Write down the causes of separation of East Pakistan.
9 Wnte down the causes of failure of Parliamentary democracy in Pakistan.
178
1
Hadl PaJ..l.stan Studi� f()r (BS--4 years)

'
CHAPTER-5
ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL ISSUES IN PAKISTAN
5.1 INDUSTRIALIZATION DEVELOPMENT AND PROBLEi\.tS

Industry
More than one, firms producing the same commodit} is called industry .
Industrialization
"Industrialization is a process of building up a countr:i ·s capactl) to process
raw material and to manufacture goods for consumption or further production"
Industrialization is the basic solution for economic development of a
developing country. The history shov.s that all the developed countnes of the \\J)rld
got development by industrialization. Pakistan requires industrialization to achie\:e
higher standard of living.
Importance of Industrial development
1 Improvement in Balance of Payment
Industrialization can change the pattern of foreign trade of the country. Bj
the process, of industrialization, the export of manufactured goods can be
increased. On the other hand, import substitution industries can save foreign
exchange. The export orientation and import substitution effects of industrialization
can improve the balance of payments.
2 Increase Employment Opportunities
Industrialization enhances the employment opportunities. People can get
jobs in small and large scale industries. In developing countries, industr) provide
employment to underemployed and unemployed workers of agricultural sector.
3. Increase in National Income
A country can make the optimum, utilization of the scarce resources
through industrialization. It increases the quantity and quality of a Yariet} of
manufactured goods. So national income increases due to progress of this sector.
179
""'" l't1kl\tw, S1t11/11•'1 for (/IS 4 ytllr,'1) a
4. ICn1<1y to Control Industrial Activity

The role of nature is more in agriculture than industry. In industry_, the r�le
of' humun beings is more and industrial activity is easy to co�!rol. The industrial
production can be increased or decreased according to the conditions of the market.
5. Rilic in Agricultural Production
lndu�triali,.ation provides mechanical equipments like tractors, thrashers,
harvesters, bulldozers, transport etc. These mechanical equipments increase the per
hectare yield. As a result, income of the farmers increases.
<,. Higher Standard of Living
Duc to industrialization, the value of output per worker increases. The
laborers arc awarded high rewards and incomes. The rise in income raises the
standard of living of the people.
7. l◄:conomic Stability
Industrialization creates economic stability in the country. A country by
export promotion industries and import substitution industries can increase its
foreign trade and earn foreign exchange. This will increase in the productivity of
other sectors.
8. Progress of Other Sectors
Other sectors of the economy can flourish due to industrialization. Industry
has backward link with agriculture and forward link with trade and other sectors. A
development of one industry is the development of other sectors.
9. Promotes Specialization
Industrialization promotes division of work and specialization of labour.
The speciali zation of labour increases the productivity of labour. So, the income
and standard of living of industrial worker is more than agrarian worker.
JO. Large Scope for Technological Progress
Technological progress has a larger scope in industrialization. Modern
technology increases production and reduces cost of production. Quality and
quantity of production improves.
J]. Reduction in Population Pressure
Due to industrialization, surplus labour migrates from agriculture to
r
180
--
Jlodl Pakistan
Stud ies for (BS-I years)
. dustries mostly situated in urban areas. In these areas, people adopt family
;i anning measures which reduce the population growth rate.
1 2 • Increased Saving and Investment
Industrialization increases the income of people. So, their power to save
enhances and process of capital formation starts which can be helpful in brooking
the vicious circle of poverty.
13. Provision for Defence
Due to industrialization, a country can manufacture arms and ammunition
for the defence of the country. Its dependence on foreign countries can be reduced.
This will save the precious foreign exchange.
14. Increase in Government Revenue
Due to industrialization, production increases. The government gets
customs, excise duties and other taxes levied on the production of goods and
revenue of the state increases. These rev,enues are spent for the welfare of the
people.
Industrial Problems.
l. Lack of Technical Know how
Technical know how are a pre requisite for establishing industry. Even the
availability of capital will be of no use if we do not know techniques and methods
of production of different goods.
2. Weak Infrastructure
Roads, water supply, power supply, telephone services which provide the
basis to establish industries are called infrastructure. If infrastructure is available in
abundant quantity, it stimulates industrial growth.
3. Shortage of Capital
This is the most serious problem in industrial growth. Pakistan has a low
national and per capita income. So our national savings are small. Against this;
modern industry which is mostly large scale, require huge amounts of capital. To
tnake up the deficiency in domestic resources for development, Pakistan has
bor r owed heavily from other countries. Still capital is not available in sufficient
quantity and rate of investment in industry is unsatisfactory.
181
4. Shortage of Raw Materials
Many industries depend on important nm materialc;, e.g. silk yam �
plastics.Because of shortage of foreign exchange, most of them are frequently in
trouble.
5. Smuggling
Due to broader situations, smuggling is wide spread. Many foreign goods
are available at cheaper rates than locally manufactured ones. This., situation has
forced some local industries to close down.
6. People's Craze for Foreign Goods
People's craze for foreign goods creates problem It keeps the demand for
local industrial products limited.
7. Inadequate Facilities for Transport and Communication
Inadequate facilities for transport and communication also act as a
constraint in industrial expansion To move raw materials to the factories and the
finished goods to market needs transport
8. Labor Unrest
Labor is an integral part of every mdustrial umt. Jn Pakistan due to political
and social reasons, there have been labor unrest, industrial d i sputes and strikes.
Under these circumstances, the capitalists are discouraged to invest their money.
9. Inadequate Industrial Finance
Credit facilities for industrial projects are limited. ln many cases. inspite of
technical know-how and favorable marketing conditions. people cannot setup
industry due to inadequate funds. If somehow capital is available it is provided at
high interest rate which leads towards high cost of production i n indusuies. So,
thes� industries are not able to compete with the production of foreign industries.
10. Inferior Quality
In most cases, the quantity of our industrial prod
.
quality goods cannot successfully compete with ucts is inferior. Our poor
foreign goods.
.________________ 182 _____________�--

St11tliesfor (BS-4 years)
lfudl Pakistan
,:;.->'
lt. Lack of Entrepreneurial Class

Existl!nce of dynamic entrepreneurial class is very helpful in industrial
l!xpansion. Pakistan has a limited number of such enterprising people who can take
risks and can promote new, non-traditional type of industries, e.g. electronics.
t2. High Cost of Production
The cost of production of many industrial goods is very high.
13. Neglect of Capital Goods
In Pakistan, there is imbalance in industrial growth. Manufacturing of
consumer goods is preferred over capital goods and machinery because return on
capital goods is irregtllar and lower.
14. Lack of industrial research
Research is needed to reduce cost of production; greater use of local
materials; improve quality and to develop new products. But due to shortage of
capital only limited facilities for industrial research exists
15. Working Environment
Working environment in most of small scale industry is unsatisfactory
which has negative effect on labor productivity.
16. Changes in Industrial Policy
There are frequent changes in industrial policy. In 1960s private sector was
encouraged so industrial growth was rapid. During 1970s policy of nationalization
resulted in sharp fall in private investment. During 1980s and 1990s the
?overnment again encouraged private investment, but due to the frequent changes
tn go v ernment policy, misuse of bank loans and terrorist activities, industrial
growth remained low.
Solution of Industrial Problems

1. Quality Control
Quality is very important for the boost up of industry .Strict quality control
should be observed.
183
Hadi Pakistan Studies for (BS-4 years) -
2. Supply of raw materials
To ensur,e regular supply of raw materials, industrial and agricultural sectors
should be developed through integrated planning.
3. Establishment of Basic Industries
The government should patronize the establishment of steel-based and
electronic industry.
4. Tax Concessions
Tax concession for selected industries can also help to increase investment.
5. Increase in Saving and Capital Stock
Capital is a life blood of industry. All efforts have to be made for
accumulation of capital. Capital must be created either through savings or
borrowing.
6. Trained Manpower
More and more people should be given technical and vocational training.
7. Protection
To those new industries for which raw-material is available locally, the
government should provide protection.
8. Deletion Policy
Deletion Policy in the industries established with collaboration of foreign
investors the policy of deletion should be followed actively and that share of locall }
made part increase.
9. Revival of Sick Units
Government has established with collaboration to sell or restructure sick
industrial units.
10. Technical Know-how
Pakistani firms should seek collaboration with foreign firms for of transfer
of technology and establish those industries for which we lack technical kno w-ho�-
.'
184
11,1 1111'11A/\11111 \111,/11•\ or ►
/JS 4 '•'fir\)
11. lnd1111tri11I nc11curch

Mon.· lu11d'i should he ,1lloca1�d for R&D (l{l.-;�earch and Development).
( ·onstunt dimls 'iho11ld be made 10 improve design materials and methods used in
111dustr111l prodm.t1on
12. l)ircct Forci�n Investment
l!l'fort� should he made to attract direct foreign invcstn:1cnts.
13. lncrcusc in Industrial Credit
More institutions should be cstabl ishcd for indu�trial loans. Small industries
should be given preference.
14. Industrial Estates
·1 o help private investors, industrial estates should be established in more
towns and basic focilities like water, power and roads be provided.
Industries Promotion Measures Taken by the Government
Pakistan had a very weak industrial base since 1947. There were 921
industrial units in the subcontinent at the time of partition. Pakistan inherited onl)'
34 industrial units. These units were related to 0our, rice, sugar, cement, glas�.
matches, ginning and' cotton textiles. There was not a single jute factory in East
Pakistan (Bangladesh). Under the circumstances, the government of Pakistan took
the following steps for the promotion of industries in the country.
I. Establishment of Financial Intuitions
Government of Pakistan has established various financial institutions for the
promotion of industries in the country.
a) Pakistan Industrial Development Corporation
Pakistan [ndustdal Development Corporation (PIDC) was established in
I 950. The objectives of PIDC were planning. promoting, organizing and
implementing programmes for the establishment of large scale industries in
Pakistan. It started its operation in I 952. PIDC set up industries in those fields
where private sector was not interested due to low profits and in the fields where
huge capital was required. PfDC established 60 industrial and mining projects
during 1952-1972.
I 85
Had/ Pakistan Studiesfor (BS-4 years)
b) Pakistan Industrial Credit and Investment Corporation

Pakistan Industrial Credit and Investment Corporation (PlCIC) was created
in 1957 in order to meet the working and fixed capital requirements for industries
set up in the private sector. It provided loans to newly established industries in local
and foreign currencies. The duration of loan was between 7 to 15 years The loa n
was paid in installments.
c) Industrial Development Bank of Pakistan
Industrial Development Bani< of Pakistan (IDBP) was established in 1961
The objective of IDBP was to give credit for the projects which use domestic raw
material and were export oriented. IDBP provided credit facility for the
development of engineering, chemicals, paper. rubber and transport industry.
d) National Investment Trust
National Investment Trust (NIT) was established in 1962. lts head office is
in Karachi. The main objective of NIT was to mobilize saYings of the people and
provide loans to industrial sector.
e) Investment Corporation of Pakistan
Investment Corporation of Pakistan (ICP) was established"in 1966. State
life insurance and federal government subscribed capital to run ICP. The objecti,es
of ICP were to develop a capital market in the country and increase the equit)
investment.
f) Equity Participation Fund
Equity Participation Fund (EPF) was established in I 970. Its, head office is
in Karachi. The main objective of EPF was to provide loans for the growth of small
and medium industries.
g) National Development Finance Corporation
National Development Finance Corporation (NDFC) was estab.ijshed in
J 973. The main objective of NDFC was to provide capital for the public sector but
under some conditions, it also provided capital for the private sector. NDFC gave
loans for project assistance, industrial expansion and modernization of indus trial
units.
186
Had/ Pakistan St11d/es far {IIS-4years)
h) Bankers Equity Limited

Bankers Equity Limited (BEL) was established in 1980. H is public limited
company. The main objective of BEL was to provide loans for the growth of
industries.
2. Industrial Policy of 1948
For the establi$hment of industries in the country, government announced
Industrial Policy of April 1948. In this policy, government w� mainly concerned
in setting up those industries which had the raw materials. in the country and which
had demand for the products at home and abroad. The jute. cotton, consumer
goods, hides and skins industries were given preference.
3. Protection Policy
Government of Pakistan established Tariff Commission to promote
industrialization in the country by giving tariff protection to local industries during
from 1953-64. All imports of Pakistan were regulated by quantitative controls.
4. Establishment of Industrial Estates
Government has set up industrial estates in all provinces of the country for
the promotion of industries. These industrial estates are located in the outer edge of
big cities of Karachi, Hyderabad, Larkana, Suk.kur, Lahore, Gujranwala.
Sialkot,Gujarat, Multan, Peshawar and Quetta. Government has provided land, gas.
water,electricity, roads, banking facilities in these industrial estates for the
promotion ofindustries.
s. Export Bonus Scheme
Export Bonus Scheme (EBS) was introduced* in 1959 to increase the
exports /According to this scheme, foreign exchange bonus on all exports (except
�ajorprimary commoditie s) was given to the exporters. This scheme was originally
introduced for one year but it was later extended to the end of 4th plan period
(1970-75). The scheme showed encouraging results regarding exports for a few
Years. This Scheme supported a lot in the promotion of industries.
6. Foreign Investment
. The inflow of foreign investment is very vital for the promotion of
�ndustries in the country. Foreign capital contributed a lot for the rapid increase in
Industrializ ation in 1960s. Government provides various incentives to attract the
�eign investors.
1
187
llmli J>nJ.i\11111 S11ulii:,for (BS-4 l't'lln)
7. Dcrcgulution nnd Libcrnlization

nt in the
Deregulation and libcrulization mean� the role. of �ov�mme _
economy should be minimized. A deregulation . and h_berall zat1on po _licy �as
presented 111 sixth the )ear plan I 983-88 for industrial growth. This pohc)
cncoumgc<l the prh ntc sector to participate in industrial development of the
Cl..lllnlf).
R. Pri, nti1ution Policy

Pri\'atization is the comer stone of the successful economic reforms of the
Go, cmmcnt. Gon!rnment of Pakistan announced privatization policy in 1991 in
order to obtain capital both from domestic and foreign in the private sector. The
state owned enterprises are now gradually privatized by auctioning to local and
foreign investors. The privatization policy is pla) ing an important role in industrial
development of the country.
9. E:\.port Processing Zones
Government has established export processing zones at Karachi, Lahore,
ialkot, Ra\.\alpindi and Peshawar for providing facilities to exporters. Government
has provided land, gas, water, electricity, roads. banking facilities in these
industrial estates for the promotion of industries.
10. Fiscal and Monetary Incentives
Government has provided many fiscal and monetary incentives for rapid
industrialization. These incentives include three years income tax holiday to new
industries, reduction in custom duties and sales tax on imported machinery etc.
11. Improvement in the Performance of Public Sector Industries
National Fertilizer Corporation (NFC), Pakistan Automobile Corporation
(PAGO), Pakistan Industrial Development Corporation (PIDC), State Cement
Corporation Pakistan (SCCP) and Pakistan Steel Mills Corporation (PSMC) etc are
major public sector industries in Pakistan. Government has taken many steps for
the improvement in the performance of public sector industries.
12. Long term Textile Policy
Pakistan's textile industry ranks amongst the top in the world. Pakistan i s
world's fourth largest producer of cotton and the third largest consumer of the
same. Cotton based textiles contribute over 60% to the total exports, accounts for
46%of the total manufacturing and provide employment to 38% manufactuci:!;.
188
/liull 1•ul.ht1111 St111II••\ tir ll.\'-4 1•t•11n
lnbor force. /\ long term te,tilc policy is being drown to prepnrc Pakistan to
compete in u 4uow free 11nd rcslnct1on free markets I rnm 2005 onward
5.2 AGRICULTURAL Dl�VELOPMENT ANO PROBLEMS
/\gricultun.: sector cun play u vital role in the progress of any country 1.c. 1f
agriculture sector is promoted, tt will leud u country towards development. So, the
developing countries should conccntrnte lo develop their agriculture sector. But in
practice, we sec that n lot or problems exist in agriculture sector of developing
countries owing to this per acre yield is low.
A�riculturc problems urc u� follows;
I. Wutcr Lo��in� und Sulinity
·1 his problem is said to he u twin problem becau'ic 11 is believed that water
logging ond salinity ure produced at the sume time. Water logging and salinity are
very harmful for crops Wute1 logging un<l Salinll) as t.aus..:d \\h-:n hl!avy amounts
or water drip into the soil due to excessive mig.tt1on or rainfall 111 the re�ult of
which water table rises. Sahnlly 1s n:sulted from water-logging. As the water table
rises, the snits present in the subs01I ulso rise to the surface of the soil. Due to
cvuporation of water from the soil surface, the salts arc left on the surface in the
form of a powdery or fluffy mass. thus the rise of water table causes water logging
while accumulation of suits 111 large quantities in the upper layers of the soil give
rise lo salinity at the ns\! in water tublc causes water logging. A large part of
cultivable lund in Pun.1ab and Sindh is udversely aflected by this problem. About 15
lnck acres of cullivablc land has been destroyed und productivity of one lack acre
land is decreasing due to water logging und salinity.
2. Plant Disusc!J
Pests usually uttack the crops like cotton� sugarcane wheat and rice. The
pests andplant disease reduce the agricultural production annually.
3. Flood11
Despite the existence of good irrigation canal network in the world,
Pakistan stilt suffers from wastage of u large amount of water in the irrigation
process. During the monsoon season (July- September) the normal rainfall is 240
nun. Therefore, the rivers urc flooded every year and millions of acres of crops are
damaged by the tloods. The fertility of land is destroyed due to floods and soil
erosion exists. Million ucrcs of fertile lnnd urc destroyed hy these noods every year.
189
Had/ PaALlitan Studie., far (B -" yearli)
-t cllrcit) of Irrigation Water

It i� "ell-1-.nown that an efficient irrigation system is a pre-r�quisite for
mcreasing agriculturol production since water is a basic input for agn�ulture. In
Pnki tan. 67°.0 is bnrani area where irrigation completely depends-on rainfalls. At
times. rainfall does uot start at required time or sometimes there is heavy rainfall
which is not needed and often no rainfall is received. So, scarcity of irrigation water
is a serious problem in the expansion of crop areas in Pakistan.
5. Consumption Oriented People
In de,eloping countries, rural people are consumption oriented. They spend
more on the occasions of marriages, births and death, Urs and fairs. So, they have
shortage of capital for cultivation. They can not purchase the desired agriculture
inputs.
6. Litigation
Major part of farmers' income is spent on litigation. They can be seen in
irrigation office. police station and in courts. So, they can not give their proper time
and money to cultivation.
7. Under-Utilization of Land
Total Cropped Area means the aggregate area of crops raised in a farm
during the year including the area under fruit trees. The total area of Pakistan
contains 79.6 I ·million hectares, out of which 22.5 I million hectares area is
cultivable land. Total Cropped Area is about 28.27% of total area. About 9 million
hectares is used for Culturable Waste that is uncultivated farm area which is fit for
cultivation but was not cropped. About 24.23 million hectares is used for fatm
home steads, farm roads and other connected purposes and not available for
cultivation. Therefore, there is huge wastage and under utilization of land in
Pakistan.
8. Inadequate Use of Inputs
Modem inputs like chemical fertilizers, -improved seeds, pesticides and
machines are compulsory for rise in productivity. But agriculture inputs are costly
and are not regularly available in desired quantities. Implements, seeds, fertilizers,
insecticides and electric supply are often in short supply. The farmers in Pakistan
are poor so they can not purchase such costly inputs therefore; they use outdated
techniques e.g. a wooden plough drawn by animals for cropping.
190
'
Had/ Pakistan Studies for ( BS--4 years )
9. Poor Health and Illiteracy

The he"llth condition of farmers is also very poor due to unhygienic
conditions and malnutrition therefore, their physical and mental capabilities are
very low. ln addition, majority of rural population in Pakistan is illiterate. They do
not knowabout fertility and requirements of land. They make use of their own
physical labour. These are over contended people mostly depend upon fate.
10. Landlordism
Landlordism or feudalism is a major obstacle in the way of development of
the agriculture sector. Landlords own thousands acres land and reside in cities away
from lands. They get produce without any expenses through tenancy. So they do
not take any pam for increasing prodaction. Lack of interest by the landlords is the
main cause of low per acre yield.
11. Uneconomic Land Distribution
Population of Pakistan is increasing day by day and land is being distributed
into so many small pieces due to law of inheritance These pieces of land are so
small and scattered at vanous places that the farmer can not use modern methods of
cultivation Mechanization requires large pieces of land which is only possible
through consoh<lat1on of land into one place. The apphcatton of machinery to small
farms results in high cost of production that it becomes uneconomical to use them
for cultivation. According to statistics of 1982, 30% of farmers ov.ned less than
12/2 to 25 acres of land and 18% landlords had 50 to 150 acres of land.
12. Non-Availability of Credit
Agricultural credit provides financial resources to the farming communit}
particularly, for the purchase of primary inputs like fertilizer, seed, pesticides,
machinery, equipment etc. In Pakistan, majority of farmers own small units of
cultivable land. These fanners do not fulfil the requirements for the grant of credit
by credit providing authorities. So, they can not purchase inputs to improve output.
13 Lack of Agro-based Industry
Agro based industries has backward link with agriculture. There is lack of
agro based industries in the rural areas. The agriculture inputs do not reach
industries at proper time which again causes low income and low per acre yield.
191
-./ years) :z...,
Hadi Pak/start Studies for (BS
Markets
l-'. Un-organized Agricultural
e
e to meet the requirem nts of growth of
Rural infrastructure is inadequat y
to market are not on ly ve� old and time
agriculture. The roads from farm
r. So the �armers sel l t�e•� prod uce to the
consuming but also its condition is poo
seJJs his products w1th111 a short period
traders at \er) lo\\ prices. The grower also
areas.
because there are no storage facilities at rural
15. Low Cropping Intensity
Crop intensity means th e number of crops grown on a piece of land per
year. In Pakistan, many lands are under cultivated and only one crop is grown in
every t\.\elve months. So crop in�nsity is very low and limited. Double cropping is
done on the area.
16. DefectiveLand Tenure System
Th� system of ownership of land, rights and terms of cultivation and sharing
of output is called land tenure system. Land tenure system in Pakistan is defecti,e
due to two major reasons:
i) Absentee landlord
ii) Exploitation of tenants
Landlords or feudaJs live in cities and do no l take active · · the
part m
activ1·f1es of cultl\at1
· •on. Tenants cultivate their I and h fh eartedly. Therefore,_ I�d
is not properly cultivated. Similar] }, _L�dlords exploit �
the tenants b, not gl\ing
them fair return and share and product1v1ty remains
low.
17. Poverty and Shortage of Capital
Majorit) of our tanners is poor. The
purchase agriculture inputs like . y have lo\\ savings. The) can not
ed se�ds, fertilizer , tube wells, tractor., �nd
many other instruments for cult\�!::� �
g e il
o, the) are unable to invest 1• 11 th . · A ncultu re credit is not availabl e nslan)•d
eir lands and the productivit) of their
remains low.
Solution of Agriculture Problem
s
Following steps and me asur the
· 1 ture .s4ictor, and increase . es are necessary, to solve the p roblems o t·
agncu tn per acre yield.
192
Hadi P�kl.\tu11 Studies/or (BS-4 yeurs)
l. Supply of Agriculture Credit

The poor farmers cannot purchase the costly agriculture technology from
.
their owh resources. Provision of agriculture credit ,s essential to formers bec,tUsc
all agriculture inputs like seeds, fertilizers, agricultural muchmcs and irrigut10n
would-be purchased by agriculture credit. Government cons1c.krs it an ,mportant
instrument for achieving higher production and attaches high pnOrll)' to t:nsurc tts
timely availability to the farmers. For this purpose, rural co-operative societies.
rural shopkeepers can play an important role. Credit to the farmers is bcmg
provided through Zarai Taraqiate Bank Limited (ZTBL), Commercial Ban"-s.
Cooperatives and Domestic Private Banks.
2. Water Logging and Salinity Control
Proper steps and measures of reclamation of affected lands, are required to
increase the per acre yield. A large part of cultivable land in Punjab and Sindh is
adversely affected by this problem. For this purpose, installation of tube wells.
repair of canal banks and drainage of water etc. arc needed. Government of
Pakistan is paying attention for reclamation of cultivable land. For this purpose.
W APO A started SCARP-I and twelve thousand acres land was reclaimed between
the rivers of the Ghenab and the Ravi. In I 961, twenty nine million acres of land
was reclaimed with the help of USA. In 1962, und1:r central Rechna Doab project,
1796 tube wells were installed while under the Ghuj Doab project, 2500 tube wells
were installed. 2000 thousand acres of land was reclaimed and 450 miles long drain
were constructed. Under Upper Rachna Project, 1900 thousand acres of land was
reclaimed by installing 2500 tube wells. With the help of Yugoslavia 4500 acres of
land was recJaimed by installing tube wells. WAPDA and private sector are hdping
a lot to control of water-logging and salinity by installing tube wells. SC ARP-11 ha,
aJso been started to improve the agriculture sector productivity.
3. Flood Control
Heavy rainfalls are key reason of floods. Floods destroy the lcrtilit) of land.
Suitable measures like small dams and 'bands' should be taken to control the floods
Pakistan has 4.01 million hectares area of forests, which is very small according to
desired level. Plantation campaign is highly required to protect the fcrtilit) of land
4. Mechanization
Mechanization is essentiaJ for all agriculturaJ operations. Mecham1a1ion
facilitates in managing the crops in a short period of time. It lessens the losllCS or
193
Halli Pakista11 Studies for (BS-4 years)
. capaci• ty o f mac hines is better than outdated

the farm.i ng community. The workin g
and old equipments. The barren lands can be b._roug ht under cultivat ion b}
. in farm O erati
mechanized. In consideration of the role of mechanizati�� _ � s,_ t_he
n
of �
credit a\aila
Use ot. mach.mery has been encouraged through the prov1s10n b1ln\
by commercial banks.
5. Land Management
Land management is essential to increase produc tivi ty of ag:i culture sector
S mall and miles over scattered pieces of land should be c onsolidated to make
possible the use of modem machines. Small scattered lands can not be properly
looked after due to distances. If a farmer's all holdings of land are consolidated at
one place, per acre yield would increase.
6. Provision of Improved Seeds
In P akistan, farmers usually use substandard seeds whi c h are stored at their
home.Low production is destiny of inferior seeds. If farmers use improved seeds.
peracre yield can be high. For this purpose, farmers should be educated and
persuaded to use better quality seeds.
• Certified seed plays a pivotal role in boosting agri cultural producti on.
Certifiedseed in Pakistan is limited to wheat, cotton. padd} as major crops besides
maize,gram pulses fo dder and oilseeds as well as minor crops. The Federal
SeedCertification & Registration Department regulates quali ty during the flo\.\ of
seedfrom the breeder to the growers. The Department performs its functions
throughseventeen Seed Testing Laboratories and Field Offi c es, established in
variousecologi cal zones of the country.
To pr�vid� certified �rop seeds to the growers from the public sector. the
.
SeedCo�orat1on m the PunJ ab and Smdh and the Departments of Agriculture
in8alo ch1stan an� NWFP ha�e been assigned the task of seed
production ,processmg _and markeu�g. Government has permitted about 550
National Seed Compani es for production and marketing of certified seeds.
7. Use of Fertilizer
Fertilizer is one of the basi c inputs of agri culture an d . ts time
· or
ti agn· cu 1 tur
. .
a1 production · D
i . 1.y ava1·1abil it·,
cru ial .
is very 1ert1l1zer, per acre
ue to 1-tttle use o f &:
c
. .
),ield re m a l ns low m our count ry. Fa nners use cow dung as . manure so use of
che i cal f�rt1· ltz · v1· tal t� i· ncrease output.
· er is
� ti ,. Government should give subsidy on
fertilizer pnces because ert1 1zers are costly.
194
/lad/ Poklsllm Swdlesjor (BS-4 years)
8. Better Irrigation Facilities

It is well-known that an efficient irrigation system is a pre-requisite for
increasing agricultural production since water is a basic input for agriculture. In
Pakistan, 67% is barani area where irrigation completely depends on rainfalls and
the remaining is irrigated by canals, tube wells and karezes (Underground Canals).
A large quantity of water is wasted by these means of irrigation. Following steps
should be taken for irrigation.
1. Rehabilitation of canals to save water
11. Providing subsidies to private tube well owners
iii. Providing credit facilities for tube wells
9. Plant Protection
Proper, effective and timely plant protection measures help in increasing per
hectare yield by protecting crops from damages because without effective
protection against the attack of pests and diseases. the beneficial outcome of other
inputs may not be realized either. ln this regard, the Department of Plant Protection
provides facilities." such as, Locust Survey and Contml•, Aerial pest Control.
Pesticide Registration and Testing etc. while the private sector carries plant
protection measures including ground sprays. The department did not receive any
emergent demand from the provincial government for aerial spraying. The regular
aerial spray on orchards is conducted during April every year. During (July-March.
2000-10) 27.0 thousand tons of agricultural pesticides were locally form ulated.
10. Support Price Policy
Agriculture production function is lagged price function i.e. Qt = f (Pt-i).
Fanners decide about the production of crops to see the previous year prices which
they had got. The support prices can help in deciding the output decision. The
support prices are announced before the start of planting season. These prices are
infact, the price guarantee by the government to the grower. The agricultural price
commission APCOM recommends price policies for important crops.
11 Agricultural Research
The progress and expansion in agriculture is closely related to agricultural
educati�n and research. For this purpose, agricultural universities at Fa.isalabad.
Peshawar and Jamshoro, agricultural colleges at Rawalpindi, Quetta, and Multan
are providing agricultural education to our fa rmers up to the PhD level. For the
195
Hadi Pakista9 Studies/or (BS-'I �•ears)
spread of latest technology of crop production. training S) stem ha bee-n started in

Punjab, Sindh and Balochistan. Pakistan Agricultural Research Council (PARC) 1s
the major organization which is dong agricultural research. PARC has aLo started a
prograrµme to give audio/video material to farmers for impro\'ing agricultural
productivity.
12 Agricultural Marketing
Agricultural marketihg is very-important for the farmers and consumers.
Agricultural Marketing and Storage Limited (AMSL). and Pakistan Agricultural
Storage and Service Corporation (PASSCO). ha, e been established for this
purpose. For proper marketing following things are necessM):
1. Treatment of the old market system
11. Reduction in the number of commission agents
111. Weights and measures should be checked regular!}
1v. Godown facilities should be made available
v. lnfonnation about current market rates
13 Agricultural Reforms
Agrarian reforms are a comprehensive concept than land reforms. Land
reforms refer to the concept of redistribution of land ownership. While, Agrarian
reforms includes the removal of disadvantages of land tenure system, safety of
tenants, eradication of big jagirs (landlordism) and adopt such polices which help
the agricultural society. Land reforms were taken by former President Ayub Khan
and former Prime Minister Z. A. Bhutto at various times but reforms are required to
improve land tenure system.
J 4. Diversification
Pakistan is a country comprising of areas, which have all types of climate
andseasons. There is a large potential for diversification of agricultural activities.
15 Change in the Outlook of Farmers
The key factor in the solution of agriculture problems is the farmer himself.
There should be basic change in the attitude of farming community. Farmers should
be educated and trained to organize their activities in scientific lines.
196
Jlad/ Pakistan Studl�sfor (BS-4 y�ars)
5.3 POPULATION GROWTH

Achieving world population in balance with its resources is essential to the
future of our planet and the welfare of its people. Population growth is a complex
issue that directly or indirectly impacts all aspects of our lives.
Today, the world's population is approximately 6.5 billion and grows by
nearly 80 million people each year. It is expected that world population would
increase to 9.1 billion people by 2050.
The problem of over-population becomes even more serious in context of
the developing countnes like Pakistan. The population boom has resulted in an
economic disturbance in developing countries. Population is associated with
pollution, depletion of land resources etc. Almost half of the world population is
urbanized because of which traffic problems have been multiplied. Land erosion,
and solid waste disposal are the major civic problems of today.
Pakistan being a developing country also faces the problem of over
population. The growth of population is alarming in Pakistan. It is born out from
the fact that the annual growth rate of population rose from I I% in 1931 to I. 7%
in 1951 and to 2% in 2010.
In 1947, the Pakistan' Population was 32.5 million. By 2009-10, the
population is estimated to have reached 173.51 million. Thus in roughly three
generations, Pakistan's population has increased by 124.27 million or has grown at
an average rate of 2.6 percent per annum. Pakistan was at the 14th position in the
world in 1950 and now Pakistan is the 61h most populous country in the world.
Causes of Increase in Population
J. Drop in Death Rate
Death rate is defined as the yearly number of deaths per I000 population.
The crude death ratehas come down from 30 in 1947 to 8.2 per 1000 population.
Death rate in Pakistan is declining due to control of infectious diseases, improved
health-facilities and better nutrition etc.
2. Increase in Birth Rate
Birth rate is defined as the number of children born alive each year per I 000
population. J ligh birth rate in Pakistan is due to early marriages, religious beliefs,
joint family system and polygamy etc.
197
/lad/ Pakistan St11dlesfor (BS-4 year.\)
3. Low Standard of Living

It is observed that poor people have more cllildrcn Bl·•1idc:'i thiH� Ilic pc,c,r
people have no recreation. They do not care of their foiling :,tanclurd ol Jivu,g din- 1,,
excess of children.
4. Warm climate
Due to warm climate, puberty (youth) is attained ut �n early ..igc. Sc,, a
female is able to produce a baby at the age of approximately twelve year� 11nd
population mcreascs.
S. Early Marriages in Pakl'ibrn
The child bearing age of a woman is between 15 to 4'J years. ln l'akic;wn,
marriages normally occur between 15 to 22 years or ngc. So, the duration of
producing children becomes longer.
6. Joint Family System
The joint family system is also a main cause for rupid incre!:!Sl: in
population. People in joint family system arc compelled to marry even they arc
dependent people.
7. Religious Belief
The Muslims hnvc a solid faith that Allah gives food to everyone. As Jloly
Quran says, "Don't kill your children for the fear of starvation". So, they do nol
reduce their size of famiJy
8. Source of Power
Large family size is considered power tor political reasons. People with
large size of family can influence and control the people in election and after
election.
9. Illiteracy
Due to illiteracy, people do not produce children according to their
resources. They do not understand the blessing of small si,c family So, they face
economic problems due to large family size.
198
Hadi Pakistan Studiesfor (BS� Vl!'ars)
10. Existence of Polygamy

The religion of Islam allows a male to marry up to four females. Muslim
people have more than one wives and result is population increase. So, the
existence of polygamy (more than one wives) also increases population.
11. Opposition to Population Control
People in Pakistan, oppose the population control drive. Government can
not force the people to adopt family planning programme due to ethical resistance.
12. Arrival of Refugees
Movement from one place to another place is called migration. Pakistan is
facing the problem of migration from East Pakistan, East Punjab and from
Afghanistan. Pakistan has been a heaven for refugees.
Solution of the Overpopulation Problems
For the long tenn solution of the overpopulation problem, following
economic measures should be taken which are related to increase in GDP.
1. Increase in Agriculture Productivity
Agriculture sector is the foundation of our economy. The productivity of
thfasector should be improved by providing improved varieties of seeds, fertilizers.
irrigation facilities etc so that agricultural productivity, may increase manifold.
So, standard of living and income of the farmers will rise and population
problem would be solved.
2. Increase in Industrial Productivity
Small, medium and agro-based industries should be promoted in rural areas
of the.country. Large scale industries would be encouraged due to these industries.
The government should setup industrial states, credit facilities etc. for the rapid
industrialization in the country. So, standard of living and incomes of the surplus
labor force will rise and population problem would be solved.
3. Employment Opportunities in Rural Areas
Major part of our population lives in rural areas. The government should
provide credit facilities to the rural people for non-fanning activities like poultry,
fisheries, diary fanning etc.. People will not migrate to cities in search of jobs due
to setting up these industries. They would get employment at home which will raise
their income level and will help in the reduction of birth rate indirectly.
199
llut/1 PaJ.L,t1m Stu1lfr.� for (BS-4 1•ears)
S1)rcnd of education ...

Tl)c provision of cducntion both in rural and urban areas can help m
arresting the rapid growth of population.
5. Improving the Status of Women
The status of females should be improved. The role and respect of females
should be the same as males. Providing them employment in all sectors of the
economy will effectively reduce the birth rate of population.
6. Restricting Early Marriages
Early marriages should be restricted. This can be done by awareness in the people.
7. Family Planning
The family planning measures are successful measures to control population
in the world. Awareness in the people about the usefulness of family planning can
-help in controlling the growth rate of population. For this purpose, family planning
centers should be established.
Importance of Population Growth
1. Overcome the shortage of capital
. Less developed countries have a shortage of capital. This shortage can be

overcome through labour. Labour-intensive techniques of production can be used to
overcome the shortage of capital in LDGs.
2. Promote the Pace of Growth
Due to division of labour and specialization, a coW1try can not only produce
commodities in surplus but also can export the commodities to earn foreign
exchange. This will increase the pace of growth.
J. Creative and Produ�tive Resource
Population is a creative and productive resource. For proper investment an d
operation of the projects at low cost, we need the services of technicians, engineers,
administrators, etc.
4. Rise in Marginal Efficiency of Capital
Human resources are the most powerful source of economic growt h. So by
the quantity and quality of labour, output and marginal efficiency of capital can be
increased.
200
Had/ Pa/.istan Studie,ft,r (BS-4 yean)
5. increase in Aggre�ate 0cmnnd

Due to increase in population. aggregate demand for goods a�1d sc_n ices
\\ ill rise. o. the producers ha, e to produce in bulk "and the economies ol scale
will benefit the country
6. r-heap E:xports
om1ally. dcYeloping countries arc labour abundant countnes therefore thc
_
prioe of labour (wage) is lo" in these countries. In this way. a country can benehl
from cheap labour e,ports
7. Large Share in International Trade
A countr} can have a large share of mtemational trade due to the
aYailability of cheap labour m the production process.
Problems of Population Growth
1. Obstruct development
Due to high population growth, scarce resources are diverted to meet the
basic consumption needs of the people. Therefore. sa\ ings remain lo� and capital
formation stops.
2. ocial problems
A rapid increase in population in LDCs creates sufferings for the people.
Growing- populuuon generates economic and social problems such as housing.
educ:ition. health, transport. water. power, etc.
3. Low per capita Income
Per-capita income means a\erage income per person. lt is calculated by
following formula: Per-capita income = National income / Population. High per
capita income is a main indicator of economic Oe\'clopmcnt but as the population
grows it reduces per capita income of the people.
4. Inflation
Tl-ie fast growing population increases the demand for goods and services
which' ·results in a rise of general price level. So. inflation decreases standard or
living of the people.
201
lladJ Pakirtan Studie:.Jar (BS-4 year:.)
5. I ncreascs the Population Density

Population density means the number of persons living per square
kilometre. fhe rapidly gro.....,ing population increases the population density in the
country. The most popu!ous country is not considered a good country due to socio
economic problems.
6. Unemployment
Unemployment is a serious problem of developing countries. As the size of
population increases, the size of labour force also increases. This creates .the
problem of unemployment which leads to fall in national income.
7. Burden on infrastructures
The rapidly increasing population of a country creates burden on
infrastructure. Providing suitable facilities of education, health. housing, water,
power, transport and communication to the people is a difficult task for the
government.
8. Increase in lmpo11s _
The existing resources of developing countries are unable to fulfil the
requirements of growing population. So, these countries have to import ,, hich
creates dependency on countries.
9. Pollution
Pollution is also a serious problem of developing countries. As the size of
population increases, pollution also increases 'hhich results in deceases in these
countries.
I 0. The qualita�ive aspect of population is ignored due to gro\\ing population
1 1. The food shortage problem arises.
5.4 UNEMPLOYMENT
Definination
Unemployment is the situation where job set:kers are willing to work but
there are no jobs available for them. Or we can define it as "Unemployment is the
situation where an able-bodied person seeks job but is unable to find at cun·ent
w,ge rate".
202
!lad/ Pul.l\lat1 StudIt•, f11r (BS -I Y;,'"'J
•
t. llndcrcmplo) mcnr
Un<lcn:mplo)mcnt 1s a situntion in which persons llll' \Hllk1ng less than the)
\\Ould hle to work either dntl) \\t.:t.:kl). month!) or sc,1son.1II\
2. Disguised llncmplo)·mcnt
Disguised uncmplo) cd 1s the sttuotion ,..,here ,1vt11labh.: ,,ork task:-. ure s�lit
_
among resources (I) picall) l ahor). such thut nil sl!em full) employed. but 111 rcultty
much of their time ,s spent tn unproductl\c resources.
l, oemplo} ment in Pakisinn
According to Labour 1 orcc urvc). ubout ., 91 "mtllton people were
estimated to be uncmplO)ed during thl! liscnl )\!Ur 2008-09 Un-employment rate
has decreased from 7 69°o.>in.2005 to5 5°'o in 2008-9
Employment in Pakistan
Accord i ng to Labour Force Stirve). about ,o 79 million people were
estimated to be cmplo)cd during the: lisc,tl ) ear 2008-09 as compared to 38.88
milhon in 2001-2002
Causes of Unemployment
1. PoHrt)·
It is well rccogn11ed that employment pla)s a central role in po, ert)
reduction. Both po, crt) and uncmplo )ment urc cause: .met l!ffcct of each other. 1 he
poor persons ha,e less opportumties of fin<lmg l'mplo)mcnt or creating self
employment. So. po, ert) is the fate of the unemployed persons. Unemployment is
rising in Pakistan due to po,ert) and unemplo)ment 1s again generating pO'-'Crt).
2. Rapid Population Growth
Rapid population growth is the main factor of rising unemployment.
Pakistan's population is rising quiclly with-2 °'o annual!). It is the highest in the
world. Pakistan is the 6thmost populous countf) m thc "orld Rough I). one million
job seekers are entering the job murlet each )ear. l abour fore\! has 111creased
to53.72 million in 2008-0Q On the other side. employment oppo1tunitics are not
enough to absorb all the ne,.., job seekers. So. unemployment is rismg.
3. Shortage of Capital
It is an. important obstacle of developing countries that the} have the
shortage of capital. The capital i-. called the blood of economy. so the countries
including Pakistan having shortage: of capital remain bach,ard and poor. Prof.
201
Hadi Paki.ua11 Studiel for (BS-4 rears)
�urkse says that in developmg countries required capital 1s low in relation to their
population. Shonnge of capital is due to low productivity, low income, low savings.
and low investment. Employment opportunities cannot be expanded unless tools,
1·quipment and materials are available in sufficient quantity. But there is serious
sh011age of capital in Pakistan.

-t Mechanization in Agriculture and Manufacturing
Due to the installation of improved automatic. machinery in agriculture and
industry. population is getting unemployed. A tractor and tube well displaces man)
people. The surplus agricultural laborers search emrloyment in the urban centers
Similarly. absorpuon of persons in large scale industri�s has gone down due the use
of automatic machinery and computers. This has resulted 111 unemployment.
5 Imbalance in Prevailing Education S) stem
The pre\ ailing education c;ystem is not Job or skill oriented. Most of the
student::. choose general education. The) w..int 'to �et some white-collar jobs. They
have degrees but no work trainmg In the abs--ncl: of vocational and technical
education. emplo�··ment opportunities for 5uch penple are limited
6. Capital Intensive Industries
Appropriate technology is very important for .t country In Pakistan, most of
industries are capital intensive i.e. capital labour ratio is high. It means that more
capital is required to produce commodities rather labour. So, capital intensive
industries create unemployment for the labour force
7. Slow Industrial Development
Growth of large and small-scale industry is slow due to different economic.
social and political reasons. The industrial sick units are also increasing in the
country. Jobs are not available in industrial sector to employ the labour force.
8. Low Public Sector Employment
ln Pakistan, people give more value and prestige to public sector Jobs
instead of private �ector jobs. P_ublic secto1 service means less effort, job securit�.
chances of corrupti on etc. In pnvate sector, more labour and risk of job security 1s
mvolved. So peo()le prefer to public sector jobs. But government jobs" are not
available to employ every candidate.
204
'
J/adi Paki.sta11 Studiel /or (BS-4 years)
9. Rural Urban Migration.

Rural urban migration 1s another factor of unemplO) ment. People from rural
areas migrate to the cities in search of jobs. But the) remain unemployed under
employed due to lack. of employment opponunities in the urban areas.
10. Fall in Over eas Employment Opportunitie
In 1973, increase in oil prices created boom in Middle East and man)
Pakistani got employment opportunities. But no,.., foreign remittances ha, e started
decreasing due to return of Pakistani workers from \,(iddle Fast after the
completion of projects. This has also contributed to the rise in the unemployed
labour force.
11. Political Instability in the Country
Political instabilit, 1s another factor of unemplo)ment in de, eloping
countries. There is a rapid change in the governments. Political system in the"-:
countries is not stable. The next government does not follo,, polices of the pre, lllU�
government. o, the in\'estors hesitate to im est and caplt.11 fonnat1on is not
promoting to the desired level In Pakistan, due to the regular change in
governments, appropriate polices and strategies can not be adopted All the e
factors have caused unemployment in the counl:I)
12. easonal Unemployment
Seasonal unemployment occurs in agriculture and somi;: other industries ltk.e
fan and air-cooler industry
13 Trade Unions
Trade unions are responsible for unemployment. l rade unions demand vel)
highwagcs so the producers havt: to downsize the \\Orkers to reduce the cost
ofproduction.
14. . Depression
Depression is a ph�e of trade cycle in which all economic act!\- ittes go
_ .
down. Ifthe economy 1s pass111g from the depression phase, unemployment rises.
Solutions of Unemployment's
1. Population Control
Population control is essential lo reduce unemployment. When population
growth decreases. unemployment rate also decreases because the number of jobs
seekers will be lowered. Government is making serious efforts to reduce the r..ipidl)
205
Hadi Pakistn11 Studies for (BS-4 ••ears)
rising population growth by the steps such as spread of education. popularization of

the concept of small family etc.
2. Increase in Capital Formation
Capital formation decreases the unemployment rate. More capital 1eads to
rapid economic development. Savings and foreign direct investment (FDI) should
be encouraged in order to increase capital formation because it helps to undertake
new projects.
3. Rapid Industrial Growth
Rapid expansion of industry is a key solution for unemploymenl Industry
can provide more employment opportunities. More jobs will increase the standard of
living an<l eradicate poverty. Establishment of industries in backward areas by giving
tax holidays. subsidy on industrial inputs will create jobs in the backw:u-d areas.
4. Small Scale and Agro-basell Industries
Small-scale and agro- based industries are labour intensive industries. The
small scale industries should be promoted and encouraged by providing technical.
credit facilities. This will increase employment opportunities for the labour force.
5. Technical Training and Skill Formation
The vocational and technical institutions should be promoted to provide the
job, training and skills to people. The technical and skilled persons have more
scope for employment.
6. Encouragement of Self-employment
Self-employment can be encouraged in the form of small business:
workshops etc by suitable financial schemes. This will reduce the unemployment of
educated people.The financial institutions should be directed to sanction loans for
these projects.
7. Diversification of Agriculture
Besides, farming rural people should do non-farming activities e.g. fruit
growing, dairy, poultry, fish and bee farming, processing and packaging of foods.
So that employm ent opportunities for the labour force may increase.
s. Upgrading the quality of labour
Human capital formation is vital for the development of a country. Human
capital formation fund should be created for improvement in the quality of labour.
206
l lum.m t\''-'l\111.'1.' de..•, c..'lopmc..·nt will hdp in ,kcrcasirw lhc �ost c,f rm,du<.:ti,m ,m d
itwn·us1.• c..•mplo, 1111.•nl 111 1h1.· ,·0111111 v
'>. Chnnt,:t' in Sodnl AHthadt.•s
Thwugh cduc111ton. people's utt1tude towards work and jobs needs to be
d,ungl•d lnmml luhour $hould he given du1.: respecl .so th.it young people willingly
a1.h.lpt tl 1 lw, shlllild bc..· ttu1ght not to hesitate 10 work in factories.
10. Purdrn�t• of locuJJy n111nufncturcd �ood.
(hwc..·mmcnl should cncoutllge the pcopk to purchase locally manufactured
g_\lllds. llm, nH>,·c ,,11! ..1bt' crcutc employment opportunities in the country.
1 l. F,h,blishmcnt of Con,truction f ndu,try
lhc housing und constrnction sector provide substantial additional employment
l,pportuni11cs os it contributes through a higher multiplier effect with a host of
lx·ndiciul frwwurd und backward linkages in the economy. The sector. through
lin\..ug1.:s ctlcct with ubout 40 bwldmg material mdu:,trics, supports investment and
g,,,wth chmotc and help reduce poverty by generating income opportunities for poor
households Dunng lhc le.1st two ycurs. by government measures, construction activity
111 Pakistan 1s booming; dcmund for construction· re luted.
5.5 POVERTY
Definition-;
Rawntrcc descri�cd that poverty is a situation in v..hich under-consumption.
malnutrition. precarious housing cond1t1ons, low educational levels and bad
sanitary cond1t1on prevail to leave the v1cums devoid of basic needs.
Accordi11g to Aristotle:"Povert) 1s the parent of revolution and crime·•
Prof. Denis Gault smd that "A Person is considered poor if his or her income level
falls below some minimum le\ld necessary to meet basic needs."
Condition ?r havin� insuffici�nt rcsourc �s or income is known as poveny.
. .
o. Poverty 1s a cond1t1on of having insufficient resources and income or poverty is
the prominent deprivation of well being.
Kinds of Povel'ty
Poverty has two kinds; its detail is as unders;
1. Absolute Poverty
Lack of means in relation to needs is called Absolute Poverty. It is also
called
207
----��-·-----------
'I \t1r11w'nt'I h'sli111111H1 poverty'
II l'1111 lw tkl11wd 11s;
"I h· lud: til s11rt1c1.:11t n.:so11rccs with which to kcrp hody and soul together"
2. ltt'lnth '-' l�OVl'a-ty
I 11cl-. ol 111c11ns 111 rclution to means ol others is called Relative Poverty.

"Rd,\liv · powr1> defines income or resources in relation to the average It is
l'OIICl'tncd with the nbscncc of the material needs to participate fully in accepted
d11ily ltlc."
"Rclnltw. poverty is the condition of having fewer resources or less income than
others withan u society or country, or compared to the worldwide average."
Poverty Linc
"I he estimated minimum level of income needed to secure the necessities of life.''
"A person is considered poor if his or her income level falls below someminimum
kvcl necessary to meet basic needs This minimum level is usuallycalled the
"poverty linc."There arc two main ways of setting poverty lines-relative and
absolute.
Relative Poverty Lines
These are defined in relation to the overall distribution of income or
consumption in a country; for c,ample, the poverty line could be set at 50 percent
of the country's mean income or consumption.
.,, Ab!lolutc Poverty Lines
These arc attached in some absolute standard of what households should be
able to count on in order to meet their basic needs. For monetary measures. these
absolute poverty lines are often based on estimates of the cost of basic food needs.
that is, the cost of a nutritional basket considered minimal for the health of a typical
family, to which a provision is added for nonfood needs. Considering that large
par1s of the populations of developing countries survive with the bare minimum or
less, reliance on an absolute rather than a relative poverty line often proves to be
more relevant.
International Poverty Line
International measurement of poverty line is $2 per day. This is defined
differently br different governments and institutions. A person who earns $2 per
208
/lad/ Palmran tudi�!> for (BS-4 JtursJ
da) is on the poverty lines If he has less than $2. he io; poor If he has more than
S2. he is not poor. In Pakistan; a person \\ho has Rs. 948 per month. he 1s on
po\erty Imes.
Approache / l\otea urement of Povert)
f· ollowmg are the approache::. to measure of po\ crt).
I. .tlorics ba1>ed approach
According to this approach ..if a person. wholes income does not meet the
dail) intake of about 2350 calories per person. are considering falling below the
povert)' !me."
2. Basic eed Approach
According to this approach ...if a person \\ith a fixed income cannot bu) his
basic needs i.e. food. cloth, house, education, basic health etc. he is considered to
fall below the poverty line.
3. Opportunity Approach
According to this approach, if due to fall in
1. Income
2. 1 lealth
3. Education
The human sufferings increase. the people are considered to have fallen
below the poverty line. In order to examine the gender dimensions of poverty we
apply the standard poverty measures. i.e.. head-count ratio. income (expenditure
gap), and FGT-mdex. These measures are defined as:
I. Ifead-Count Measure
This is most common!) used measure. It gi\ es the proportion of population
with a standard of living below povert) lines. But it docs not tell us ho\\ poor the
poor are. Jt will not change if the poor become poorer. This measure determines the
incidence of poverty but ignores its severity.
Vicious Circle of Poverty
Vicious circle of poverty (VCP) is also called underdevelopment circle
Ranger Nurkse says that poverty is basic cause of under-development of
209
dcvelopmg countncs and descnbcs .. V,ciou!> cir�le of poverty (VCP) means that a
circular arrangemenl of force:. tcndmg to act and react in such a way as to keep a
countr)' in thi: '-late of povert� -
Creation of Vicious Circle of Po, erty
The people in less developed countric" have lo"' real income which results
in low '-{Wings When Oow of sm ing is small in a country. investment is bound to
be low. Lov, lc\cl of investment would create "hortage of capital which leads lo
low producth ti}
1 his again results in low real income. So. the circle is responsibk for the
k1\\ le\ el otdcv1.:k)pmcnt. The , icious circle is complete. The vicious circle
operates both on the demand and supply side. which in brief. is explained as under:
Demand Side Vicious Circle Po, ert)
The \ 1cious circle of povert) on the demand side operates in this manner. In
dcvclopmg countnes. lov� real income leads to lo,, purchasing po,�·er. When the
purchasing of th\! pl!ople 1s lov.. the size of the marl..ds remains small. In the small
size of the marl..et. there is no inducement to im est and deficiency or capital
creates. Due to lo\, capital foIJ11alion and lov. rate of investment. the productivit�
remains lo,-\. Llm productt, it) again leads to lo,, real income. This is hov. the
, icious circle is complete on demand s1dt:!.
Supply Side Vicious Circle PoHrty
The \'icious circle- of po\erty on the suppl)' side operates in this manner. In
de, eloping countries, people have lo,, real income. When the income of the people
is low. ·the sa, ing is low The low level of saving leads to low investment and the
deficiency of capital in turn leads to lov. level of productivity. The productivity per
worker being lmv, the real income is obviously lov. and so there is poverty. This is
how the vicious circle is complete on suppl, side. So. the cause of a countf) 's
povert} is poverty itself as Nurkse says, "a country is poor because she is poor:·
How to Break Vicious Circle of Po,'erty ?
The fight against poverty represents the greatest challenge of our times.
Considerable progress has been made in different pans of the world in reduc!ng
po,erty. Developing countries can break vicious circle of poverty by taking
following steps:
210
Hudl Pakistan tutlie., for (8 -4 l't't1�)
l. Rai. ing tht- S"' ing Poh'ntinl

The ,ic1ou. circle of pt)\l'rt\ c,m lw hh,kl'1' b) 11W1l•u,inµ lhl ,11111111\' 111
realsaving . m indh iduul. corpomtt· und puhh� ll·, d l hl· p1 1, 1•111111l·111 rnn
mobihzeand mm. fer the ,n in�s of tht• h,)usl•h1,lds 1,, 1lw h11,11w,..,nw11 "IH1 l 1111
im est these -,a, ings into the p�Juction p1\,1..'l's:-- 111d 1.'l l'.tl1..•s 1.. 11p11ul r,1rn 1.1111m i 11
thecountr)
2. Efficient U ·e of ntunll R('souret•s
Economists no" rccog.nil'l' thnt .,long ,, 1th ph,s11..·:1I 1111d h11m.111 l·:tl'llnl.
natural resources should be cons11.kn.•d ,ls 11npMl,11H c,:,,nnnrn ,,swts Ill l'l'dll\.'1..'
povert). In deH:loping countries. nmuml rc'inmt·1..•s Ml t\llt p, ,,,wrl\ l' pl,1111..·d du,•
to lack of technolog). The ad,anc1..·d 1..·ountnc'i ,Ill' 1..• ph111111g tlh:s1..• 1,•-;m1H'c,:s li 11
their own economic bendits lhus. \\rlh thl· .n.11labilit) lll 1.·-.:i,1c.•11n· nl' thc:-.l'
re ources. proJ>l!r ut1lizat1on is also requm·ll w b1r11I,, 1lw t111d 1.•rd 1.·, 1..•l 11p11tc.'lll 1. 111. h.:
3. High Capital Form:,tion
An American economist Rostl)\\ ,,1, s 1hnt to bn:.11-. tl w ,11.1011, l m, ll Ill
po,ert). rate of imcstment must be n:-.c Imm ''11, to lll" u 1)1 (il\/P l'l1 1Htl,1111 111
pressure can be reduced to 111c1e.1se 1.•mplcl\mcn1 l1p1w1w11itk, ( .1p1t.1l futtnllllllll
decreases povert). More cnpital leads to rnp1d 1.•1..·n1h1111i1.. d 1.·\ l'll'Pll\l.'111 '-. " 1ws ,llld
foreign direct imestment (I 01) should he c.•n1.·m11,1�cd 111 1..'1d 1.•1 to 1111.·i-1.\tsl 1.-.,pi1al
fonnation because it helps to rc:Juce pm l'rt)
4. Reduction in Population
�apid p��ulat io� gr0\\1h is �hµ mnin fo1.·tor ol rising po,1..•, 1, P.tk.i:-.t,m's
_
population ts rising qurckl) \\ 1th 2 'o unnunll). ll 1, th1..• hi,•h
c:o 1..•st 111 th '-. ,, t, I I lI ·
. · the.• \\01 Id
Pak'1st� 1s. the 6th most popu1ous countr) 111 Populati lm l'l\tllrl,I i:,.
essential to reduce unemployment \\ hen pop ul,1t1on gt\)\\lh d1.·1.·tc,,sl.'s.
u� employ m ent and poverty ra�e also .dccrcn�es hccuusc the numb 1.•r tlf 1 ,,bs ''-''-'"-1.'t"
v.111 be lowered. Government ts makmg senous dfo 1 ts· to r1..•1.hicc ti,. 1.: 1 11 p11.. II, 1 1,mg
·
population growth• b y. th e steps sueh as spread of cducmion • l)"fllll·,
' • ,·iz·it'
., lllll• () 1. ti 11.'
concept of smaJl lam1ly etc.
5. Balanced Growth Strateg_)
N urkse s uggests the strategy of balnnccd growth lot ti,t:• ur1.:,l"-
'- , , t1uoug
. . . . . h of
v1c1ous circle ot poverty. Accord"mg ·to Nurksc --11 .!\lflHrlt·,r, ,, 1,ls. 111\
' c-. •
· CSI llll.'lll Ill
many sectors of the econom) ts made 11 can prm id� n m·i' rl-.1:t •lll l1 ,.ouicc nt , uppl\
for one another:·
211
/lat/I Pal.iwa11 rudiesfar (BS--1 rean)
6. Rapid Industrial Gron th

· · I ut t011 fior po\ert\. lndustn- can.
Rapid e,pans1on of mdustl) 1s a ke, so
pro\1de more emplo,ment opportunittes. �tore J?bs \.\ t�l in�rcase th� Slundard of
li\ing and eradicate po,ert,. Establishment �f industries .in backward areas b)
gi\ mg tax holida) s and subsidy on industrial inputs "' 111 create Jobs m the
backward areas.
7. Employment of Human Resource
De\eloping countries including Pakistan are focmg unemplO) mcnt pn.)bkm.
I he qualtt� of lahour force is poor due 10 lo"' l1tcrac,: mnlnutri1ion. absence or
proper medical cure!> e1c. Effec1ive measures -;hould be 1,1kcn for 1m cstmcnt in
human capital 10 breal-. "icious circle.
8. Technical Trainin� and kill Formation
1 he \ oca1ional and technical institutions should be promoted to prO\ 1de on
the job training and skills to people. The technical and skilled per.,ons ha\e more
�cope for cmplo) mcnt and result in povert) eradication.
9. Upgrading the Quality of Labour
If uman capital formation is vital for the development of a countr). f Iuman
capital formation fund should be created for impro\ ement in the qualit} of labour
Human resource development \>,,ill help in decreasing po\'ert) and increasing
employment in the country
JO. Technological Progress
Technology means the body of knowledge to produce goods and sen ices.
Technological progress means an increase in technical efficiency. fechnological
progress has prime importance for poverty reduction. !he countries, \\ h1ch ha\e
brought rapid progress in technology, have achieved faster rate of gro\, th. o.
developing country should use advance technology in different sectors of the
economy.
11. Self Reliance Policy
The less developed countries like Pakistan should reduce their dependence
of foreign aid. The policy of self- reliance should be follo\\,cd for financing
development projects.
212
/Judi Puklmm S1tulle\ for (BS-4 y�ars)
12 Change in Social Attitudes

fhrough education, people's attitude towards work and jobs needs to be
changed. Manual labour should be given due respect so that young people \\.illingl)
adopt 1t. They should be taught not to hesitate to work in factories.
13 Encouragement of Self-employment
Self-employment can be encouraged in the form of small business.
workshops etc by suitable financial schemes to break poverl}' circle. This \\.Ill
reduce the unemployment of educated people.The financial institutions �hould 1->t::
directed to sanction loans for these projects. 1he pm ate sector should be
encouraged to increase the rate of investment in the country.
14 Government Policy
I:,conom1c gro\.\th is the engine of employment generation and P\>' ert)
alleviation. fhc go"crnment by \.arious steps and policies can generate emplO)nll!nt
opportunities. Small and Medium Enterprises ( ME) represents a :-1gn1(\.lng
component of Pakistan's economy in terms of \.alue The) are highl) labour
intensi\'e anJ pro, ide emplo)'ment to the bulk of the non-agricultural lahour force
·1 he growth of SMfs has mainly been hampered b) the non-,nailabilit) or credit m
the past Reali✓ing this constraint the government has opened t\\o spcc1alued non
credit banks namely. the SME Ilank and Khushali Bank. 1 he Small ,tnd \kdium
I nterpnses Oe\.elopment Authority (SM EDA) 1s also acu, el) de, eloping
programmes for managerial skill development and technical and informatl\ c
'iupport to the SMEs.
Poverty Reduction Strategics in Pakistan
J hesc strategies should be adopted to reduce po\erl) k, cl m Pakistan
1. Moti\.Jtc the poor because most of them fact: markets. state 111stitut,ons nnu
local structures of ro-:-ver tl! at �iscriminate against the poor and dcprn·c
them of u large pn>pon,on of their actual and potential income.
11. Allocate more natural resources.
11i Allocate 111orc resources to the poor or to th� local gll\ crnmcnts "ho arc
supposed to represent them. So that mis-utili.aition of resources \\ill be
red11cl.!d
,v Women should also be promoted to do worJ... with mc11 side by side
Had/ Pakl:.ta11 Studies ft1r (BS-4 years)
v. Educational sector is very poor. It should be improved.

vi. Expenditures must be reduced.
vii. Population growth rate should be reduced.
\ iii. Oependenc:r on single person should be removed.
1x. Employment opportunities should be increased.
x. Govt!rnment should provide soft loans so that people. who have talent but
lack mone:r. can start their business on initial level.
omc of the large NGOs operating in many different district� pursue
poverty alk\ iation by trying to provide micro credit to the poor. Increased
n:�ource:-. b> the government or micro credit by NGOs may be a necessar:r but is
not a sufficient condition for overcoming poverty.
EXERCISE-5
OBJECTIVE TYPE QUE TION
Q. I: Kncircle the correct options.
I. In I 9--t 7 the population of Pakistan was:
(a) J::!.5 million (b) 33.5 million (c) 34.5 million (d) 35.5 million
2. In Pakistan barani area is:
(a) 65% (b) 66% (c) 67% (d) 68%
3. I IO\\ many million hectares area is cultivable in Pakistan?
(a) 22.51 million (b) 23.5 million (c) 24 million (d) 24.5 million
4. Ho"' many million hactars area of forest is in Pakistan?
(a) 3% (b) 4.01 % (c) 5% (d) 5.6 %
5. Pakistan had a very weak industrial base since:
(a) I 947 (b) 1949 (c) 1950 {d) 1951
6. How many Industrial units were in the sub-continent at the time of
partition?
(a) 621 (b) 721 (c) 821 (d}021
214
1/adi Paki�tan Studie\ for (BS-4 yean)
7. How man) industrial units which Pakistan inherited')

(a) 30 (b) 34 (c) 40 (d) 45
8. Pakistan industrial development corporation (PfDC)was established in:
(a)l950 (b)l951 (c)1952 (d)l953
9. The head office of--National Investment Trust" (NIT)is in:
(a) Karachi (b)lladarabad (c)Pishawar (d)Lahore
I 0. Investment Corporation of Pak.istan (ICP)was established in:
(a) 1965 (b)1966 (c) l 967 {d) 1968
1 1. The government of Pakistan announced industrial polic> of April:
(a)1947 (b)1948 (c)1949 (d)1950
12. There is lack of agro based industries in the rural areas of:
(a)Pakistan (b)Chaina (c)Japan (d) Austaralia
13. The key factor in the solution of agriculture problems is the:
(a)Farmer himself (b)Government (c)Landlord (d) Education
Q.2: Tick the True and False
Unemplo}ment is rising in Pakistan due to poven}. True/ 1-alse
Poverty is the fate of the unemployed persons. True I False
Political instability is main factor of unemplo}ment in Pakistan.True/ False
The technical and skilled persons have more scope for emplo> ment.True/ False
I ligh birth rate in Pakistan is due to early marriages and religious belief.
True False
1 he pests and plant disease redusce the agricultural production annually.
True/ False
Major part of former's income is spent on litigation. True/ False
Lack of interest by the landlords is the main cause of low per acre y ield.
True/ False
215
)
lladi PaJ.inan Studio/or (B� y,�ars) =
There is lad. of agro based industnes in the rural areas elf P.ik.iSmn.
True l-,1h:t>
Hea\ y rainfalls arelhe ke) reason of floods. frue l als�
lhe ke) factor in the solul1on of agricullure problem is 1he fom\er htmsd f
True l ,1lse
The Go\emmem of Pakislan announced industrial polic� of I 0-tS.
True fabe
Q.3: Fill in the Blanks.
Industry can pro\ ide more employment---------------
The technical and skilled persons ha\ e more scope for-------------
.
Political instabilil\ is main factor of------------ in Ptlismn .
Maj our part of population of Pak.istan lives in-----------
Water- logging and salinit) are vet") harmful for----------
Pakistani formers usuall) use sub- standared seeds v. h1ch are tored at their---------
Who said that po\erl) 1s the parent of re,olution anJ crime ) ----------
The barani area of Pak.istan 1s ---------------
The barani area complete!) depends on: -----------------
The population of Pakistan ,., as the-------- position in the \\ orld in 19-0.
Now Pakis1an is the---------- most populous coun� in the \\ orld.
-------- million hectores area is culti\'able land m Pak.i-.tan.
Pakistan has --------- million hectores area of forests
Heavy rainfalls are key reason of-------------

The Bankers Equity Limited (BEL) was estab lished in---------
There were ----------- industrial units in the sub- continent at the time of panitto n.
Pakistan inherited only --------- industrial units.
216
1/udi PuJ.i\tan \tu,/i,�\ 11, (8\-4 rrunJ
Q. O. l: Encircle the correct options.

(b) 11. (b) 12 (a)
1 (a) :! ( c) :;. (.ii 4. (ll) 5. (a) h. \Ol 7.1h) X. W) 'J. Cu) 10.
Q 1'0. 2: f ick the corn�ct choice.
.CT) 1\.(1> 12.(1)
\ (1)2 (1)3.11)4 (l>S.(1)6.(T) 7.(J')R.(T)9.(I) IO
Q. ....,0. 3 Fill in the Blanks.
(\) Opponunitics (:!) [.mplo)ments (3). Uncmplo)mcnts (4). Rural areas (5).
Crops (6) Homes (7). Anstolc (8) 67% (9). Rainfalls (\0). 4 (11) 6 (12).22.51
1h 1h
m,lhon ( \3). 4.0 \ million (14) floods (IS) I 980 (\ 6). 921 ( 17). 34
EXERClSE-5
Write Short Answers
Write an) tow problems of Agriculture sector
., What is water logging and salinity?
3. Write an) two solutions of Agriculture problems.
4. Write an) w.o points of importance of industrial development.
5. Write down an) two problems which ha,e to face Pakistan industry.
6. Which steps Y.c1c taken by the go, emment of Pakistan for the solution of
Industrial problems, write an) l\\.O points.
7. Write an) tY. o main factors due to population is increasing <lay h) da).
R Write an) two causes of unemployment in Pakistan
lJ. Ho"" to Break ,icious circle of poverty. '-Hite any one point.
LONG QUESTION
Write down the Agricultural problems in Pakistan
2. Write do,\n the steps of Government of Pak1 ....1an about thl.! ,olutinn of
Agricultural problems.
3. Write dov.n the importance of industnal sector m Pakistan.
4. Write do\.\n the industrial problems in Pakistan.
5. Write do\.\n the solution of industrial problems.
.
6. Explain the po, erty reduction strategies in Pakistan.
7. Explain the causes of increase in population of Pakistan.
8. Suggest the solution of the over populatio n proble ms
9. Explain the causes of unemployment in Pakistan.
l 0. Suggest the solution of unemployment in Pakistan.
217
.,
llutfi Pu!..·l$0
11 <· . 1 fo
1(1tdte r ( BS�4 H'llf$
Chapter- 6
RELATIO�S WITH, 'E!GHBORS AND \JL�LIM WORLD

6-I PAKISTAN- CHINA RELA flONS
Pal,.1stJn and China arc neighbouring countnc"' The rdati_on bet,�ccn them
ts deep-rooted. That is descnhcd by Pakisrnn's ambassudor to China as higher _than
the:: mountains. deeper than oceans. :-;trongcr than �tcel. deare r than C) cs1gh1.
s" ect er than hl)nC). and so on.
In October I949Pakistan recognized China at its birth. Tlwir relations

former!) established m J 950. 1 he Prime \1imster of the both countries met in
Bendong Conderence 1111955. After that the. senes of ,isits continued up till no,,
Pakistan and China staned their stntggle to resolH� the boundary issue in 196 I.
\\hich was finally resohed m 1963 Aften\ards. the good relationship. and trade
pact ,11,as signed by them The 900 Km long �111,.-routc of Karakara111 was
completed in 1969 that connecteJ Pal,.istan ,, ith China b) road It became a S) mbol
and glo,11, in� l:,ample of Pakistan Ch11ia friendship.
During theSino-lndian War of 1962. Pakistan supported China on man)
important issues. cspr.::ciall) those \\hich \\Cn: relatcJ to the quest1<.m of China's
so, ereignt) like Taiwan, and Tibet and other scnsiti, e prohkms such as human
rights Pakistan cncournged it for its pcm1ancn1 membership nt "'ecunt) Counctl of
l nited at io ns Thi.: C 1m�·sc lcader�hip has ackno\\ !edged Pal,.1stan's firm suppon
on key issues.On the othe1 hand. China stren�thcncJ Pal,.istan and prm i<lcd arms
during the \\Jr of 1965 and a!so on the i.., , c ot the Russian inter\'cntton m
Afghanistan.
Mam ddcncc pa1:ts ,,ere signed bet,,ccn P.1kistan and Chinn in 1985
China also ·pro, ided economic and technical assistance m building the Kamra
Complex and Ordinance Factory at W ah. China nlsu pro\ idcd the ass1!>tance of
Rs.273 million for sellrng up heav y electnc comple, in K p K
k
China ha<; become Pa istan's largest suppher of arms and its third-largest
n ion
trading pa rtner Recently. both at s h�ve decided to co-operate in impro, iPg
Pakistan's ci, ii nuclear pow er sector. Chm_a has supplied equipment to suppot1
Pakistan ·s nuclear program_, and has p rovided n�dear technolog) to Pakistan
China has supnlied the equipm�n! to nd vancc their nuclear weapons program to
Pakistan. Chinese helped in buildm_g the �ushab reactor, "' hic h plays a kl!) role
plutoni um. Chma has also prO\ id�d tec hmcal a1�
in Pakistan's production of
218
IJdl l'oldstun Stu11i�J11r (BS-4 l'etm)
material suppo11 m the comrletion· of the ( hashma Nude•1r Pnwl!r Complex ,tncl.
plutonium repwtcssing facility. which wac; built rn lht.. mid- i lJ91Js.
China •� the largest investor in Pakistan's Gv.adar Deep St:a Port. which is
strategically located at the mouth o1 the Strait of Honnuz lt 1s a source of anxiety
both Am eri'ca and India as a possible launchpad for the Ch111ese Navy
6.2 PA KISTAN-INDIA RELATIONS
fhe rel ations bet\\een Pakistan and India could not be de'veloped from their
independence. Because India did not accept the creattun of Pakic;tan for the core of
its heart I he main dispute bet,,el'll P.ik,._t,rn and India ,s the Kac;hm1r issue. without
its solution the relJtio'ls ..::onnot be 1mrro, ..'.I
?\1oreo, er. �oon Jfter their mdependenc.e lnd1J and Pakistan established
theu diplom.ttic rda11ons but the ,iolent pJrtitwn anJ nu1mrous territonal disputes
alv.,a)'s O\ershado\\ed thetr relall<>'lsh1p The K,!'-hm1.- dispute 1s the main centre
p0int of all the.e C-'ill1cb �met their mdl;"p':'n<1e'lle, the two countries ha"e
fought three maJor "Jr<- 1 c ! 948. 1965 ,md 1971 Ir 1960 lnd•J-v.ater tn:at} ,..,as
)lgned b.:t,\et:n PJk1st.in .ind lnd1J to solve the \\Jttr d1�rute between them The
project ,,as complek<l \,\, 1th tne h, Ip of World 13ank P.1k1..,tan bmld \1angla and
I arbala damr, and lmk canal" ,Hth the help of WorlJ B,.,1k.
India supponed the ,epara1i,;t dernents dunng th1. \\af of 1971 in East
Pakistan and f-a,;t Pakistan dppcared on the n'ap ol tht: '"ornJ \.\ith the 11Jme of
B ..111gladtr,h or t 6't December 197 l After the 'iepJr.tt1on 01 bl'll Pakistan. Ol)th
countnec_, made ,km progress towards the n0rmal11at1on uf rebtlons. In July 1971.
ln.Jians. Pnm�' !\11m t.:r lndra GJndh1 1nJ th1. PrtsiJent ot Pakistan Mr. Zultiqnr
. \It BhultC' met .it the Indian hill stc1tton of %1mla. fhe) signed thi: Shimla
\greement. b) which lnd1r.1 v.ould return all Pakistc1111 pers,mm:1 lo,er 90.0U0) and
the captun:·d temtor)' in th... we.,t. and agreed that tht') v.ould "c;ettlt: their
J1fkren.:.:s b} p�.:.1.ct 11l me...ns through bilntcrnl negot1a1ton:· " Diplomatic and trnue
rdationc; ,-.ere r.:-e.,tt1blishcd between them in llJ:'6
The Prime \111mtcr of Pak1,;,tan and India met on the occasion of SAAR(
\ ,,nft:r�nu: in 1988 anJ 1gned J pact. Both the colmtne-. agreed not to attack the
,1.Klear Cl:ntcrs ot e,H. h other In 1989, the freedom lighters of Kashmir started their
-,truggk ••h•.11nst lndm lnJi.1 bagan to hl.irne Paki�tan tor the mil1tar;, mtcr,e11tion in
Kashmir. but Pak•� tan reminded India to l!" e the right of sdf-determinat1un to the
p1.:t1pk of Kashmir in the light o( l fN rcr;0lutions I here ,-.ere some 1mprm cmcnts
Ill rclatinn-. hd,,ccn India and Pakisl:m 111 the dccadt' of I 990.Mutual lraJc and
219
/lutf/ PaJ.b,tt111 Stu
tlie, Jor (BS-4 l'etin)
tru\-cJ of pa\scngcrs reluctant

incre ased but 1t remained limned because In�ia w�s
sol�:e the Kashm ir dispute 1 appeared
!o peacefully. Some bettcnnent ot: �c!auonsh �
in Pakista n and India in 1990. increased.
Mutual trade and travelling facil1tics were
In ?OO I. a summit-meeting was caHed in Agra. Presiden_t of Pak_1st8" Perve,
Mus_harraf attended the meeting and met Indian Prime Minister YaJpayee. The
president of Pakistan presented his v 1 ew-pomt. which was appreciated b) the whole
wo�ld. But the meeting ended fruitlessly after three days. In response to the 20�I
(suJrat earthquake in India. President General Pene1 Mushrraf sent a plane to India
that earned ]00 tents and more than 2,000 Blankets. Furthermore the President
called Indian Pnmc Minister to express his 's7mpathy' over the loss from the
iarthquakc.
On 20 th June 2004 the government of India and Pakistan agreed to extend
1 nuclear testing ban and to set up a hotline between their foreign secretaries aiming
o prevent misunderstandings that might lead to a nuclear war. Both India and
>akistan have launched several mutual confidence-building measures (CBMs) to
ase tensions between the two. These include more high-level talks. easing
isa restrictions. and restarting ofcricket matches. The new bus service
etween Srinagar and Muzaffarabad has also helped in bringing the two sides
loser. The session of UN General Assembly held in Septmber 2004, the president
f Pakistan and the Prime Ministr of India met, and resolved upon the continuation
f negotiation. which resulted in a series of meetings of foreign ministers and
·cretaries of both countries.
India offered generous aid to Pakistan in response to the 2005 Earthquake.
dian and Pakistani High Commissioners th
consulted with eachother regarding
operation in relief work. India sent 25 tonns 1h
of relief material to Pakistan
;luding food, blank ets �d medi�ine. On 1_4 October: India dispatched the
-::ond consign men t of relief material to Pakistan, by tram through the Wagah
,rder (Rediff).
Pakista n and India have also decided to co-operate on economic fronts. On
ia agreed t� resume talks with Pakistan which were
h February 20 J I, In_d
Attac�s. ln?1a p�t more press�re on all the diplomatic
n ded after Mumbai
� only contmue if Pakistan takes action against the accused of
ttJons. saying it will 1h ·
b ttack s. On 7 Sep
tember 20.
I 2' Ind'ian Extema I Affairs Mi·nister would
n� � ys visit to Pakistan to review the progres s of bilate ral dialogue with hb
e a
art.
ist ani counterp
220
11111/1 Pakl\11111 Stutl/t, or BS-4 )'l!(lf'\)
<,.3 PAKISTAN-IRAN RELATIONS

Pokiston nnd l_mn ha�e close religious and cultural relationi.
since long.
When Pnk1stan cume mto bemg. Iran was the first country \\ hich recognized it as
no independent state. The King of Iran was also the first head of state \.\ho \isned
Pukistn n ofter it cnme tnto existence. At the \'arious cabinet meetings. J i nnah
I
Jv.cllcd ot length on the importance of fostering cordial relations \.\Ith Iran · n
p,1rt1cular nnd the Muslim world in general. RaJa Ghazanfar Ali was appointed as
r11k1Still\ 1s lirst ambassador to Iran. Jinnah told him that he was going to a countr).
v.hich 11lrc.1tly had the most cordial rdat1ons with Pakistan since centunes al!o.
""'
1 he Prime Minister of Pakistan Nawab Liaqat Ah Khan \tS1ted Iran in 1949
and in rcspons1.: to this visit. Shah of Iran also , isited Pakistan in 195 0 and a treaty
ul fn1.:n<lship was sig n ed Since 1950 s, Pakistan a,\ards t,i.enty eight scholarships t�
lrnninn studen ts to come and contmuc their education in the discipline
or cng1111.:c1mg. medical professions. theology and di" mil). and Pharmac). wider
the Pakistan I cchrncul Ass1stam:e Programme (PI AP) ln addition. many self
tinancc lmnmn students arc given adm1ss1on in , anous educational institution!) of
Pnk1stan. nc1.:or<ltng to Pak1stan.Ptinjah U n hersit). K,1rach1 l'ni\ersit) and Quaid
c-A,.n m U111vcr!)1ty in Islamabad. arc the most popular 111st1tut1ons for the Iranian
,tudcnts.
Pakistan and Iran had worked together in different organization�: both had
Joint arrogcmcnts in regnrd to CENTO which "' as earher called as the Baghdad
l\1ct. Both the countries joined the Economic Coopt:rnuon Orgamlllllon (ECO). a
derivative of Region al Co-operation for Dc:Yelopment (RCD).. which "'as
cstnblishcd in 1964. Iran played nn important role i n l n do-Pakistan, war in l Q65
l Iran sent its qualified nurses. medical supplies. tlfl� a . gilt of 5.000 tons �•
llCtrolcum to Pakistan and ind,cuted thut it was con s,denng an embargo on 011
\Upplics to Ind in for the duration of the fighting. Iran again playe� .1 , ital r��e in
Pakis tnn's I C>71 contlict with India. this time. Iran sheltered Pakistan s m1ht�
Jqhlt und equipment. During the 1971 ,i.nr with _Ind,n. Pakbtan recel\cd full
11ilit11ry nnd diplom,itic support from lrtlfl against India. In a1!. tntt'n tc\\ '"It�a local
cwspapcr in Paris. Shah of Ira n openly acknowledged that: \\ c arc oppos\.J to.all
11tcrfcrcncc in intl!rnal affairs of Pakistan and arl! hundred percent bdund
,,c.!
11�istun.
id •�
In nd dition, the hah of Iran offered consider:iblc dc�elopmcn_t �
,1k 1 stan includin11 oil and gus on preferential terms. lru n ,,as mdu Slrtalw:d an
e l)
· d hr
• g ·t ·1rm
• ,
. a d was the c ear
1
t1:rnuttonully considered ns the 5th strongcst an cs
1, n
231
lladi PukiMu11 Stutlie, for (BS--4 ye1m1
unJispntcd rt>gmndl -.;upcrpl>Wer l\1oliamm.!J ReL:i P:::hlav1 of !ran did not attenJ
till' lsl,1m1c ( u11tcrcnce in 1974 at L nhorc bel:JUSC L1hyan leader Muam1na1
( ,addati was 111\ !led 10 it despite the kno,, n hm,tility of the Shah for Gaddafi.
In 1979. Pakistan ,vas one of the fir!it countries in the world which
recognized the reH)lutionary regime in Iran. foreign Mmister of Pakistan Agha
Shah1 immediate!) paid a state visit to Tehran who met the Iranian counterpart
Kanm Sanjabi on March l 0. 1979. Both expressed confidence by stating that Iran
:ind Pakistan were gomg to march together towards a brighter future. The next day.
Agha 'ihah1 held talks "ith the Ayatollah Ruhollah Khomeini. in "h1ch the
de\.elopments in the region were discussed On 11 April J 979. Zia famously
declared tl1 ut· "Khome!ni i� .i symbol ol lslam1c 111surgem;t:'".
In 1987 Pak1'-tan and Iran public8li ,;:E.ncd 1 muttwl agreement on c1, ii
rudear energ\ 1.ooprmion lnternat1onall). l1a-1il-l lnq c.1lculated that the ci, ii
nullear cuoprat,on with !ran '""" purel) a ··ci, ii mutter·· and marntaming good
rdationswid1 I an.
The Pres1d--nt of Pa\w,tan Gen.Pcrvau M<iharnf paid a vis:t to Iran 1n �000
and offered his coopernllon for the programmt of setting ur of gas pipeline. fn)in
Iran to lrdia. Prec;ident of Iran Mohammad Kltatam1 visned Pakistan in 200�. It
'"H a h1�h-level delegation. cons1st111g the lrnni�r. cabinet. members of
111e Parliament. lraninn Vice-President and President Khatami .They paid a three
li,1y state vi�it 111 December 2002.The Prime Minister of Pakistan Zafarullah Jamali
paid a state v1c;1t in 2003 where he held talks about economk cooperation. security
(,t the reg1011, and better bilateral ties bet\.\-een Pah.istan and Iran. During this nsit.
fomuli gi.J\ e valuahle suggestions to Iranian leadership on their nuclear programme"
agai11st thi: backdrop .)f the country's" negotiations with the lntern::nional Atomic
[ nergy Agcnc.� (I \l"A), and measures to strengthen economic relations between
the two countnc,.
In 2005. Iran .and Pakistan had conducted US$500 million uf 1rade. The
1.md bordc:r at I dftan 1s the conduit for trJde in electnc1ty and oil Iran j,_ extending
its rmlwa: 11d\\ork tow�irds lattan Tracie ht:tv,een the t\,o countries has incrcas\.'J
h) £1.4 biilion in 2009. ·1 he Iranian governor general says that P 1 cs1dcn1
AhmadinciuJ renwin,; keen to strengthen ties bet,v�en the two countries
rhc Iran. Pol-..1stan ond India p1pclme is und�r discuss1onThe:;e d 1 :..cus:..w11�
lt i r the gas pipcl111es and energy security started in 1994: Pakistan and Iran ha\l:
finally signed the 1111tial agreement 111 Tehran in 2009 The project, termed us thl.'
222
H11t1i P11/ii.,tu11 Suulie, Jor ( BS-4 ye,,n')
peace pipeline h) orficiab tn1m boih th\! cour,1ri 1:�. \\,IS :,1g11ed b} the Prcs1dcn1
/.1rdan o.nJ Pre�1dent MahmouJ .l\hmaJ,neiaJ nf Iran In 200',. !nuia wiLhdn..:w
fr )111 the project Jue tu securny i:--sucs Jf tlw, rroiect ,.., materialized naturally the
relattons \,ould furt_her expnnd m the cconrnmc u,1niai1t
6.-1 PAKISTAN-AFGHANISTAN RELATIONS
A rgha11ist::111 is a neighboring sLutc. At the 1110111cm Pak istan hm, g uod Jnd
l'iicndly relations ,, ith Afghanistan but ,f we go back especially tn the cnrly ytJr',
uf independence \\ c do !ind problL:n1s in the rd:11 ionship. So. A fg haniswn
recognized Pakistan , Ct") late and diplomatic relations were ,_kvelopcd in Febrw.1r)
1948. Durand line d1v1dc:s the borders of PakistHn and Afghanistan, which 1s about
2252km long Foreign Secretar) Government of India. Sir Durand a nd Afghan
Kind Atneer Abdul Rehman signed and agreed for the permanent solution of the
horder issue in 1893 It finaliLed the border line:;. Afthanistan :.iccepted the Durand
l ine as tts intl.!rnat1L1nal border. The rdat1<..1ns bcv,,een Pakistan and Afgh£111istnn
hegan to 1mprove 111 I 970 The P1 ,me M irnster of Pnkista;1 and the Pr\!'ii d ent of
Arghani stan ",sited each others. country and si�nt!d a pact <.if regiona! securit) and
11011-inlen ent il)J 1
fhe � l>\'id 1111lita!) eallered Atgha111'ita11 111 December 1979. The Afghan
people startcJ their jihad to oust the Russian arnl) from Afghanistan. Pakistan
t1pp0sed the SO\ 1ct 111tenent1011 and supported the r�s1sta11ce against the So\ 1et
L nion ,..,hicl, t!aH: h1rth to the Muj..1h1deen group'>. I aliban. Pakistan became one ol
the major traming grounds fc.,r the multi-national mu,1ahidt:en fighters who began
c,ossmg into Algha111stan on daily bases lo \\age ,var against the Democratic
Rt: public or A l'glldni-.;Lan und the Soviet forces
In 1988 C iene\ a Pact be tween Rus::.ia. Pakistan :rnd \ tgh,mic;tnn \\.1S ::>i!.!.111.:J
,rnj tht: Rusc;ian army was withdra\A.ln in 1989 under the auspi ces ol United N::niuns.
Gtivcmment of Mu1ahidecn wu5 formed in Afghanisw.n in April 199::!. Pakistan
n.'l.Ognized the n e,._ GoH·�nmcnt. Un fortunate!) thi.: dilforcncL:s alllong the
\1UJ::thide en emerged and a gr�1up of l\.fo_j?hidt.'t'fl i.e.· I al�)nn L'CCup icd the maior
rart of At"ghanistan and established Islamic Gov ernment 111 1990. Pakistan again
recogniL.ed the Taliban Government
r he Islamic Government of Al"ghani swn c:c:tab!ishl'd close rclntit,ns ,vith
t11,;ighburing Pnkistn n . however. the relations began lo decline when the Taliban
reruscd to endorse 1hc !)11rnnd Line anei- pressure f'rom Islmnahad. arguing that
there shall bi.! 110 borders among Muslims. After the inciden t of 11 ih September
~llodi Pal,;·t\fan .\rudle5/or (b:�-4 rean)
::!00 I oi �·orld Trade Center. America attacked Afghanistan a nd the Islamic

(,ovcmmcm 0f Afghanistan \\..'.\S toppled. The new pro-American government was
formed and I lammed 1'.arza i became the President of Afghanistan. Pakistan again
rccogn1 ✓cd the nc.:\\ government.
Afghan President Hammed .'(arzai labeUed Pakistan as Afghanistan's "Nin

brother". Such words in diplomatic r.:dks mean that Afghanjstan cannot tum enem)
against the state of Pak i stan to please others. The t•,vo states are working together t:,
lind solutions to the problems afTect1 ng them. ·1 his includes possible defense
cooperation and 111telhgence shanng as \\\'!JI as further enhancing the two-,va� trade
und abolishment of \lsas for "holders of diplomatic passports to fac1htate , isa fn:e
tra"el (or the d i plomats trom the two natiom,.
In Octoher 2010, the landmark. Afghan -Pak Transit Trade Agreemc=nt
(/\PTTA) \\.3S s1gr1ed b} Pakistani CommerC'e M1ruster Makhdoom Amin
fahim and An,,ar ul-Haq Ahady ( Afghan MinislI) of Commerce) The APITA
allowed Afghan trucks to be driven inside Pakistan\ o the Wagah border\\ 1th India.
including to the port c1t1es of Karachi and G\.\adar. In Jul} 2012, Afghanistan and
Pakistan agreed to extend AP ITA to TaJikistan in w1,at will be the first step for 1he
establishment of a North-South trade corridor The proposed agreemel't ,.,ill
provide facilities to Tajikistan to use Pakistan's Gwadar and Karachi ports for Its
imports and exports v.hile Pakistan will enjoy trade with TaJ ikistan under terms
similar to the transit arrangement \"ith Afghanistan I rade between Pak i stan and
Afghanistan is expected to reach $5 billion b} 2015 Afghanistan's econom\ � is one
of the fastest gro, ., ing econ omies tn the "orld.
6.5 PAKISTAN TURKEY RELATIONS

Turke } is a Muslim country. Tl�e relation bet\,ee,11 Turkey and Pak i �-,tan are
- pe p of bot� side are close!) as!;ociated with each other
deep root ed a nd the> � Jc
z d I ak1stan _as a� mdepende�t slate m 11 947. Turkey established
1 urkey recogni �
ateral relat1o�s. m 1?47, wh ich became .increasingly close O\\inu
diplomatic and bil
ious and geopoht1cal links between them.
¥
lO cult ural. relig

Turkey had stood by Pakist .
an in all kinds of situations 1·n
wars or peace
Turkey op enl) enc ou rage d t h c point?f n. e,.. of Pakistan on Kashmir conflict. It has
cere support to the. right ?f self-determination of the eople of
extend ed sin p
mir. Turkey supported Pak1sta� durm,s th e wars of 1965 1971.
K a s h _ and On the
e h and Puk1,u1� su�ported Turk ish point of view on Cyp us
oth r r issues I urkish
· tes were u minority a nd there was a problem of the' , . ·
C ypn o 1r ng hts un d mtcrcsts in
224
Hadi Pakistan Studies/or (BS-4 rean)
Cyprus. In 1974. Turkey la'lded its troops in ·or.hem Cyprus a.mi T.:Ikisb
Cypriotes established their own separate emjt). Pakis:.an is in fa,our of es-ia· Ii.shin;
an independent so,ereign and federaJ republic of C) prus thal is the demand of
Turkey.
Hoth countries. joined the U.S.-led Central Treaty Organization (CE\r:fO} aimed to
bolster military and strategic cooperation and counter the spread of corrh-nunism
and Soviet influence in the region. Pakistan. Turkey and Iran established the RCD
in 1964 which was replaced by ECO (economic cooperation organinuion) in 1985.
So, they are founding members of the Economic Cooperation Organization and par.
of the Developing eight Countries organization. Both have great contribution in I.he
multilateral arrangements of CENTO, RCD, ECO, etc.
Both the contries decided to increase trade and invesnnems. especiall� in
transport, telecommunications, manufacturing, tourism and other industries. S~
they have sought to increase the volume of bilateral trade from $690 million �o
inore than $1 billion by 20 1 0. Palcistani exports to Turke) include rice. sesame
seeds, leather, textiles, fabrics, sports goods, and medical equipment. � tr.,1'e)
exports to Pakistan include wheat, chickpeas, lentils. diesel. che!Illcal.s. transpon
vehicles, machinery and energy products.
They are also members of the Organization of Islamic Cooperation. It is due
to the dialogues between Ministerial commission of Pakistan and Turke}. four
agreements were signed in 2002 in Islamabad. Pakistan has completed the �!etro
Bus project with the help of Turkey. Turkish private corporations haYe also
invested significantly in industrial and construction projects developing highwa) s.
pipelines and canals.
In 2005 Kashmir earthquake, Turkey stepped up its effons to help the
Pakistani people of the affected areas. Turke} announced a package of S 150 million
for the quake-hit people. The Turkish aid organization Kizila) also constructed a
mosque in the Azad Kashmir region. The mosque is being built in the Ottoman
Style in Pakistan's Bagh District
A container train service was launched b) the Prime Minister of
Pakistan Yousuf Raza Gilani between Islamabad and Istanbul on 141h August, 2009
The first train carried 2 0 containers with a capacit) of around 75 0 t and would
travel 6, 500 km from Islamabad, through Balochistan. Tehran. to Istanbul in two
weeks' time. According to the Minister for Railways Ghulam Ahmad Bilour. after
the trial of the container train service, a passenger train will be launched There arc
also hopes that the route will eventually provide a link to Europe and Central Asia
225
l..'111U l'.J/.l\t11n Stu die-. /Cir (BS-4 r,·ars)
6.6 PAKISTAN-SAUDI ARABIA RELATIONS

di bi e
l'hc rd,uions bet\\ een Palisttut and the Kingdom ol Sau Ara a ar
lustoncalh ,md mternationalh dose. Before the emergence of Pakistan. Saudi
independence Saudi Arabia
• \1--.1bi.1 s�pp(irtcd the Pakis;an r-.1ovement. Atter
11nnwdi:.1td� recognized Pakistan.
� audi \robia and Pakistan have sought to develop exlensi\e commercial.
c ultural. religious and strategic relations since the establishment of Pakistan in
1947.Thc first pact ,,as signed between Pakistan and Saudi Arabia in 1951 . Thjs
agreement upported the friendly relationship of both the countries. In 1954 Shah
.\bdul ..\ziz of audi Arabia, isited Pakistan on official tour and provided sufficient
aid for the rehabilitation of refugees. In 1966 . Shah Faisal came to Pakistan on
onicial tour and declard Pakistan his second home. He also announced economic
aid for Pakistan. The major Pakistan city of Lyallpur was renamed Faisalabad in
the honour of King Faisal in 1977. Shah Faisal also provided economic aid to
construct Faisal mosque in Islamabad.
Saudi Arabia and Pakistan are leading members of the Organization of
Islamic Cooperation (OIC). They work together on the Organization of Islamic
Conference. Both countries consult each other on regional and international issues
from time to time . Saudi Arabia was one of the strongest supporters of Pakistan
during the war of 1_965 and 1971 \\i th India. especially opposing the creation
of Bangladesh. Saudi Government supported Pakistan on Kashmir conflict. Saudi
G oveITI?1_ ent supported Afghan_ policy of P _ akistan. 1t provided extensive financial
and poht1cal support to the Taliban. Saud1 Arabia being sacred country is a centre
'
of the Mualim ·Ummah .
Saudj · Arabia and Pakistan. have an extensi·ve econo mic •
· h'1p th at
re 1auons
expanded rapid a er
ly ft I 972. Saud1a had always provi·ded ce and
· • . economic . ass1s • 1an
• . An
loans to Pak istan an d 1t· ha d also mvest ed capita l in . .
Pak1stan m vanous pr oJects
• o!I. sup
importa_ nt aspect of re Iat1_o· nsh ip· is ply to Pakistan from Saudi Arabia. Since
I 998, H h ad b een supplymg• crude 011 to Pakistan on detierred payment bases. This
has helpe d to c..ase economic pressure on Pak.istan 8:11d Pakistan .
has been able 10
ob tain oil. 20 05 earthquake-Sa udi Arab ia topped the list of don or countries.
Pakistan supported Saudi Arabia du ring . .
troo ps �� prot�ct the Isl amic hoty
th�_Per�1an Gul� War l� I99 0·!991
and sent
' citi e� !n Saudi Arabia. paJ.jstan
maintains close military ties with Saudi Ar ct·abta, P�o:.idmg extensive support, arIT1:,
an d training for the Military of Sau 1 Arabia.
226
In the 1970 s an d 198 05'
--
/ lat// Pak/.\ta11 Stu1/ie.'i for (RS-4 yearv)
approximatdy 15,000 Pakistani soldiers were stationed in the kingdom of Saudi

Arabia. It is also speculated that Saudi Arabia secretly funded Pakistan's atomic
bomb programme and seeks to purchase atomic weapons from Pakistan. Both
nations have received high-level delegations of scientists, and Saudi military
experts of seeking to study the development of a Saudi Arabia government nuclear
programme. In May 1998, after the atomic tests, Saudi Arabia. along with United
Arab Emirates, were the only countries that backed Pakistan and they congratulated
for making the "bold decision". Saudi Arab1a promised to supply 50,000 barrels per
day of free oil to help Pakistan.
ln 2 006, King Abdullah of Saudi Arabia was awarded the Nishan-e
Pakistan, the h ighest civilian decoration of Pakistan. In recent years, both countries
have exchanged high-level delegations and developed plans to expand bilateral
cooperation in trade, education, real estate, tourism, information, communications
and agriculture.
6.7 PAKISTAN-BANGLADESH RELATIONS
Bangladesh was a part of Pakistan from 1947 to 1971. lt achieved
independence after the Bangladesh Liberation War and the lndo-Pak War of 1971.
In the initial years there was a lot of bitterness between the two countries. The
second 0. 1.C summit Conference was held at Lahore in 1974. The first Prime
Minister of Bangladesh Sheikh Mujib-ur-Rehman came to Lahore and participated
the O.I.C Summit Conference. On that occasion, Pakistan recognized Bangladesh
and from that time its relation with Bangladesh have gradually improved. The
Prime Minister of Pakistan Mr. Zulfiqar Ali Bhutto desired restoration of brotherly
links between the people of Pakistan and Bangladesh. Afterward the relationship
between Bangladesh and Pakistan began to thaw. Sheikh Mujibur Rahman
withdrew the bans on some pro-Pakistan organisations that had operated before
Bangladesh's independence. After restoring relations with Bangladesh Mr, Zulfiqar
Ali Bhutt went to Bangladesh on official visit. I le was accored a warm welcome by
the Government and the people of Bangladesh. But Sheik Mujibur Rehman was not
sincere in cultivating friendly relations with Pakistan. On the behest of India he
demanded the division of assets and refused to accept any liability. So the relations
between Pakistan and India could not become cordial so long as Sheik Mujibur
_
Rehman was m pow er.
When the rule of Sheik Mujib�r Rehma � came ,10 end on J 5 August J 975,
. _ _
the Pnme Mm1ster Mr. Zul fiqar Ah Bhutto 1mmedtately recognized the new
_
Governmept a�d expressed hi s keenness to have closed relation. The government
227
lladi Pakistat1 St11diesfor (BS-4 years)
, -
of Pakistan donated economic aid like clothes and 50, 000 tons of rice for th e peop e
l
of Bangladesh as a token of goodwill. Mr. Khurshid Ahmed was appointed as first
Ambassador of Pakistan to Bangladesh on 9 December 1975. Whereas Bangladesh
appointed Mr . Zahir-ud-Din Ahmed as their first Ambassador to Pakis tan
Different agreements were signed in July 1976 in Dhaka among members for
improvement in the fields of ship building, banking and telecommunication. Air
service was also started to maintain communication link.
Relations between Pakistan and Bangladesh improved considerably under
the governments of Zia-ur -Rahman and Hussain Mohammad Irshad in,Banglade!>h
Defence cooperation improved considerably under the military regimes of Ziaur
Rehman and Hussain Muhammad lrshad. The meeting of the joint Ministerial
Committee of two countries was held on 8th September, 1984 at Islamabad where
trade agreements were signed. In this meeting it was decided that Bangladesh
would export jute, tea and carpets to Pakistan and Pakistan would export rice, pig.
iron, railway carriages and steel items to Bangladesh.
In 1985, President Ziaul Haq visited Bangladesh, and said "Your heroes are
our heroes." Bangladeshi president lrhsad visited Islamabad in 1986. In 19°3.
Meeting of heads of SAARC was held in Dhaka where an agreement was signed
between Pakistan and Bangladesh according to which Pakistan would provide 300
tractors to Bangladesh in the future two years. In 1998, Prime Minister Sheikh
Hasina Wajid visited Pakistan. In July 2002, Pakistani General Pervez
Mush arraf also visited the war memorial and said "Your brothers and sisters in
Pakistan share the pain of the events of 1971.
In the present day both the countries have cordial relations tra de has
th
improved and the visits of senior official and political leaders have been 'there. Bo
worked �ogether within the frarn�work of SAARC, OIC. With the passage of time
the relations of both these countries are going to expand.
6.8 PAKISTAN- INDONESIA RELATIONS
Indonesia is a Musli� country. Its old name was "East Indian Islan d". lt had
been a colony of Holand till March 1942. Afterward it remained under Japan ese
rule till 1945 . In 1_945 Jap�ese_ forces were defeated due to dropping of Atom
Bomb �t Nagasaki and H1rosh1ma. In those cirumstances the Nationalists of
Indonesia, Dr. Ahmed Soekamo and Dr · Hatta dec1ared .1t R epu 1·1c, on 17th August.
1945. But m • the meanw _ mle th_e hostilities between the Indonesian Nativnalists and
Dutch eru� ted which continued for four years till r
the . ' 1949 · Aft.er the. Wa deinaded,
cl>
· the first mtenm Government of Indo nesia was set up Pakistan 1m e t . s
m
recogmzc• d the government of Indonesia. The
Republic of Indonesia�
228
Hedi Pat.istar, Studio for (BS-4 yean.)
established on I 5 lh August 1950 under the leadership of Dr Sockarno ln<l<111l ,i:1 is

the v.orid largest 1uslim countl) in terms of its population. It cover-; u lot.ti ,uc:t!;
of 788,662sg.miles. 1.e.12618859 Km.and divided into 27 provmces.
President Soekamo came to Pakistan on official visit in I cbruary
1950. The GO\ emment and people of Pakistan gave h11n a warm welcome During
exchange of his , iews with the prime minister of Pakistan Nawah Liaqu:11 Ali
Khan. he expre!)sed his thanks to the people of Pakistan for showing great
hospitality. He also expressed thanks to the Governmcn1 of Pukiswn for :tending
troops to fight independence struggll! of Indonesia. Alter :-;eparation of Easl
Pakistan as Bangladesh, Pakistan 1s the world's second largest Muslim country.
Both countnes are, members of the Organisation of Islamic Cooperation and
de\eloping eight Countries.
Pakistan's relationship with Indonesia greatly developed under <,en Ayub
Khan. President <ioekamo came to Pakistan in I 964. An ugrccment for thi:
promotion of cultural and economic was signed This agreement is known as
Indonesia Pakistan Economic and Cultural Cooperation (IPECC). During the 1965
v.ar v.ith India. Indonesia offered to pro\ide military help to Pakistan. ln<lonc!lia
openJ� supported Pakistan b} sending its nm y to <lcfcn<l l· ast Pakistan. Pakistan
i�?' a memorandum of understanding on defense cooperation. lndo�sia and
Pa!':Jstan also exchange milita.r)· personnel for training. Indonesia also condemnl.!<l
So, iet intervention in Afghanistan and advocated Pakistan point of view on
th
Afghanistan. On 14 January. 1966 an air pact of bilatcrnl air travel was signed
between two countries. On 15th Februar). 1966, t1 trade pact was abo signed hy
v. hich Pakistan agreed to pro\:ide goods ,, onh Rs.16 crores to 1 ndoncsia. Pakistan
exports seafood. textiles, cotton yarn. medical cquipn11.:nt. nee, wheat and carpets,
\\:hereas Indonesia exports Pakistan palm oil
Pakistan Army Task Force and the Pakistan Islamic Medical Association
provided medical 'and relief items to Indonesia, following the 2004 ·1 sunami. In
response to Pakistan. Indonesia sent 15 tons of medicine and food supplies
amounting to the equivalent of S1 million and dispatching some doctors to Paki ..;tan
during the 2010 P�istan floods. In�onesia's President Megawati Sukarnoputri paid
_
a 3-day offic1al v1s1t to _Islamabad
_ _ m D�
cembcr, 2003. Indonesian president Susilo
Bambang Yudhoyono v1s1ted Pakistan m 2005. Former Pakistani president Pcrvc:,
�usharraf visited Indonesia in January, 2007, and held talks with presidents Susilo
Bambang Yudho�on�. _In Novem�r, 2010, Pakistan Foreign Minbtcr Shah
Mehmood Qureshi v1s 1ted Indonesia and supervised b 1 lutcral talk!, 011 intdc
terrorism and current si tuation in Afghanistan and Middle East.
229
Hudi Pakistu11 Studies or BS-4
f ( years)
EXERCISE-6
Objective type Questions
Q. l: Encircle the correct options.
1. Pakistan recognized China on its birth on October:
(a) 1949 (b)1950 (c) 1951 (d) 1952
2. The relation between Pakistan and China began in:
(a) I949 (b)1950 (c)1951 (d)1952
3. The ilk-rout of Karakaran1 was completed in:
(a)1949 (b)1950 (c) 1969 (d) 1970
4. lndia and Pakistan signed Indus waler treaty in 196 0 with the help of:
(a)World Bank (b) China (c)America (d) Soviet Union
5. Ho\\ man) major wars between Pakistan and India have fought .
(a)2 (b)3 (c)4 (d)5
6 . Shimla agreement was signed between Indra Gandhi and Z.A Bhutto in:
(a)l970 (b)1971 (c)1972 (<l)l974
7. The Soviet Union directed a farewell message to Prime Minister Liaqat Ali Khan in:
(a) 1948 (b)1949' (c)1950 (d) 1951
8. The American President Turman requested prime Minister Liaqat Ali Khan
to provided a military base to the central intelligence Agency (CIA)in:
(a)I 948 (b)1949 (c)1950 (d) 1951
9. Raja Ghazanfar Ali Khan was appointed as Pakistan's first ambassador to:
(a)Iran (b)China (c)Afghanistan (d)America
1 O. The diplomatic relations between Afghanistan and Pakistan den-:loped in Februarf:
(a) I9 4 7 (b) 1948 (c)I950 (d)195l
J 1. Durand line divides the borders of Pakistan and:
(a)Afghanist an (b)Iran (c)China (d)lndia
1 2. The Metro Bus project was started with the help of:
(a) Turkey (b)Iran (c)China (d)America
] 3. A container train service was launched between Pakistan and Turke) on:
(a) 2007 (b)2008 (c)2009 (d) 201 0
1 4. Shah Faisal declared, Pakistan his second home in:
(a)l954 (b)l960 (c)1964 (d)l966
1 5. Pakistan rcognized Bangladesh in:
(a) 1972 (b)1973 (c) 1974 (d)1975
· ·
1 6. AJotnt· · E conom1cs Comrmss1on was establ 1'shed between Pakistan and
·
Bangladesh in:
(a)1972 (b) 1973 (c) 1974 (d) 1979
230
,
1/111/1 #'111./$llfl \11111/t•\ /If /1,\ ,/ \'l'llf$
------.....:,""""',.eo,,-=oo,-----_,......,.__
(.).2: l'i,·k tlu.• 1'1 u,• und F11I,,·
I. lnth111e:-i.1 i:-. th1: ,1;111 Id l11r�•e,t Mw,li111 cm111t1y in tl!llll., of its population.
·1 rul! / False
li11fo11csw di\ kkd into ?7 1m1, im:l!s ·1 rue/ False
1. Second() I ( M1mm11 conlbcncc wus held 111 L.ilHlll! 111 1978. True/ Fulse
4 I hl· l'11vc1 nmcnt of �hl·tl-. M1�jihur Rehman w,,., toppk<l 011 I 5 1h August
I 97't I rue/ False
�. l } ,1ll pur w.is ,1lsu 1e11an11:d 1:11isnl11ha<l 111 honour of' King Fuisul. True/False
6 P,1l-.1st,ltl s1.111ed the metro hus pm,1cct with the help of'Turkey. True/ False
5. Pul-.1st11n had nu pkosunt fl'h1tions wi th A lghunistun 111 very lx:ginning.
True/ False
6. Alghamst,m ueccpted the DurunJ linens theinternational border in 1893.
True/ False
7 Gene,,, P.ict hctwcet Russiu, Pukistun un<l Afghunistun was signed in 1988.
True/ False
8. I he Prime �hnistcr of Pukistun NU'.\ilh Lia4u1 Ali Khan visited Iran in
1949 'I nie/ False
Q.3: 'Fill in the Ulukk.11
l lndonesi,1 is l,11gc�t Muslim countr) ,.,,hich di, ide<l in---------- provinces.
2. Put..,stun rclutton with lndoncsm gn.•atly developed under ----------
g<1\ ernml'lll.
3 Bunglude�h wus n part uq>ut..istun from 1947 to----------
4. Mr Khurshid Al1111cd 1'.han \.-vus appointed Pakistun lirst Ambassador to
Bangladesh on 9'h lkcemher--•- -
5. Put..istan rccogm,cd 13nngludcsh in-------------
6. Suu<.li Ar.1b1a supportcd Pnktslun during the war of 1965 and ----------
7. A contamcr train sen 1cc wus launched by -------------- between Islamabad
,utd lstunhul in 2009
8. fhc rdution between Pakistun nnd C'hinu began in -----------
9. l'hc Silk- route of Kamkurnm wns compk·ted in--------------
10. lhe Srlk route of'Karnkiinun is ·····-------long.
11. rhc muin dispute between Pa.kistun un<l India is the-------------
12. Jndiu und Pakistan signed Indus water treaty in------ --------
13. Shimlu agreement was signed between Pakistan and Indio in-----------
14. Iran wus the first country which rccogni,cd Pakistnn ns on-------------
15. Raju Gtuu.Ju1for Ali khan was uppointcd ns Pnkisuu1's first nmba-.sador to---- ----
231
lladi Paki:,ta11 Stutlief for (8S-4 rears)
16. The <l1plomat1c relations bel\'.een Afgha!')istan und Pakistan d •\/eloped in ---
17. Durand line dinded the border of Pakistan .md----------------

18. Durand line finalized between Pakistan and Afghanistan hy Afghan Kiug
and----------------in 1893
ANSWER
Q No. I: Encircle the correct options.
I. (a) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (a) 5. (b) 6. (c) 7. (b) 8. {c) 9. {a) 10. (h) 11 . (u) 12. (u)
13. (c) 14. (d) IS. (c) 16. (d)
Q No. 2: Tick the correct choice.
I. (T) 2. (T) 3. (F) 4. (T) 5. (T) 6. (T) 7. ('l) 8. (T) 9. (T) I0. (T)
Q No. 3: Fill in the Blanks.
I. 27 provinces (2). Gen. Ayub Khan (3). 1971 (4). 1975 (S). 1974 (6).1971 (7),
Prime Minister Yousaf Raza Gilani (8) 1950 (9). 1969 ( 10) 900 K m ( 11) K,,..,hmir
Issue (12). 1960 (13). 1972 (14). Independent state (IS). lmn (16).1948 (17)
Afghanistan (1 �). Sir D, rand Foreign secretary of India
Short questions
1. Write a short not on Shimla Agreement of 1972 bctwc..:en Pakistan and India.
2. What is Indus water treaty of 1960?
3. Which is the largest Muslim country? Oescrib� m short
4. What was the role of Indonesia, during the Pak-India war 1971?
5. Write the role of Iran during the Pak-India war 1971.
6. Write a short not on diplomatic relations between Pakistan und I u1kcv.
7. Write a short :1ote on the Military relation between Pakistan and Snu<li
Arabia.
8. Write a short note about economic aid of America under the prcssler
Amendment.
9. Write the relations between Pakistan nnd Afghamstan after 1996.
\ O When was Bangladesh rccogni,�d h) Pakistan? And � hl.'rc
11. What is ilk-Route'! Write in Shott!
12. Which country is the l�u·gest supplier of Am1s to Pnki :!'.1\'?
LONG QUESTIONS
I. Discuss the relation bet\\ccn P:\kistan and Chinn.
2 Explain the rebtions between Pakistnn nnd United States
J. Lxpb:11 the relations betv:ce11 Pakistan �nd Saudi Arnlrn,
-=--------------------------
4. Discuss the relation between Pakistan and lrnn.
232
Hadi Pakista11 Studiesfor (BS-4 years)
APPENDIX
(For University of Education Lahore "Multan Campus")
l. SOCIETY AND ITS STRUCTURE
Definition of Society . .
Society means the system of living together in groups . According to Linton.
a society is "any group of people who have lived and worked together long enough
to get themselves organized anJ to think of themselves as a social unit with well
defined limits·· Bertrand considers society ·'that group within which men share a
total common life".
l'iature and Characteristics of Society
Characteristics of human society are as follows:
1. Permanent social group
Society is permanent and largest social group of people living together for a
long period. where the members of society learn the norms of social life in various
social groups
2. Classification of society
Societ} can be classified on the basis of profession. i.e. caste n�e "ex.
literac}, race and religion. All these groups perform their respective purpose and
have their own structure.
3. Main organs of human societie
There are at least five main organs of human societtes which are famil},
education, econom), polities and religion. The interrelationship amon� institutions
creates structure for the society .
.i. Aspects of human societies
Human societies have at least two aspects rural and urban . Rural 5ociety is
sparsely residing group of people with simple culturt:. The urban group lives in
cluster with complex culture.
S. Culture of human societies
�II human . soci.eties have their �wn culture. It is the way of life of people
and provides the d1rect1on to the people m their social actions. r
6. Human needs
Society fulfils human needs through social relationship amon , the
members. g
7. An organized unit
":' s�ciety
.
is or�anized b� the process of interdependence among the grou
p::,
and the mstttuttons . This need bmds them all together into an orga
nized unit
233
..
!!_atJI Pakl,;tq,r Studie�for (BS-tJJg
N}
8. Territorial bounda11
The human socictie, have political go..,emments in which territorial
houndary 1s an essential cond i tion.
Types of ociety
Human so;iet) can be di H ded into three sets detail of these sets is as
follows.
I. Nomadic V/S Sedentary societies
(i). Nomadic ocicty
The people of nomadic societies do not have their permanent place of
residence the)' do not have agricultural or ance�1ral propert)'. The} roam from place
to place wi t h their luggage on the back camels, hor�es. donkeys in search of fodder
and water for their animals and food for themselves. Their way of living is old and
traditional.
ii. Sedentary Society
People of this society are permanently settled in rural or urban areas. They
have agricultural and resident1aJ lands, which transferred from generation to
generation. Tribal people hke muree tribe, Kutchi tribe etc. are also part of this
societ}. .
2. Traditional V/S Modern Societies
(i) Traditional Society
Population size of this kind of society are vef) small People of this societ}
arc settled on thl!ir land. They are associated with agriculture profession. labour and
small scale. business. Because this society 1s non industrial. Facilities like
electricity, gas telephone etc are not ava1lahle
Modrrn Societ
y
(ii)
This soci ety is model of urbanization which is having advance industrial
y
and technologi cal s stems. Population size of this society is very high ha\ ing
millions of people in citi.es. Modem urban facilities like electricity, gas, fax
etc a re available in it. Women of this societ) ar e
telephone school. colleg e airports
highly educated and work paraJlel to men in different walks of life.
3. Rural V/S U rban Societies
People of this s?Ciety are rusociated with agri'culture profession. ome of
them are also in voh ed in labour r�lated to agriculture. They have open residences
covering vast areu for c?urtyard. Literacy rate in thjs kind of societies is general!)
low and females arc discouraged go for fonnal education. Basic facilities like
hospitals, schools, colleges, electricity, gas etc are lacking behind in this societ) ·
234
· · '
I •
l'n,p I l' nl 1111 ,rn,:1c1y 111 • r.1 1111111111;1 II y 1111 he }l"tI w·1tt1 r••l' o ,)U'> bcl'1cf'i, J,ut their
.. 1r11'
knowledge aho,11 "livi1111 i H•·11�1t.lly pc,,,r.
(Ii) \Jrh1111 Sot·h•t,y • •
1 11 thi !l •.m tl·ty 11 u,111plcx life i I fou11cl i11 wh1c h tli 1• people of d1ffc!cnl r�s.
p1olt.",•,in11 , c1"11ci-1 1111d u li!,( i111111 live tc,Bctlu.:r, 'I he people of tlus soc!ely
upp1cd 1ttl·d L,llci(tl l l1 1111J•l·, 'I ht 11111 of 1,c;ial cl11111ge i 1 1:iittcr due to education.
h:d 11 1nlnpy i 11 dwl11 y 1111d 1111!,1111111111111 I 11<.:iliticN like clcclricity gai;, _ 1:�cpho�e.
:11qH,1t ct, 111 c 11v11il11 hlc i11 11,h,111 oucty I ,111 111 nviailahility of urhan fac1hues, high
-.1amh11d ul' livi11� l!i fn1111d t·o111p;11i11J w1lh 1111,11 f,11ciety,
1
Strudun- of Uu• Soc:it•ty

/\ sol.· kty is co111p11!!ccl of :i l11rgc 111 11nhcr of' .ocial instit11tions. An
in,titut1un .-. ,, nclwnr� of' ,<ll.'i,.t 11or111 . 'I he 11ctw111k of ,11cial rdationship among
v1 111uus 1m,ltllt11011s ,., i.:11llul ,111.:i11I t1\l1tct11rc. 'I he 1,ocicty cswblishcs a permanent
�•nup lo, 111.:1:d qt11li1<:t1<>n lhis gwup is called institution. 'J hcsc societies which
h,1vc complex i.:ult111c have II huge 1111111her of insti1111ions. ·1 he simple societies have
srn,ple ..,rn:n1l c.11111:lurc with II few i11•,titutio11:1. 'I here me at least fine hasic
1m,lllutio11s in u pie litcrutc sociely i.e. family, education, politics, economy and
religion I hesc 111s11tutions arc 1 cl,1tcd lo hil'iit. needs of human society. On the
1 dat1onsh1p of these inslit111to11,, lhe slwctur� of oeicty stands. Relationship
among instit11tio11s i� culled 'IO(..IUI stnacturc.
Sociol Structure umon� in\titution
Rcl,11mnship 11111ong inslltutiun'i i"i titlkd !>ocial structure. 'I he detail of thl!
rclutionship mnm1g vuriuus M1c111l g, 011ps hclo1wi11g to vwiou� institutions arc as under.
I. J,'11mily 1md cduciation
·1 he hurnly is the first institution of' a society which reproduces human
ge11emt1on uml folfi Is ulmost ull the 11ccds of' its mcmbcrc, Education is the baste
need which is husicully ptovidcd by f,muly first. Family teat.hes basic nom1s of life
to 1ls members i.c culturul vulucs, utlltudc, hclicfs, cushunc,, 111tcrcsts. In this way.
the busic uims of education urc fulfilled with 111 the family. When the family sends
their children lo cducntionnl institution und lulfils its conditions of hooks, uniforms.
dues und punctuality of t1111c, the cducutionul in. titutio11o; help the P11nily in
providing education to thejr children. By educution the children learn the norms of
life nnd udopl independent thinking on sociul life. /\1\cr completing their education
they become carntn� member� of society.
2. Social !ltr�cture betwtcn f11�1ily, e�ucation 1uu.l economy
_
Relnhun sh1p , umon g three mstitut101 1s fumily, education and economy
. _ .
constitute u socml stnicturc. hlucatmn and family have direct relationsh i p between
23S
/lad/ Pal.lMtm St11tll1!!ifor (BS-4 year.<i)
them. In the same direction the education and economy also support each other
because without finance the education system cannot run. On the other hand with
out education the techniques of economic system cannot be learnt. Similarly, the
family needs money to make a successful living and the economic institutions need
workers who come from their families In this network, all these three institutions
constitute a social structure.
3. Social structure of economy, polities, religion family and education
The five basic institutions of a society have their relations with all other
institutions. Politics cannot succeed without education. An illiterate candidate gets
least votes against his literate opponents in Pakistani society. Education provides
controlling power to politics and teaches principles of politics to the family
members. Religion provides code of ethics and morality to politics, economy,
family education. All institutions support religion by money, teaching methods,
social power and students. Economy plays very important role in influencing all
other institutions. No institution functions without economic resources. This is a
great social �tructure of a simple society.
2. FEATURES OF PAKISTANI SOCIETY AND CULTURE
Definition of Culture
Culture means the overall behaviour of any commw1ity. This behaviour
includes all the aspects of our life. Our language, dress style, food, residence,
habits, customs and traditions, religious beliefs, education and all these activities
are included with which we arc in contact with, as a member of the community.
According to Edward Tyler
"Culture is related to all type of knowledge and arts, laws and
beliefs, traditions and customs. It is also relaled to the tho1tghts and
actions of humans".
Mix Culture
Before Pakistan came into being, people coming from different parts of the
world settled in. These included lranians, central Asians, Arabs, Greeks, Iraqis and
Europeans. Every group which came here brought along their tradition, customs,
festivals, dress style, food and their life style. These groups influenced each other,
with which a mixed culture started emerging.' When the Muslims came to South
Asia, they gave a new living style i.e equality brotherhood, communal justice and
truth to the people. The people of different provinces of Pakistan have their own
values and traits like languages and traditions differ from one another but they are
connected with a common Islamic culture. Pakistan is a beautiful example of
multicultural society.
236
-
Hudl Pakistan Studiesfor (BS-4 years)
,.
Religious Festival
' The majority of the population of Pakistan are Muslims �d �ey celebrat�
their religious and social festivaJs like Eid-ul-Fitr, Eid-ui-Azha, Eid Milad-un-Nabi
(P.B.U.H). Shab-e-Miraj and Shab-e-Barat with great devotion and respect. These
festivals are part of our centuries old culture. Moreover, non-Muslims also enjoy
· full liberty to c elebrate their festivals.
Dress
People of every province and region of Pakistan wear traditional dresses. In
villages and urban areas, different dresses are worn. The dresses in Pakistan are
made keeping in view the religious needs and weather. Weaming a cap or having a
turban on the head is liked. Both save you from the extremities of weather. In the
rural areas of Punjab, men wear dhoti Kurta and turban. Now the trend of shalwar
is also growing. Women like dupatta, shalwar and kurta. In urban areas sl.alwar,
shirt, pants and coat. sherwani and waistcoat are in vogue. In cities the influence of
western dress is clearly visible. In GiJgjt Baltistan, different dresses are worn
according to the weather. It is a common practice to wear shaJwar kameez and a
cap. In the provinces of 'Khyber Pakhtunkhwa, Baloehistan and Sindh, loose
shalwar is worn. All over Pilistan, the dress is prepared as per the requirements of
purdah. Women prefer to wear embroidered dresses. On the occasion of marriage a
beautiful dress is got prepared for the bride.
Urses and Fairs

Urses and fairs are held every year in Pakistan. They reflect our culture. The
urse of the great saints like, Hazrat Data Ganj Baksh Ali Hajveri (R.A), Hazrat
Baba Farid-ud-Din Shakar Ganj (R.A), Hazrat Shah Rukn-e-Alam MuJtnai (R.A.),
Hazrat Baha-ud-Din Zakariya Multani (R.A.), Hazrat Madhu Lal Hussain (R.A)
(Mela Charghan), Hazrat Hazrat Saidan Shah (R.A), Hazrat Sacha! Sarmast' Sindh.
Hazrat Shah Abdul Latif Bhaitai {R.A) are held yearly.
Every year before and after the harvesting season, official and unofficial
fairs are arranged in ?i�erent cities. As soon as the spring season starts, Pakistani
peopJe head to the fairs m droves. Some important days of historical persona · lities '
fairs and sporting events are as under:
Horse and Cattle Show in Fortress Stadium, Lahore Sahandur (Gilgit) Polo
Matches, Annual festival at Sibi, l 4th August, the Independ�nce day of Pakstain J st
May, Labour Day etc, Date of Births and deaths of Quaid-e-Azam (RA) �d
Allama Iqbal (RA) and Takbeer Day.
237
1/utll l'uAIH1111 81111/ln 11r fl.\' ii 1·,·un
Foods
Pcoph: lil...l· dit1�rl'lll foods Ill diffl·rcnt rq;iuns of 1'11k.i�111n In Punjab ,111d
Sindh. meat. , cgct,tbks. pulses nnJ rice 1m: lil...cJ , l'r\ Much In Kh}bcr
Pnl...htunl...hwu und Balcochistun, t\ll'Ut, Jr) nnd frl•sh fruits 111c prckm:d \\ he.it und
rice art> spcdalknll) ll'-l'c.i In fond. lhnsc ,., ho ll\ c m:nr Sl'll hl'aChl'S 111...l' lhh , er)
much. In Punjub. f\till... nml I nssi nrc the fovnuritc dnnl...s whc1c,1s qalH1,,u is the
l�\\Ouritc drink in Khyber Pnl...htunl...ll\\11 and Bnlnch1st.m. Sujji um) K,ualu (,usht
obout hulf ,\ ccnlltr) bncl... were limited to Kh ) bcr PaJ...htunl...hw,1 and North1.:rn
Punjab onl) . tm from Pcshnwnr to Karachi nnd Qucllu. ,t 1s e4Li.1ll) liked,
Regarding food. the lil-..ing and prclercnccs of pl!opk nrc 1.:hunging. I he fuvouritc
dish of Pali toni people is meat.
Values
In all the regions and provinces of Pnkistnn. excellent nnd <.hstinct ,ulucs .trc
found. Lit't- is simple and respectable. Elders arc respected. It is the custom to 10\c
the young ones. To fulfil the needs of the helpless. the ncl.!d) nnd the poor people.
the systems of Zakat and adqn. etc. is existing ut officio! nnd non-otlicial le\d
Women are looled upon , ith respect and dignity. People shore feelings on sod and
happy occasions. Problems arc solved through mutual discussion. In rural area.'-.
panchayats comprising the village elders solve many quarrels at the local it:, d.
Marriage
Marriage is a religious obligation in Islam. On a specific day, the ikah
ceremony is held. Food is arranged by the bride's family. After this the
br:degroom:s family invites people for Yalima.
The birth of children

Immediately after birth, the azaan is recited in the child's ear so thnt 1t
should be known that he was born in a Muslim family with Allnh's bles ing. The
aqeeqa ceremony is also arranged. The relatives and friends especially express joy
at the birth of children and gift are also given to the newborn.
Death Rites
At the death of a person. the relatives, and acquaintances gather at the house
of the deceased. The dead body is bathed and a shroud is wrapped around the bod).
Later on, the namaz-e-Janaza is offered, the body is buried in the grave)ard . QurJil
Khawani is arranged for essal-e-Sawaab. Nothing is cooled in the house of the
deceased on the day of mourning. The relatives and neighbours arrange the food for
a couple of day.
238
Sport
ln Pakistan competitions of different traditional and modem
. games are held.
Pakistan has teams of cricket, hockey, squash and Kabaddi. Other
than these.
volleyball, football and tennis are also famous games. Tournaments are held
at the
district, dh isiona1, provincial and national level in these games. Pakistan is also
famous for the art of wrestling. Pakistani wrestler Gama, popularly known as
Rustam-e-Zaman. In Gilgit and the northern areas, polo is very popular and has
been played for approximately two thousand years.
FINE ARTS
Architecture
The art of architecture is hereditary for the Pakistanis. Many historical
buildings were built by the Muslim rulers. They constructed beautiful gardens. The
Shahi fort of Lahore Shahi Masjid Lahore Wazir Khan Masjid. Shalimar Gardens.
Chnuburji, Tombs of Jehangir and Noor Jahan are the models of our old culture.
The sher Shahi Majsjid Behra, Jamia Masjid Thatta, Mahabat Khan Masjid
Peshawar and other such historical sites are inherited by Pakistanis. Some
magnificent beautiful buildings have also been constructed after the creation of
Pakistan like the tomb of the Quaid-e-Azam, Karachi, Alfalah Buildings. I ahore.
Faisal Masjid. Islamabad etc. All such sites are great attractions for the tourists.
Handicrafts
Handicrafts have great importa..11ce in Pukistan. The people have been
producil lg handicraft� in cottage industry. Man and women make h=indicrafls.
These handcrafts like sports and surgical goods at Sialkot, Carpets arc
manufactured in the houses in all the provinces. Khadar of Kamalin, Sheets of
Bhera and Multan, embroidery of Bahawalpur nud Multan are much appreciated in
foreign countries.
Pain.ting
The art of painting in Pakistan is very ttnique. It is considered Pakistan's
identity. In the art of calligraphy famous calligraphists in Pakistan have created
unrivalled master pieces. Works of art of painting and Caligraphy belonging to
Mugh31 times and modern times are displayed in the Lahore Museum and Shahi
Qila.
The educated people greatly oppreciatc the classical and modem pieces of
Art. Abdur Rehman Chughttui has produced the illustruted Diawan-c-Ghalib.
Shakir Ali Sadiqain, Aslam Kamul and many other Pakistani Artists haw touched
the heights of fume.
239
-
llutll l'ul.i{tu11 St11d/ef/or (BS-4 years)
3. NATURAL RESOURCES OF PAKISTAN

Introduction
Natural resources mean all the material and forces under and abO\ e the land
'-\ith which nature has blessed any count'). Natural resources include land its
fcrtilit) and situatJOn . forests. minerals. climate, \',ater resources. sea resources etc.
According to Alfred Marshall. ..Natural Resources mean the materials and
the forces which Nature gives freely For man's aid. in land and water in atr and
light and heat" According to M P. Todaro " aturaJ resources comprises the natural
environment. on the surface of the earth, belov. its crust, m the air. and in the
ocean, so whatever is available on the eartb comes under this categof) i.e. in the
form of minerals. forests, fisheries".
Mineral Resources of Pakistan

Natural resources are very important for the developmen1 and prosperit) of
a country. Allah almigAty has blessed Pakistan with a lot of natural resources But
there resources remained unexploited for years. It is due to lack of technical �kill.
finances and technology. Some minerals like Coal, iron, copper etc are found in
solid form and some like gas, petrol, oil etc. are found in liquid form. l he mineral
n:sources of Pakistan are as follows:
J. Natural Gas
Natural gas was discovered in 1952 al Sui (Balochiston). More than T!. ga s
fields have been discovered in Mari, Uch. Khairpur and Jacobaba d t:tc. It 1s a
Cheap substitute for coal and petroleum. The importance of natural gm, to the
country has been increasing rapidly. It is used in ge n eral industr) to prep,1r�
consumer items and to generate electricity. Jn the forn1 of C G, it t!> used in
transport sector. The use of CNG is being encouraged to reduce pressu re on
petroleum imports and improve environment.
2. Crude Oil
Oil is called the liquid gold. It is an important source of energy. It 1s mostl)
imported from I ran and Gulf slates. Now some valuable rcsenes are foun d in
Jhc lum, Mianwali, Attock, Balkassar, Mia!, Chakwal and Dhodak. It contributes
about 29% to the total energy supply of the country.
•3. Coal
Coal is one of the important minerals produced in Pakistan. It is u ed in
power generation. Pakistan has coal resources estimated at over 185 billion tonnes.
including I 75 billion tonnes identified at Thar coalfields in Sindh. There art •th0
thr ee main coalfields around Quetta.
240
Had/ Pakl\tan Studie\fer (BS-4 yeur�)
•-=
4. Chromite
It is used in preparing othl!r metals. leather tanning, making of steel
products and stainless steel. I he deposits of Chromite are found in Zoab (Muslim
Bagh). Chaghi. Mulakand. Mahmood, Wazirsistan. Fort Sondaman etc.
5. Gypsum
Gypsum is found at Jana and salt range. It is mined at Khewra. Dandot and
Daud Khel. Gypsum' is a stone which is used in the production _of cement, chemical
fertilizers. plaster of paris etc.
6. Sulphur
It is very useful ore for the chemical industry. Its deposits are found in
Kalat, Kha1rpur. \1ardan and Jacobabad etc.
7. Iron Ore
Availability of iron is equally imperative like oil and coal for industrial
advancement. In PaJostan, it is found in limited quantit) and low qualit). Most of
the required Iron ore is imported from abroad. Its deposits are found in Chitral.
Chaghai. Kohat, Khurram Agency, Mardan, Hazara. Mianwali (Kalabagh) and DG
Khan.
8. Lime Stone
It is used in cement industry, paper. paints, bleaching powder and
constructional material. It is found in Kohat, Kalabagh, Daud Khel and some
regions of Sindh.
9. Rock Salt
It is used for domestic .ind commercial purposes. Its main deposits are
found in Jhelum. Mi,mwah and Kohat district.
IO. Silica Sand

ft is mainly used in chemicals, metallurgical and refractory industries. It is
found in Mianwali. Dera Ghazi Khan. Dadu and Hazara districts.
11. Soap Stone
It is used as a raw material in many industries like paints, roofing tiles, soap
insecticides etc. Il is found at Zhob, Safcd Koh and Sherwan. �
12. Marble
Marble is available in different colour and varieties iq Mulla Ghori (Khyber
Agency) Mardan, S�1at, N?sham, Bazar, Chaghi (Balochista11) and Gilgit f3alack
_ _
and White Marble 1s avatlable 111 large quantity in Kala-Chitta Hills (District
Attack), Other important areas of marble are district Mutaffarabad and Mir Pur of
Azad Khashmir.
241 ,.
lladi Pakb,tan Studie:.Jor (B.§•4Jleur\)
13. China Cla) and Fire Clay

Chma cla) is available 111 Mangora (District �awat) and Nagar Par�ar
(Smd). Fire cla} deposits arc avaiJahle in Salt range and Kala-Chitta I fills. Fire
Clay 1s used for making bricks for use m steel melting furnaces
Land
The economy of Pakistan is basically dependent on its agricultural
development. which is interlinked with the nature of available soil. Fertilit} of land.
for instance. increases agricultural yield while baren land stands obstruction to this
end. In Pakistan all t}pes of soil exist while fertile land is also considerably vast. In
mountainous regions of the Nonh. the soil is rock )' . hence unsuitable for
cultivation.
Forests
Forests are yery important natural resources. They play a dominate role in
the development of a country and for the elimination of environmental pollution. In
the opinion of economic experts, forests should cover at least one fourths of the
total area of a country. Keeping in view this requirement. Pakistan suffers from the
lack of forests. Some of the regions have sufficient fort:sts \Vhile !urge areas are
conspicuou� b} the absence of vegetation and green belts. For example. in
mountains forests are found in abundance but in desert li..lnds no , egctation is
.
, isible.
IMPORTANCE OF FORESTS
Forests arc very important in the econom) of a co11ntf). The importances of
forest are given below:·
J. Forests pro\ ide timber, firewood, gum hone) nnd oth�r ust!ful things. which
are very important for the trade of a countt")
2. Forests are very useful in water logged and salinity affected areas. Trees
absorb water. from the soil and lower ,1.atc1 le, cl of underground reserve.
3. Forests herbs are used for the preparation of medicines
4. Forests provide raw material for paper industry
5. Forests provide us various fruits and fodder to animals.
6. Forests are very important for the wild life.
7. Forests cause, to a great extent, rainf!}II in a region. The presence of forests
measures the amount of water vapours that causes rainfall.
8. Forests make the climate of an area very pleasant. They lessen the intensity
of heat.
9. Forests Promote tourism.
242
.....
l·orcsts have an important role in the economy of Pakistan. About 5 million peoplt:
depend upon forests to earn their livelihood.
4. ILLITERACY
Concept of Illiteracy
flliteracy means those people who cannot read a paragraph in any language
with understanding. But according to the census of Pakistan 1981, illiteracy has
bl!tm defined as reading a paragraph of a language v.ith understanding. According
to the census of Pakistan 1998 the literacy rate ts about 45% and the rest of the
people 55% are illitciate.
Causes of Illiteracy
J. Poverty
In Pakistan 40% people are living below povert� line. In such condition
hov. it is possible for tliem to send their children to schools colleges and
universities. According to UNICEF, 17.6% ch1ldrc>n \\Ori-. and support their
families.
2. Feudal system
Feudal system is a big obstacle 10 the identification of dream of better
literacy rates. Because Pakistani policies are controlled b} feudal lords. the feudal
lords enjoy political power as well as they depri\'e people from getting education.
3. Culture
Illiteracy is our traditional culture based on pure agricultural profossion in
which education is not considered to be a foundation of life. Mostly. the farmers
have been illiterate people through out centuries in the h1stor) of our social life. lt
was considered that 1f a boy becomes highly educated. he will become useless for
the farms.
4. Conservative Approach
Ilhtcracy rate is higher among women than men, because most of the
women are illiterate in rural areas. The people of rural areas dislike women to be
employed in any government or private office. A woman is preferred to be a good
wife, a good mother and a good daughter, if she works within the famil). Now a
change has come into the social structure of rural life that an educatl!d girl is like to
be married as a \\. ife but working within the household duties.
5. 111iterate Parents
J n rural areas most of the parents are illiterate that is why they do not like to
send their children to schools specially the daughters. In urban area� this pcrcl!ntagc
243
ol' il litcrn<:y is ulso higher among
_ the women than that of men. The c�ltural value of
l'nkistmu socic1y dominates both in rural and urban areas to restnct the women
within till' boundary of the house.
(,. Poor Govt. Schemes
I he mo-st of the Govt. schemes of literacy are ill planned, based on adhoc
policy. I his is also a reason of illiteracy. In the present scenario Pakistan counts
umong those 12 cnuntries of the world which are spending less than 2% of GDP on
L'ducution. Free education 1s the right of every person but unfortunately this is not
happening in our country. 1 he Govl. should devise a better plat111ing regarding
education in the hudget.
7. Low Social Contacts with Cities
The people of rural areas have not been in contact with big urban
scttll.!mcnts. Social relations with urban life arc very important factors for bringing
chnng\,; in their attitude and actions. Bccaust! the fanners remain busy with their
. lands, animols and tbe1r crops finding little time to visit citie5.
8. Poor Transport
Transport facilities are not sunicicnt that is a hindrance in social change.
Mostly the schools arc �1t long distances from the houses of villagers.
Effect of Illiteracy
EfTccts of ill itcrncy arc as follows:
J. Minimacs social relations
Ill itcrncy minimizes social rclallons 111 society which leads to less
development of resources.
2. Barrier in the Social Progl'�Ss
lllitcracy is itself a barrier in the social progress among people for better
standards. !llitcracy is major hurdle in understanding techniques for advancement
und progress.
3. Less Prestige
An illiterate person is given-less prestige while sitting with other people. He
is given only a labor work and not allowed to sit on table and chair in offices. He is
considered to be at low class in society by the educated people because he is poor
nnd illitcrnte..
.a. To create Deprivation among the people
lllit�rncy creates �eprivation among people to enjoy recreations of the
:-ociety. llhtcrntc person 1s unable to read books, maguzine, articles and other
244
lladl Pd.utan Studlnfur (BS-4 yt>ars)
n:ading 'materials. He cannot participate in forums and platfonns uf t:ducatc<l

people.
5. Attitude of Illiterate people
Illiterate people are unable to deal with the social situ�tions in � better way.
In such kind of situation, their attitude is abnonnal and some times deviant too.
6. Backwardness
Illiterate people are unable to understand the problem and its solution.
There Illiteracy cerates backwardness among the people.
7. Hamper Social Change
. . . .
Illiteracy hampers social change because the 1lhterate do not like social
change. They want to live with their existing environment and resist any change.
8. Crime and Violence
Illiterates commit more crimes than the educated people. Violent attitude is
more in illiterate than the literate persons.
9. Low quality of life.
Illiterate people enjoy poor quality of life, and their status in ;he society is
also poor.
SOLUTION OF ILLITERACY
Some solutions ofilliteracy are suggested as under:
J. Awareness about Problem
To bring these illiterate people into the liens of progress, advancement and
change it is necessary to aware them about problems and consequences of illiteracy
as ·their problem. They should be provided infonnation through mass media of
communication.
2. Attitude Change
Illiterate people can be drained into channel of progressive people with
attitude change through showing movies, leetures by officers and programs of
literacy on radio and television. lbese people can be given incentive of prizes. if
they take classes ofliteracy in the union counoil offices or schools of the village.
J. Literacy Programs
The literacy program includes teaching the basic subject in the lang
the people, Ena)isb, Urdu or what ever they like. This uage of
work can be done by other
. educated yo� men of� rural areas on �ohmtary basis. The build
ing is available
as school, hospital, councd office and even the mosque of the area.
.f. To provtde free Eduaflonal ltt1111
The people who attend this literacy program should be
provided stationary
and books free ofcost.
245
1/1111/ J•11J.l,11111 S11111/n or Jt.\' ,I 1'1'111\) ¥ea£ ---
s. Pt.•,·iod of T,·n,·hin� Pro�•'nun ·

. .
(hi.' tlllll' 1,1 ll'itd1111l' and k,11111111' lllll , I'l. I I \ n • ( ill th� C\ l.'111111' •, 1 1 tit•'·
• • 1" s·11nkk11t Ill lllLll\l.'
1 t1.',ll,1 11ng , l1 11.·m
complctron <)I 1lw11 \\01k I <HII 11, s1, ,,1.•l•11.:,;
ht.,;rutc us to �·ml .iml ,Hite tlw bas1t· thmr'- ,,r 1l11:ir 111..•1.•d. l'111s l.'an b-.: c,HtllH\11.'li up
to nnothcr two to 1hrl'C ,,·.,;1.·ks at 1lw11 homes <'ll their in11:11.·st
6. lmporhrnct.· of 11:dm·ntion
.
1111.· ii literate p1.:opk �II\ I 1mt l 111.·) ,m:• ll 1 II11.:• 1,•1._, ,t - '11•1.·
i.: ul. t111.·11• a c:,1'l.' so
. . . · ·J (lll thl.' l,1d thi.11
-� 1,•1,1.
1.:dm:ut1011 or l111.:r,tl'} rs ll'-1.'1 l''>S hn tI 11.·m ') '- u1 n1' g111 II 1.:'Ill ·,L
th1.:ir htc1,1c) ,..,,11 b1.• hl'lpful to 1.·lh11.·u11.· th1.•11 d11ldu:n. l h1.') \\ ill h:d impot l,11\�1.• <'I
l'ducotion and \\ill 1.:duu1t1.· !heir d1dd11.·n al ,111y l'<lst.
7. Injection of l'1111n�,·d untl prof.!n·�,
I .ducation is on 11\Jl.'Cttnn ol ch,lllg1.• 11ml progn::-s "<' 11 chung1.•:,; thl.' m11H.I
firs! and then 11 hnngs changes 111 till' Int.ti s1.Kial lit�•. C'hang1.• of nund ts lhl.' ch:mg1.'
ot general soctal lil'i:. and tlw mind c;tnnot be ch:ingl.'d until the 1.·Juc.1tion is tll)l
given 10 the pcopk. Fducutio11 is an 11\l�ction lll drnngt• ,111d pmgrl.'ss. ·th1.· us\! ot
,adio, tclcv1s1on . 111.·,,spapcts and the muss mcd1,1 ()r cnmmtmicati1.lll nrc the
suppor1111g sourcl'S for the accl.'pllu1cl.' ol cducnt1on for pwr,n::-s.
5. FOREIGN POLICY OF ISLAMIC Rl�PUBLIC OF PAKlSTAN

Ocfinition or Forci�11 Policy
f'h.,; forl.'1gn poltc, t!-i to 1.·stnhlish 11ml d1.·vl'l<lp n..·lali,,ns \\ ith 1.lth<:1 countries
LO vH1tch the n.ilional inh.:re'-tS hy taking ,1ppropn,lll.' stl.'ps al intcrn,11ion,1I k\ d.
Principles of Forei�n Polic)
rorl.!ign policy of Pakistan is b.1sed 011 thl.' folkH\'ing Hosie pnncipks.-
i. Peacefu l Co-e�istence
Pakistan believes in pcacdul Cl H!:\istcnc..; ,U1d rcspl.'ct" the hol.!rt). freedom
and sovereignty of other countries, and expects thi: same from others. Pakistan is
always disinterested in the intl.'rnal affairs of other::-. and opposl.'s impcriuli::-m and
aggression of every type.
ii. Non-alignment
Pak1�lan bus �<loplcc.l the policy of non-uligmncnt by maki
ng changes 111 1ts
forei� policy. Pak1s�an hus not shown alignment with t\11) bloc
_ . k. und hns
estobhshcd good relut1onsh1p with nil the countries. ( hcn:fc..1rc. n<.>\\
P,tk.ist,m 1s
trying to establish good relutionsh1p with Russiu. Unttcd
Statc.:s. China United
Kingdom. Fruncc and other countries and expects
the smm: from o�lh!rs or
significant importuncc. At prcs..;111 Pukislun is
ulso a ,cgular member ol Non
aligned Mcn,emcnt (NAM),
246
1/utli Pak/Har, Vr,ulfr!\f!n (BS-4 •can
iii. Bilatcralism
Pakistan \.\ants Lo 'develop its relations with all countries on the
basis of
bilatcralism. Pakistan also wants to solve its conflicts with neighbouring countne
s
on the basis of' hilatcralism. Therefore, Pakistan has invited India many times to
sohc the Kashmir dispute by negotiation.
" lJnitcd Nations Charter
Pakistan is a mcmbl!r of United Nations and follows its charter strictly.
·1 herefore. Pakistau has supported every action or tht! United Nations and pro\ided
military assistance to implement its decisions.
v. Support to Right of Self-determination
Paki..,tan supports the right of ·self-determination of all the suppressed
nations Pakistan believes that l!VCI) nation must have the right of self
dctermination. Therefore, Pakistan has supported the demand of aboltshmg the
colonialism and every movement for the exercise of the right of self-determination
in Europe, Africa and Asia. Pakistan has playeJ very important role in the struggle
of independence of Kashmir, Palestine, Bosnia, Namibia and Vietnam. It has also
opposed the occupation of Afghanistan by Russia. and helped the Afghanis to get
tht! liberation trom foreign rule.
vi. Unity of lslamit: \\'orlll
Pakistan is the supportt!r of the unity of lsl11m1c world. and is folio\.\ ing the
policy to-establish good relations with Muslim countries. Pakistan has alv.ays tried
to solve the conflicts oflslamic world and playe<l very important role m Iran - Iraq
war. Kuwait's occupation by [raq, Palestine's liberation, and Atghanistan's
liberation. Pakistan 1s an act1\C member of the Organization of Islamic Conference
(OfC') Pakistnn has provided a platfom1 for Muslim countries of Central Asia to
solve their economic problems hy establishing Economic Cooperation Organi1at1on
(ECO).
vii. De-wcaponi�ation
Pakbtan is the main supporter of dt!-v�caponisat1on and supported all
international efforts to de-weaponise the world. ·1 ht:refore. Pakistan is not in the
race of weapo,1isation. Pakistan uses atomic energ) for peaceful purposes. Pakistan
tries to avoid the danger of nuclear war in the world. Pakistan has repeatedly
suggested for the de-weaponisation of South Asia, but India has not responded it
accordingly.
viii. Elimination of Racial Discrimination
Pakistan wants to eliminate the racial discrimination throughout the world.
Pakistan has protested over racial discrimination in South Africa, Namibia and
247
Iladi PaAl,run Stu
die\ for (BS-4year.)
SC,
Rodeshia. ·1 here is no racbl discrimination in Pakistan and all the minorities 111
_
:akistan ha\"e equal rights.
tx. Establishment of Peace
Pakistan wants establishment of peace througho711 the world. Pakista 11 h.is
als� protested agamst aggressive powers' dcsll"C'> and .supporlcd the oppressed
nations for .;etting the pc;c.1ce Pakistan h,tS rep�atcdly invited India to ncgotintc
peace in South Asia but it has rcJected every move.
:\. Good Relations with Neighbours
Pakistan ,,ants good relationship with all neighbours including India.
Pakistan also wants 10 solv_c all the issues ,,ith ncighhouring countries including
Kashmir issue \\ith India peaceful!). Thcrefure. Pakistan has invited India for talk�
at an} time. at every level and at e\'ery place.
xi. International and Regional Cooperation
Pakistan 1s an active member of international and regional organizations i.e.
United 1\auons. ·on-aligned Movement (NAM). Organization of Islamic
Conference (OIC). Economic Cooperation Organization (ECO) and SAARC.
Pakista n always cooperates with all these organizations for the security of world
peace.
OBJECTIVES OF FOREIGN POLICY
Pakistan emerged on the map of the world on 14 AUL'USt I 94 7 and it
inherited the foreign policy from British India. After independenLc, Pakistnn mndc
·some chang es in British policy according to the ideology and the objectives o f
Pakistan Movem ent. The main objectives of the foreign pl)lic) of P,tkistnn arcpas
under:-
l, National Security
The main objective of foreign policy of Pakistan is its n.ttH.>nJI sccurit) or
• dC,pendence. Pakistan was a new born stute. · and there wa, a need to m ake
in •
ecunt�. s o p ak'1�tan 'tormulatcd its Jon:1gn pohc) on the ba::,1�
ar rang emenrs for i�:; s
ty. It g�,e �ue 11�1ponance to the national sc�unt\ v,h1k
of national secun
onsh1ps w1tb other cow1trics. Pakistan respects th e
t blishing external rdat1
�:t�ona l integritY, and the political independcnct. of other countri�s, and expect from
others the same.
..•
11 Economic Development
en
Pakistan is a developing country and inspires for its economic de, elopm �-
stablish and maint ain cordial relations with those states with whom 1(
It n eeds to e i trade reIat10.
ns or from whom .1t can obta i. n maximum
. 1.:conon11c
axi mize . ts
�:�ts. P akistan has made changes in its fQreign policy keeping in view the n�v..
248

Pakistan Studies Book

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pakistan Studies Book

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pakistan Studies Book

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

STUDIES

2. I 6 General Elect ion ( 1945-46) 47

�. l 7 Cabinet Mission Plan ( I <J46) 49

2.18 Interim Government ( 1946) 52

2.19 3rd June Plan ( 1947) 56

4.3 Khawaja Nazimuddin as the Governor General of I 00

4.4 Malik Ghulam Muhammad As the Governor General of I 04

4.7 Muhammad Ayoub Khan as the President of Pakistan 11 7

4.8 General Yahya Khan as the President of Pakistan (March 127

4.9 Zulfiqar Ali Bhutto as the President of Pakistan 138

4.10 The Constitution of 1973 138

4.1 1 General Zia-ul-Haq's Reign ( I 977-1988) 149

4.12 Benazir Bhutto as Prime Minister of Pakislan 155

4. 14 Amendments in the Constitution of Pakistan l 973 166

Chapter-5 Economic and Social Issues in Pakistan

5.2 Agriculture Development and Problems 189

5.3 Population Growth 197

5.4 Unemployment 202

5.5 Poverty 207

Chapter-6 Relations with Neighbors and Supper power country

Dr. Asian, Syed Defined the Ideology of Pakisf(lll as;

Origion of Two Nations Theory and Ideology of Paki�tan

Pioneer of Two Nation Theory

2. Reality of Islamic Ideology

7. Concept of a Separate Mu,lim Stat�

1. Foundation of Muslim Nation in India

Importance of Ideology of Pakistan

1.5 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF IDEOLOGY OF PAKISTAN

c e for the Mus�ims five times

4. Social Justice and Equality

5. Who promoted the two nation theory in the sub-continent?

Q.3: Fill in the Blanks.

Q No. 1: Encircle the correct options.

Q No. 3: Fill in the Blanks.

5. T·wo Nation Theory

7. Implementation of Islamic System

1 5 1·n English along with Persian

upwardly mobile middle class. lndian Muslims created a significant impact on

2.3 ALL I l)IA MUSLIM LEAG E (I Y06)

political institution provided an opportunity for the Muslims to form a political

3. Cooperation with other communicates, without prejudice to the other afore­

2.4 THE LUCKNOW PACT 1916

them.So, millions of Muslim families migrated to Afghanistan -after selling their

3. Sind would be separated from Bombay

2. 7 THE NEHRU REPORT (1928)

6. In Hindu majority provinces. the Muslims should be given representation

The First Round Table Conference

Reaction of the Muslim League

MANIFESTOES OF DIFFERENT P�TIES

Manifestocs of the Muslim League.

S. Wardha Educational Scheme

He also discussed the political situation of the sub-continent at large and

. In order to break the deadlock, the Secretary of

Department of the Minorities

Department of the Muslim Lca�uc

Department of the Minorities

Sr. No. Office

Preparation of 3 rd June plan 19-'7

4. States shall be free and independent to JOtn Pakistan or India keeping

Obiective type questions

3. Cooperation with other communicates, without prejudice to the other afore